Home

Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual

1. 4 Control status of the remote I O module Online module change can be performed when a stop error has not occurred on the remote I O module In addition online module change can be performed when an error that allows the system to continue operation occurs However if the followings occur while online module change is performed the online module change is suspended The remote I O module has been reset A stop error has occurred 5 Number of modules that can be replaced online Only one module can be replaced on a remote I O station while online module change is performed once More than one module cannot be replaced simultaneously 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q b Restrictions online module change operation The following operations cannot be performed while online module change is performed 1 Issue an online module change request from more than one GX Developer to a remote I O module 2 Write parameters in the remote I O module being replaced online If an online module change request is issued from other GX Developer to a remote I O module being replaced online the message below is displayed Confirm the message and select Yes or No ise online module change is executed from other equipments hange after changing the connection path J No e When Yes is selected The operation of online module change is switched to GX Developer 2 which issued the r
2. icates an I O module verification error e Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation App 42 App 42 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 6 Redundant power supply module information SD1780 to SD1789 are valid only for a redundant power supply system The bits are all 0 for a singular power supply system Power sp1780 SUPPly off detection status Power supply SD1781 failure detection status Momentary power failure D1782_ detection counter for power supply 1 1 Momentary power failure SD1783 detection counter for power supply 2 1 1 The power supply 1 indicates the redundant power supply module Q6LIRP mounted on the POWER 1 slot of the redundant base unit Q3 The power supply 2 indicates the redundant power supply module Q6l App 43 Meaning Power supply off detection status Power supply failure detection status Momentary power failure detection count for power supply 1 Momentary power failure detection count for power supply 2 Corresponding ACPU po TT Set by When set Applicable Explanati xplanation CPU Stores the status of the redundant power supply module Q6OIRP with input power OFF in the following bit pattern Stores 0 when the main base unit is not the redundant main base unit Q300RB Each bit 0 Input power ON status No redundant p
3. MELSEC Q This test checks the hardware inside the network module 1 Connect the IN and OUT terminals of the QJ71LP21 QJ72LP25 network module for the optical loop system with an optical fiber cable Do not connect cables or terminal resistors if the QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15 network module for the coaxial bus system is used For QJ71LP21 QJ72LP25 For QJ71LP21 QJ72BR15 optical loop system coaxial bus system Connect IN and OUT S 5 Do not connect anything Set the model setting switch of the network module to 3 Set it to 7 when using the QJ71LP21 QJ72LP25 at 25Mbps The hardware test is selected Power on the target station The hardware test is executed check the execution status on the network module display During the test the T PASS LED flashes and the test is determined to have completed normally when it flashes 20 times If the test is abnormally completed the ERR LED flashes Before test During test Normal completion of test T PASSO Off UE Flashing 5 E Normal completion of test after 20 flashes approximately 10 s Abnormal completion of test ERR Flashing When an error occurs the contents of the error should be checked with GX Developer The faulty area can be examined by replacing the cable or module In the MELSECNETIH a link refresh is executed even when the module is offline Thus the user can check the testing status and
4. For details about the repeater module AGBR10 see the following user s manual attached to the product Model AGBR10 A6BR10 DC MELSECNET 10 Coaxial Bus System Repeater Module User s Manual IB 66499 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION 3 With a repeater module branch connection Remote master station Remote I O station Remote 1 0 station Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15 QJ72BR15 F type connector A6RCON F F type connector A6RCON F F type connector A6RCON F T type connector A6BR10 accessory Eo Coaxial cable Terminal resistor Terminal resistor Coaxial cable A6RCON R75 A6BR10 A6RCON R75 sold separately sold separately Remote I O station Remote I O station Station No 3 Station No n n lt 32 QJ72BR15 Terminal resistor A6RCON R75 sold separately T type connector A6BR10 accessory F type connector A6RCON F F type connector A6RCON F Terminal resistor A6RCON R75 sold separately Coaxial cable 1 By setting stations that will be connected in future stations that are included in the number of stations but not actually connected as reserved stations a communication error can be prevented and the link scan time will not be affected 2 The two connectors of the F type connector are not dedicated to IN and OUT
5. Forward loop gt Reverse loop 2 Ifan error occurs in the transmission path while the multiplex transmission function is used data linking continues by communicating only using the transmission path on one side of either the forward or reverse loop or by switching to the communication using loopback The transmission speed in this case is 10 Mbps 25Mbps Loopback The multiplex transmission function is effective only in reducing the link scan time when the number of connected stations is 16 or more and the link devices assigned with common parameters is 2 048 bytes or more The link scan time will be 1 1 to 1 3 times faster compared to when the multiplex transmission function is not used If the multiplex transmission function is used in the configuration where the number of connected stations or the assigned link devices is less than the above the link scan time may be increased compared to the case where the function is not used 7 16 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 5 Return Sequence Station Number Setting Function x The remote I O net can set the number of stations for which stations with communication errors during one link scan can perform return sequence If the number of stations set is large a large number of communication stations with errors can perform return sequence However link scan during return sequence will take longer than a normal link scan so care must be taken to
6. 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q Module handling precautions Since the module case is made of resin do not drop it or subject it to strong impacts e The module can easily be secured to the base unit using the hook located at the top of the module However if the module is to be used in an area subject to strong vibration or impact it is recommended to secure it with the module fixing screws In this case tighten the module fixing screws within the following clamping torque range Module fixing screws M3 clamping torque ranging from 0 36 to 0 48 Nem e Tighten the external power supply terminal screw of QJ71LP21S 25 within the following torque range For the specification of the external power supply terminal refer to section 3 1 1 External power supply terminal screw M3 torque ranging from 0 42 to 0 58 Nem DANGER e Do not touch the terminals and the connectors while the power to the module is on Doing so may cause electric shocks or malfunctions e f the module is not mounted properly and fastened with the screws it may cause the module to malfunction break down or fall off If the screws are tightened excessively it may damage the module and the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off CAUTION e Be careful not to let foreign particles such as chaff or wire chips enter the module They may cause fire breakdowns or malfunctions e Never d
7. Y Parameter assignments Master module 1Mr LX LY 0 to 7F 100 to 17F 200 to 27F 300 to 37F 400 to 47F 500 to 57F 0 to FFF ere LW 0 to FFF 3 3FFF Master module 2Mr LY 800 to FFF 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS Setting screen MELSEC Q The following shows the settings of the refresh parameters for each module that are displayed on the screen Settings of module 1 1Mr transfer SB transfer SW transfers 1 to 6 0000 O1FF oo00 DIFF moo an 300 037F O1FF 1300 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 5 1 6 Valid Module During Other Station Access This parameter is used to specify any of the following modules to be relayed when a data communication request for which the network No of the access target PLC station cannot be specified from the host access from the QJ71C24 A compatible 1C frame QJ71E71 A compatible 1E frame etc to other stations is issued e MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 module e Ethernet module This setting is not required when a data communication request for which the network No can be specified such as the QJ71C24 QnA compatible 3C frame QnA compatible 4C frame or QJ71E71 QnA compatible 3E frame is used Leave it as the default 1 setting For details of the QJ71C24 or QJ71E71 protocol refer to the Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual Screen settings Select from the selection dialogue box
8. x2 The number of intelligent function module parameters that may be set for automatic refresh setting is limited The following is the number of parameters that may be set Sum total of the numbers of parameters within the setting ranges of all intelligent function modules lt 256 If the above is exceeded the remote I O module detects the SP PARA ERROR 3301 error If the error has been detected read write the data of the intelligent function modules using the REMFR REMTO instruction The number of parameters for initial setting is preset to each intelligent function module To confirm the numbers of parameters for initial setting refer to the user s manuals of the corresponding intelligent function modules Refer to Section 6 3 for the way to count the number of parameters for automatic refresh setting 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 3 MELSEC Q Network parameters The remote I O module can set network parameters in the same way as the CPU module Major items Ethernet settings Sets the Ethernet network parameters CC Link settings Sets the CC Link settings network parameters a For details on Ethernet settings refer to Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface User s Manual Basic SH 080009 b For details on CC Link refer to CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual SH 080394E Remote password For remote I O modules a remote password similar to that applied to QCPU can be set
9. Designates the host device to be set to 1 scan on by the write completion Bit device 1 OFF Not completed ON Completed Word device bit designation OFF Normal ON Abnormal 1 Bit device sss sss ttre X Y M L F V B x2 Word device ttt T C D W ST R ZR x3 Word device bit designation Word device bit number 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS Host CPU Master module Remote I O module Intelligent function module MELSEC Q b Instruction execution timing 1 Normal completion REMEFR instruction Sequence scan Write command Write completion device Device designated in D5 Write completion device D5 1 device Set data Devices designated in D1 D2 D4 Write data storage device Device W MR designated in D3 Buffer memory xxx xX 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS REMTO instruction MELSEC Q Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 Write command rs Write completion device Device Host CPU designated in D5 Write completion OFF device D5 1 device Set data Devices designated in D1 ee rs D2 D4 device Device W MR designated in D3 Write data storage Master module Remote I O module Intelligent function module 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Abnormal completion REMEFR instruction Sequen
10. Power on the target station The internal self loopback test is executed check the execution status on the network module display During the test the T PASS LED flashes and the test is determined to have completed normally when it flashes 20 times If the test is abnormally completed the ERR LED flashes Before test During test Normal completion of test T PASSL Off UE Flashing gt Oi Normal completion of test after 20 flashes approximately 10 s Abnormal completion of test ERR E Flashing When an error occurs the contents of the error should be checked with GX Developer The faulty area can be examined by replacing the module In the MELSECNETIH a link refresh is executed even when the module is offline Thus the user can check the testing status and the result with GX Developer or a sequence program using the special link registers Host communication status SW0047 gt 1F Offline test Cause of communication interruption SW0048 gt 2 Offline test Offline test status on requesting side SWOOAC 8 Internal self loopback test Offline test results on requesting side SWOOAD 0 Normal 1orlarger Error code For details on how to check the error contents see Chapter 8 If two or more modules are installed the testing status and the result of each module can be checked by adding 2004 to the corresponding device number 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION 4 7 3 Hardware test
11. Ethernet With QCPU the Ethernet IP address of the 1st module is stored QCPU information in buffer memory Remote With QCPU the Ethernet error code of the 1st module is read with the ERRRD instruction Infi tion from 2nd TEOTAN OLENA Ns Configuration is identical to that for the first module module Infi tion from 3rd TOATA ee AFSS l Configuration is identical to that for the first module S Initial module Infi tion fi E A TATE Configuration is identical to that for the first module 4th module Scan Information Corresponding Set b Applicabl Number Name Meaning Explanation Sy ACPU aie When set CPU p IT Service interval f Paa Unit module No Sets I O number for module that measures service interval measureme nt module Module service e When SM551 is ON stores service interval for module interval designated by SD550 in 1 ms units Service in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 n n Nn nN In wo Oo Oo OO Oo Oo oO oO O Q oO oO a A AAR A gt P N an A N g n Oo oO O n Oo oO Q interval time Module service e When SM551 is ON stores service interval for module Request interval designated by SD550 in 100 us units in 100 us units e Range from 000 to 900 n n n 0 0 s a a a a a a N gt te App 41 App 41 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 4 Fuse blown module ning Corresponding Applicable Number Name Mea Explanation ACPU PS po TT D1300 The numbers
12. Set the mode setting switches in the same position on all network modules 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 LED displays BE Module operating normally off WDT error occurred hardware error E MNG 1 Operating as a remote master station Not operating as a remote master station T PASS Green on on Executing baton pass being joined in a network Green flash Test is determined to have completed normally when this LED flashes 20 times approximately a s during the test off Baton pass not yet executed the host is disconnected from the network rhe Greenon on Data link being executed cyclic transmission is being executed Data link not yet executed parameter receiving not completed host CPU error data link stop Ba Data Denso sent Off Data not yet sent e on Data being received of Data not yet received An error occurred for instance a station number setting error other than 0 to 64 mode setting error set to use prohibited operation condition setting error parameters or an installed CPU type error settings outside the range used CPU type A station with the same number already exists in the network Invalid parameter settings contradicting settings A moderate or fatal error occurred in the CPU module eed An error was detected while testing the network module The mode setting switch or the station num
13. 1 to 64 Of 33 to 64 will result in a setting error However the red ERR LED will not turn ON 65 to 99 Setting error The red ERR LED turns ON 3 IN OUT connectors Connected with an optical fiber connector 4 IN Forward loop receiving 4 IN Reverse loop sending C OUT Reverse loop receiving OUT Forward loop sending C4 4 MODE factory default setting 0 Mode setting switch This switch sets the operation mode a QJ71LP21 QU71LP21G QU71LP21GE QJ71BR11 3 Setting Description 0 Online Mode selected with a parameter 4 becomes valid 1 Self loopback test Internal self loopback test Hardware test Use prohibited b QU71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 Setting Description Online Mode selected with a parameter becomes valid Self loopback test When 10Mbps Internal self loopback test in use Hardware test Online Mode selected with 1 LED displays Coaxial cable bus module QJ71BR11 RUN MN T PASS D LINK 1 LED displays eg 2 Same as the optical loop module 4 Same as the optical a parameter becomes valid loop module Self loopback test When 25Mbps in use Internal self loopback test Hardware test Use prohibited 5 Coaxial connector Connect an F type connector for a coaxial cable 6 External power supply terminal block Wire for external power supply
14. Ext Basel Ext Base2 8 Slot Default 12 Slot Default Read PLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End Cancel For details about the concepts relating to input output number assignment and for details about using the GX Developer for I O assignment refer to the QCPU user s manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 9 Stopping Restarting the Cyclic Transmission and Stopping Link Refreshing Network Test The remote I O network can use the network test of the GX Developer to stop and restart cyclic data This function is useful when other station s data should not be received or when the host s data should not be sent at system startup when debugging etc CPU Master module LB Station No 1 C Station No 1 Station No 2 lt 2 Link refresh Station No 2 1 i Staton No 3 2unkrefesh staton no 3 For details about routing refer to the Q corresponding MELSECNET H network system reference manual PLC to PLC network l melba 1 Stopping restarting the cyclic transmission stops or restarts the data receiving link scan between the network modules of the applicable station However the data receiving link refresh between the PLC CPU and network modules cannot be stopped or restarted by this processing 2 Execution using GX Developer Through the network test link startup link stop and forced link sta
15. Multiplexed remote ate Multiplexed remote Setting item sub master station Reference master station DMR DSMr Network module switch STATION NO i 80 aa 1 to 64 Section 4 2 1 MODE e Section 4 2 1 Parameter setting on GX Developer MELSECNET H Ethernet module count setting MELSECNET H MELSECNET H Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Section 5 1 1 master station sub master station Starting I O Section 5 1 2 Networkno seon512 Total stations e fo o a Section 5 1 2 Groupno ATA Section 1 2 Mode Section 12 Common parameters AT Section 1 3 Auxiliary seting AT A Section 5 1 4 Station specific parameters Refresh parameters Section 5 1 5 Valid module during other station access Interlink transmission parameter Routing parameters ee ee ee Always set A Default setting A Set as needed X No need to set A A Section 5 1 6 x1 Set Total stations and common parameters of the multiplexed remote sub master station when using the multiplexed remote sub master station to resume the network The settings must be the same as those of the multiplexed remote master station For example if the multiplexed remote master station is powered off and then on during network control by the multiplexed remote sub master station the multiplexed remote sub master station resumes networking as a master operating station 2 Default value is not set
16. right c 1998 FarPoint Technologies Inc afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer StraBe 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 e mail megfamail meg mee com EUROPE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 155 68 55 68 Fax 33 155 68 56 85 e mail factoryautomation framee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IRELAND EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 419 88 00 Fax 353 0 1 419 88 90 e mail sales info meir mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ITALY EUROPE B V Italian Branch Via Paracelso 12 I 20041 Agrate Brianza Ml Phone 39 039 60 53 1 Fax 39 039 60 53 312 e mail factory automation it mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN EUROPE B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rubi 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Phone 34 9 3 565 3131 Fax 34 9 3 589 2948 e mail industrial sp mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK EUROPE B V UK Branch Travellers Lane GB Hatfield Herts AL10 8 XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 e mail automation meuk mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC JAPAN CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo K
17. 3 Transmission information SBO056 Displays the station type that controls the remote I O station When the remote master station becomes faulty the indication automatically changes to the remote sub master station e Remote master station communication remote sub master station communication 4 Remote sub master station communication SBO058 Displays the cyclic transmission specification status communication by remote sub master station when the remote master station becomes faulty e Yes No 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Data link information 5 Total number of link stations Displays the total number of the link stations set with the parameter plus one for the remote master station Station of maximum normal transmission SW005A Displays the highest station number that is executing the baton pass normally the status where the transient transmission is possible The T PASS LED of the network module turns on for stations executing the baton pass normally Station of maximum data link SW005B Displays the highest station number that is executing data linking normally cyclic transmission and transient transmission The D LINK LED of the network module turns on for stations executing data linking normally Transmission status SW0047 Displays the communication status of the host Indication Description In Data Link Data link is being executed Suspend Data link Other Other station stopped the cyclic tr
18. 1 S 1 1 1 1 MS ie Shee ee eal i SW70 1 H K10 1 73 X Station 2 baton path status SW74 1 H K10 4 X Station 2 cyclic transmission 3 T4 al t a wc NB m 7 N3 M3 Mi a EEEE A EA S EE S EAE E E EE ES E EEEE E E E EE EEA EEE a 1 i i i NEN i Program for communication with remote I O station No 2 aC RB ee eee DOR eae eo NCR N3 Y Loo No END 7 In the timer constant K _ set the following value Baton path status TO T3 Cyclic transmission status Sequence scan time x 4 or more Parameter communication status Sequence scan time x 3 or more T1 T2 T4 Reason The above value should be set to prevent control from being stopped if the network has detected an instantaneous fault due to the cable noise and so forth 4 times and 3 times are given as guidelines 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 11 Multiplexed remote master function for the redundant system QNPRHCPU only The redundant system uses the multiplexed remote master function to control I O modules and intelligent function modules The multiplexed remote master function for the redundant system continues the control of remote I O stations when the multiplexed remote master station control system fails by switching the multiplexed remote master station from the control system to the standby system and switching the multiplexed remote sub master station standby system from the standby system to
19. 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 SPECIFICATIONS The following describes the network system specifications performance specifications and the specifications for sending and receiving link data For general specifications refer to the user s manual of the CPU module to be used on the network system 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 1 1 Optical loop system performance specifications Table 3 1 shows the performance of the optical loop system Table 3 1 Optical loop system performance specifications im Remote master station Maximum 16384 points Remote master station remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points remote sub master number of links station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points per network 16384 points Remote master station remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points e Remote Master Station Remote I O station LY LB 8 2 X LW lt 1600 bytes Remote I O station gt Remote Master Station LX LB 8 2 X LW lt 1600 bytes e Multiplexed remote master station lt gt multiplexed remote sub master station LY LB 8 2 X LW lt 2000 bytes Maximum 1 O points per remote X Y lt 4096 points I O station If the X Y numbers are duplicate only one side is taken into consideration D A Device points per remote VOstaon D O o o oo es PR 25 Mbps 10 Mbp
20. 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q f Select the multiplexed remote master station or multiplexed remote sub master station from Network type on the Module count setting screen of the GX Developer parameters e Multiplexed remote master station MNET H Multiplexed remote master w e Multiplexed remote sub master station MNET H Multiplexed remote sub w Since the multiplexed remote master station needs to recognize the station number of the multiplexed remote sub master station set the station number of the multiplexed remote sub master station on the network range assignment screen of the multiplexed remote master station 1 Choose station No of multiplexed remote a sub master station 2 After choosing station No of multiplexed remote sub master station click this button to complete setting After the setting is completed Sub appears in Station No field g On the network range assignment screen assign the ranges for information transfer to from the multiplexed remote sub master station and also the ranges for control of the remote I O stations 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Selection of operating station status when multiplexed remote master station returns to system It is possible to set the parameter of the multiplexed remote master station to select whether the remote I O stations will be controlled by the multiplexed remote master station or by the multiplexed remote
21. 8th 1st 8th 1st module module module module gt lt gt Information of Information of 1 D290 Numberof points Stores the number of points currently set for X devices allocated for X Number of points 3 2 D291 Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices allocated for Y Number of points x SD292 Stores the number of points currently set for M devices i allocated for M Device Number of points SD294 allocation located a B e Stores the number of points currently set for B devices Same as Number Of Donte S Initial SD296 parameter S P Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices allocated for SB contents Foni SD302 x a se aap Stores the number of points currently set for D devices SD303 Sr onpointg Stores the number of points currently set for W devices ed for W SD304 Number of points Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices allocated for SW App 40 App 40 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Set b Applicabl Number Name Meaning Explanation hit ie ACPU oy DIT No of modules e Indicates the number of modules installed on Ethernet installed e Ethernet I O No of the 1st module installed sto Ethernet network No of the 1st module installed e Ethernet group No of the 1st module installed Stati i Ethernet station No of the 1st module installed S Initial n H oO H
22. Intelligent Remote I O module function module Link register W Link register LW Refresh Intelligent function module parameters e Initial settings GX Automatic refresh Configurator settings Link register W Buffer memory Refresh 2 Special link instructions can be used to directly read from or write to the buffer memory of the intelligent module e REMER instruction Reads data from the buffer memory of the remote I O station intelligent function module REMTO instruction Writes data to the buffer memory of the remote I O station intelligent function module REMTO Remote master station __ Remote I O station Intelligent function module QCPU Network module Intelligent Network module function module j Z REMTOH REMTO Buffer memory 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 3 By refreshing the intelligent function module data into the remote I O module s data register D by the automatic refresh setting of the intelligent function module parameters the remote master station can read write data from to the data register D with READ or WRITE instruction WRITE Remote master station Remote I O station Intelligent function module QCPU Master station ewa f Intelligent Remote I O module function module yy Data Buffer V regist
23. PARAMETER ERROR File name Parameter number 2 A remote I O station is reset by the following 1 Pressing the reset switch of the remote station At power ON At reset 7 At power ON At reset 7 2 Resetting the CPU module on the remote master station or turning it to RUN from STOP when the remote I O station is in the following status e The remote I O station has not been reset after modification of some remote I O station parameters e A stop error has occurred on the remote I O station TROUBLESHOOTIN A MELSEC Q Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action Error code e Reduce the Q series Ethernet modules to 4 2106 5 or more Q series Ethernet modules were installed or less 65 or more Q series CC Link modules were installed e Reduce the Q series CC Link modules to 64 or less 7 7 Make the PLC parameter s I O assignment The start X Y set in the PLC parameter s I O assignment settings A 2107 setting again so it is consistent with the actual is overlapped with the one for another module status of the intelligent function module Do not mount a remote I O module and a CPU 2121 A CPU module has been mounted on the base unit module on the same system f Replace the main base unit with a 2122 The QA1S60B QA6 0B are used for the main base unit usable one e Remove the module installed to the 65th or A module is installed to the 65th or higher slot later slot A
24. 0 Master station returns as master operating station control station 1 Master station returns as sub master operating station standby station Parameter status 0 Without parameters for remote sub master station 1 With parameters for master station and sub master station Stores the network module type of the host b15 b14 b13 to b2 b1 bO SW0046 0 to 80036 Module type L 70 01 Optical 10 Coaxial 11 Twisted 0 Duplex 1 Single 0 Loop 1 Bus Stores the baton pass status of the host 0 Executing data linking Data linking stopped instructed by other station Data linking stopped instructed by host Executing baton pass parameter received no transmission area in the host Executing baton pass parameter error Swo0047 Baton pass status Executing baton pass parameter not received 71 Being disconnected no baton pass Being disconnected line error Loop test Setup confirmation test Station order check test Communication test Offline test Stores the cause of baton pass interruption of the host Normal communication SW0048 Cause of baton pass Offline 72 _ interruption Offline test 3ormore Cause of interruption see the error codes in Section 8 3 Stores the cause of data linking stop of the host 0 Normal SW0049 Cause of data link 1 Stop instructed 2 No common parameters 73 transmission stop 3 Common parameter error 4 Host CPU error 6 Communic
25. 2 After selecting a station No of the multiplexed remote sub master station click the button to finish the settings When the settings are completed Sub is displayed on the station No box 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q In the case of the multiplexed remote I O network for redundant system set the link devices in the tracking settings in the redundant parameters to update the link devices between the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station The set link devices are tracked from the control system to the standby system via the tracking cable On the network range assignment screen do not set the devices between the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 5 1 4 Supplemental settings The supplemental settings are included in common parameter settings to provide more precise usage Keep the default settings for normal use Common parameters supplemental are only for remote master stations MNET 10 H common parameters supple F 1 Constant scan Maximum No of retums to system p 5 2 stations in 1 scan Station 3 With multiplex transmission 4 Secured data send P Secured data receive Transient setting 5 Maximum No of transients in 1 scan Maximum No of transients in one station 6 Cancel Setting items 1 Constant scan The constant scan function is used to maintai
26. A coaxial cable can be connected to either of them 3 A terminal resistor can be placed on either side of the F type connector 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q b Installing the coaxial cable The following shows how to install the coaxial cable Link module Start Installation Jack Insert the plug by aligning the groove of the plug with the projection of the jack Plug lt lt Projection Groove c Removing the coaxial cable The following shows how to remove the coaxial cable Rotate the plug in the direction of the arrow clockwise securely to the position shown in the second figure from above Complete Start Removal eo Link module Plug lt Rotate the plug in the direction of the arrow and unhook it a aaa Hold the plug by hand and pull it out in the direction of the arrow as shown in the bottom diagram eet Complete S i 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 9 Offline Tests from GX Developer The offline tests check the cable connection status using the network parameters of GX Developer 4 9 1 Forward loop reverse loop test Remote master station only The forward loop reverse loop test checks the hardware of the network modules and cables after all stations are connected with optical fiber cables It al
27. F7E1 Control data error F7E7 Buffer memory address error F7E8 Network type error F7E9 Instruction not executable error Station number setting error F805 System error F806 System error 80D The hardware of the network module is faulty FS0E Contact your local Mitsubishi representative F80F F811 F812 Replace the network module of the control or normal station with the one compatible with the MELSECNET H Extended mode Change the network type of the normal station to that of the control station Create and write new network parameters to the PLC If the error recurs the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Create and write new network parameters to the PLC Parameter data error code If the error recurs the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Parameter data error parameter 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Table 8 1 Error code list Continued Error No Replace the network module of the normal station with the one compatible with the MELSECNET H Extended mode Change the network type of the normal station to that of the control station Create and write new network parameters to the PLC If the error recurs the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Review station specific parameters Set common parameters station specific parameters
28. If it is abnormal review the remote master station s common parameters and refresh parameters Review the range of the link devices assigned to the sending station Check the setting of the refresh parameters to see in what range of LB LW LX LY of the network module the device range used by the sequence program is stored Is the sequence program correct Are the parameter settings of the remote master station correct 2 The transient transmission is abnormal Check item Checking procedure l according to the error code table in Section 8 3 Confirm the message screen of GX Developer and the error code of the response packet of the dedicated instruction MELSEC communication protocol and take measures based on the error code table in section 8 3 Confirm if transient transmission is executed for ACPU QnACPU or QCPU except for QnPRHCPU by specifying the control system or standby system error code 4B00 Confirm if transient transmission is executed for a single CPU system by specifying a CPU No of a multiple CPU system error code 4B00 Confirm if a value out of the available range is set up for the CPU type of the target Response timeout occurs Station Has the transient transmission is executed routing via the network module of standby system within Change the routing settings to the network module of control system the redundant system Has a stop error occurred on the route CPU module or the CPU module of t
29. Major lems Password setting Set a remote password Setting of password Set the Ethernet module and serial communication module for making the effective module password setting effective For the details of remote password refer to section 7 12 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 6 PROGRAMMING When diverting the program example introduced in this chapter to the actual system fully check that there are no problems in the controllability of the system 6 1 Programming Precautions This section explains the precautions in creating programs using data on the network 6 1 1 Interlock related signals A list of the interlock signal devices used in the sequence programs is provided below See Appendix 2 List of the Link Special Relays SB and Appendix 3 List of the Link Special Registers SW for other explanations such as the operation status and setting status of the host and other stations When multiple network modules are installed the interlock signal devices are refreshed to the devices on the PLC side at 512 points OH to 1FFx intervals according to the default settings as shown below The Q series uses the link special relays SB and the link special registers SW in the entire intelligent function module Because of this it is important to manage SB SW properly so that duplicate SBs and SWs are not used in a program Assignments of the link special relay SB and the link special register SW when multiple
30. Example In the example below the personal computer connected to the QJ71C24 can communicate with the station on network No 2 where the network module 3 is connected Valid module No for access g to other stations 3 A compatible 1C frame Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Valid module during other station access eck End Power QCPU QY41P supply module Network No 3 Network No 2 Power QCPU QJ71 Network No 1 supply LP21 module Ethernet _ 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 5 1 7 Redundant settings For the multiplexed remote master station for redundant system it is necessary to set the same mode as the mode applied to the multiplexed remote master station system A to the multiplexed remote sub master station system B Set the mode of system B in the redundant settings MNET H Multiplexed remote master t Set the mode of the multiplexed remote master station Click the button Redundant settings fonine is Set the same mode as On line applied to the multiplexed Off line Forward loop test remote master station Reverse loop test Test between master station system A Test between slave station end Canceh 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 5 2 Remote I O Station Parameter Settings For remote I O stations set up the PLC parameters network parameters and remote password on the remote I
31. NG Y y y lt Troubleshooting gt E Takes action according to the contents of SW47 and the error code contents that have been stored in SW48 Replace the master module lt Cause gt Possible module WDT error lt Troubleshooting gt Check 1 Verify the base installation 2 Reset the CPU 3 Replace the module 4 Whether or not the host s O slot is assigned to a vacant area lt Cause gt The power is not being supplied Or the overcurrent protection is active lt Troubleshooting gt 1 Verify the power supply status 2 Check that the total current consumption of the module installed on the base unit does not exceed the rated output current of the power supply module used 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q b For the remote I O module m 2 TASS LED 007 Host baton bus is normal End NO Host normal status RUN LED on NO Is power being supplied to the power supply module NO YES YES ERR LED on YES Yy Implement offline tests 1 Hardware test NO 2 Self loopback test 3 Internal self loopback test YES REM LED on NO OK NG Y lt Troubleshooting gt Diagnosis with Replace remote I O lt Causes gt lt Causes gt E Takes action according to GX Developer module May be due to unit WDT Power is not supplied or the contents of SW47 and error over current protection the er
32. Reverse loop Retry Line trouble Communication error UNDER CRC OVER etc Network information e Network Type Module No e Network No Group No Station No Loop switching Station No Factor Switched to Transient transmission error Err code Error type Clear error history Clear type Retry counter clear etc Network test r EEE MA Section 7 9 Loop test oi weit e a Section 4 10 1 Setup confirmation test ccceeeeeeeee Section 4 10 2 Station order check test ccceeeeeee ee Section 4 10 3 TEER Section 4 10 4 1 The target of the network diagnostics is the host s network designated as the connection destination If the connection target is specified as other station or the redundant CPU is specified as control system standby system system A or system B the network monitor can check only the information of the host and other stations The network monitor cannot display correctly while the network module is executing offline tests When the dedicated link instruction is used to access the other station PLC during network diagnosis the execution of the dedicated link instruction may be delayed After taking the following measures perform network diagnosis processing and execute the dedicated link instruction e Execute the COM instruction e Using special register SD315 secure 2 to 3ms as the communication processing time sBO0OO00O and SWOW found in the e
33. VO assignment function ree twit Se PUNANE BR arya RA wt Net weep tits Eo etki E AOAN ese Aaa PRE we Boa ae tae SSeS pase et ae Section 7 8 _ Stopping restarting the cyclic transmission and stopping link refreshing Network test sss e Section 7 9 Multiplex remote master function QNPRHCPU only sect rt ttt ttt tte Section 7 10 Multiplexed remote master function for redundant system QNPRHCPU only scr r ttt Section 7 11 Lo Remote password ee RERE ERRER Section 7 12 Network diagnostics Network monitor st ttt ttt tte tte et eens Section 8 1 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 2 1 Cyclic transmission function Periodic communication The cyclic transmission function periodically exchanges data between the remote master station and remote I O station using link device LX LY LB LW The following explains the differences between when the module connected to the remote I O station is an input output module and when it is an intelligent module connected to it 1 Communicating with input output module The remote master station uses input output X Y LX LY device after the actual I O for the host so that there can be communication with the input output module on the remote I O station When communicating between the remote master station and the remote I O station network data is written to the remote master station The device range for communicating with each remote I O station is set by the re
34. and the ERR contact of the power supply module 3 22 3 22 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q For the specifications of Q3 IRB Q6NIRB Redundant power supply base unit and Q6UIRP redundant power supply module refer to QCPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection a Modules needed to configure a redundant power supply in a remote I O station To configure a redundant power supply in a remote I O station use the modules shown below 1 Main base unit Q3ORB 2 Extension base unit Q6LUIRB 3 Power supply module Q6LIRP 4 Remote I O module QJ72LP25 25 QU72LP25G QU72LP25GE and QJ72BR15 function version D b Link special register used for configuring a redundant power supply The remote master station can confirm the status of the power supplies of remote I O stations using the link special registers shown below If either of the power supplies stops supplying power the remote I O station detects error code 1510 SINGLE PS DOWN or 1520 SINGLE PS ERROR moderate error eal Remote Remote I O Name Description conto station station Nomai staton station master station a Tea optical coaxial The CPU status of each station is stored including the host Only normal stations out of SW70 to 73 are effective 0 normal including the maximum station No or later and reserved stations 1 minor error b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swoosa swooss In the table 1 to 64 indicate sta
35. e EGE Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores each station s CPU status including the host Valid only for stations registered as normal in the SW70 to SW73 x2 x11 swo080 0 Normal including the stations with the maximum station 128 number and smaller numbers as well as reserved stations swoos1 1 Serious fatal error 129 y b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b3 b2 bi bO x x ao ae ofo o o SWw0082 SW0080 iO 5 4 3 2 1 o se a fa e fea e ie SW0082 48 47 45 to 37 36 35 34 33 SW0083 64 63 62 61 to 53 52 51 50 49 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained 11 Serious errors WDT error etc are the type of errors that stop the CPU operation Fatal errors RAM error etc are also the type of errors that stop the CPU operation App 18 App 18 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued ae Control noes Remote I O Description z master station f station station Optical Optical Coaxial Optical Optical Stores the CPU RUN status of each station including the host The standby system Q4ARCPU stores the key switch status at normal state Valid only for stations registered as normal in the SW70 to 2 sw73 SW0084 0 RUN or STEP RUN including the stations with the 132 maximum station number
36. ek tanec oreach communication Disconnected ata Link status of eac 3 Parameter status of each station CPU operation status of each station 5 6 7 Network info This area displays the same information as the host information in Section 8 1 1 Other station info When any faulty station STOP status station reserved station or externally powered station is detected the Error info area displays the corresponding mark as follows Status When a faulty or STOP status station is detected By clicking each item button the corresponding status of each station is displayed This information is displayed for the number of stations that equals to the total number of link stations set with the network parameters 1 Communication status of each station SW0070 to 73 Displays the status of the baton pass whether or not the transient transmission is possible e Normal display Communication normal station or reserved station e Highlighted display Communication abnormal station disconnected status 8 6 8 6 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Data Link status of each station SW0074 to 77 Displays the status of the cyclic transmission e Normal display Normal station or reserved station e Highlighted display Abnormal station data link not executed Parameter status of each station Displays the parameter communication status of each station SW0078 to 7B e Normal display Other than during para
37. whether data is being transmitted received and whether any error has occurred 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 1 Network Diagnostics Network Monitor MELSEC Q The status of the remote can be checked using the network diagnostic function of GX Developer When an error occurs the faulty station can be identified using the host information other station information and error history monitor functions of the network GX Developer network diagnosis can be implemented for the remote master station and remote I O station 1 x1 Use GX Developer Version 6 01B or later when executing network diagnosis from the remote I O station The following lists the items that can be checked with the network diagnostic function Network diagnostics Vv Host information Network information e Network type e Network No Group No e Station No Link information e Mod e Forward loop status including loopback station e Reverse loop status including loopback station e Link scan time maximum minimum current Communication information Communication status Other station information Network information e Network type e Module No e Network No Group No Station No Other station information Communication status of each station e Data link status of each station e Parameter status of each station e Loop status of each station e Reserved station designation of each station e PSU operation status of e
38. 0 0003 T x 0 001 F x 4 ms Communication speed 25 Mbps LS KB 0 40 x total number of stations LX LY LB LW x 16 8 x 0 0004 KR LYm gt R LBm gt R LW m gt R X 16 16 x 0 0003 LXm R LBm R LW m R x 16 16 x 0 0003 T x 0 0004 F x 4 ms LS Link scan time KB KR constants PS Vo 9 to 16 17 to 24 25 to 32 33 to 40 41 to 48 49 to 56 57 to 64 45 49 53 57 62 66 7 0 31 26 23 17 11 o6 oo LX Total number of link inputs LX being used by all stations 1 LY Total number of link outputs LY being used by all stations 1 LB Total number of link relay LB being used by all stations 1 LW Total number of link register LW being used by all stations 1 LYm gt R Total number of link outputs LY being used by stations in M gt R direction 1 LBm gt R Total number of link relay LB being used by stations in M gt R direction 1 LWm gt R Total number of link register LW being used by stations in M gt R direction 1 LXm lt R_ Total number of link input LX being used by stations in M R direction 1 LBm lt R_ Total number of link relay LB being used by stations in M lt R direction 1 LWmu lt R_ Total number of link register LW being used by stations in M R direction 1 T Maximum number of bytes transmitting during one link scan 2 F Number of stations that return to system available on
39. 1 SW005D I O master station SWO0065 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b bO Goy ected epep e e E EET 0 sues SW0067 Swo0066 48 47 46 45 to 37 36 35 34 33 103 SW0067 64 63 62 61 to 53 52 51 50 49 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the status of the constant link scan settings S9098 Communication mode No storage 104 1 to 500 Setting time ms Valid when the SB0049 is off 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 16 App 16 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued Use permitted prohibited a Control erie Remote I O Description master station i station station Stores the maximum minimum current values of the link scan time unit ms The values for the control station and normal stations vary PLC to PLC network Sequence scan 0 END 0 END usan HHHHHHH Control station DE normal station P When the constant scan is set the values are as follows Control station Setting value lt Measured link scan value KB of the link scan sss equation Measured link scan value KB of the link scan time equation Setting value fi Measured link scan value KB of the link scan time equation Measured link scan value Normal station Constant link scan that has been set Remote I O network Sequence s
40. 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 10 3 Station order check test optical loop system only Station No 3 is not displayed because itis a reserved station This test checks the connected station numbers in the optical loop system The following connection orders can be checked by the loop status displayed on the station order check test result screen See the monitor screen below when this test is conducted Loop status Display The station numbers connected in the direction of the forward loop from the host as well as Forward and reverse loops the station numbers connected to the direction of the reverse loop from the host Forward Forwardloop Only the station numbers connected in the direction of the forward loop from the host Only the station numbers connected in the direction of the reverse loop from the host Only the station numbers connected in the direction of the forward loop from the host For example in the following system when the station order check test is conducted by the GX Developer connected to remote master station the monitor screen shown below is displayed to verify that a loopback is being executed between station numbers 4 and 2 that are connected in the direction of the forward loop GX Developer Remote master station Reserved station Loopback Forward loop direction gt Station Station Stat
41. 8K 8K 8K 8K gt 4K 8K 16K 2K 2K 2K 2K 2K 2K 8K 8K 2K 2K Retentive timer OK OK Counter 1K 1K Data register D12K _ __ _ gt 4K Link register W 8K gt 116K Link special register SW 2K 2K Input relay Output relay Internal relay Latch relay Link relay Annunciator Link special relay Edge relay Step relay Timer lt x n n QnA An lt DTA Word device total 26 0K 26 0K Bit device total 44 0K 48 0K Device total 29 0K Default After change X 8K Y 8K M 8K L 8K B 8K 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 1 Concept of the network refreshing a Network refresh ranges The devices that fall into both the range of all the stations set with the common parameters start address to end address of 1R1 to 1R3 and the ranges set with the refresh parameters are refreshed CPU module Master module Range that is actually refreshed EEEE ESETA 4 S Range of all Range that is 3 stations set with actually refreshed the common O E parameters Big iie Range that is actually refreshed 1R3 Vacant ne Gear ree End address b Devices for which network refreshing can be executed 64 transfer settings LX LY LB LW one SB transfer setting and one SW transfer setting can be performed for each network module It is possible to transfer to different devices SB LB B LX LY X Y M L
42. 9Fu BFu DFu FFu 12Fu a Valid setting range OH to OFEOH b Precaution Unlike the setting method for the ANUCPU where the higher two digits of the 3 digit value should be set here all three digits should be set as is 2 Network No Set the network number to which the applicable network module is connected a Valid setting range 1 to 239 3 Total slave stations Set up the total number of multiplexed remote sub master stations remote I O stations and reserved stations in a single network CPU QJ71 1MR Network No 1 f Reserved 7 stations i Remote master station Total slave stations 3 QJ72 1Ra a Enabled setting range 1 to 64 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 4 Group No Can be set for multiplexed remote master station multiplexed remote sub master station only Set the group No to send data simultaneously to other stations in transient transmission a Valid setting range 0 No group setting default 1 to 32 Group No 5 Mode Set the operation mode of the network module The mode selection with this parameter becomes valid when the mode setting switch of the network module is set to 0 or 4 Default Starts data communication at startup and executes automatic return operation etc ome o mode stops operations disconnecting the station Baton pass and data communication with other stations are not executed This mode is to select the hardware te
43. Allows the construction of the system that includes a redundancy on remote Function version D remote I O station in which 2 power supply modules are Section 3 2 2 8 I O station mounted for power supply redundancy Allows the faulty I O module or intelligent function module Function version D on a remote I O station to be replaced online while the Section 3 2 2 9 remote I O station is running Online module change on remote I O station Limits the connection made from GX Developer via the Remote password for i Ethernet module or serial communication module A Function version D Section 7 12 remote I O station mounted on a remote I O station by setting the password 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This introduces a system comprised of remote I O networks 1 Remote I O networks and PLC to PLC networks cannot be mixed on the same MELSECNET H network Always build separate networks 2 2 Only MELSECNET H network modules can be connected to a MELSECNET H remote I O network They cannot be mixed with MELSECNET 10 network modules AJ72LP25 A1SJ72QLP25 etc 2 1 Single Remote I O Networks 2 1 1 Configuration 1 Optical loop system Up to 64 remote I O modules can be connected to a remote master station Always set the station number of the remote master station to 0 Station number 0 Station number 1 Station number 2 remote master station remote I O station remote I
44. Also before performing other control operations program modifications and operating status modifications status control on the PLC in operation be sure to read the manual thoroughly and confirm the safety Especially if the above mentioned control operations are performed from an external device to a remote PLC problems arising on the PLC side may not be dealt with immediately due to abnormal data communication Thus in addition to configuring an interlocking circuit in a sequence program determine how the system should handle data communication errors between the PLC CPU and external devices A CAUTION e Always reset the CPU module after changing the parameters for the CPU module or the remote I O module If this is not done data from before the change could cause malfunctioning e Do not bundle the control wires and communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed at least 100 mm 3 94 in away from each other Failure to do so may generate noise that may cause malfunctions Installation Precautions A CAUTION e Use the PLC in the operating environment that meets the general specifications described in the user s manual for the CPU module used Using the PLC in any other operating environments may cause electric shocks fires or malfunctions or may damage or degrade the product e While holding the module mounting lever at the bottom of module insert th
45. CPU system 2 16 Multiplex tranSMiSSiOn cccccccccseeeeeseeees 7 16 N Network diagnosis Error history Monitor 0 eeeeeeeeeeereeees 8 11 Error history monitor details 1 0 0 0 8 13 Network monitor details ceeeee 8 8 Station order check test e eeee 4 28 Index 1 Communication test ccccccccsseeeesseeees 4 29 Host information ccccecccsseeesesseeeeesseeeeees 8 4 Setup confirmation test eee 4 27 Other station information ccccceeeees 8 6 oop test raai hth a a a etaa aa aa 4 26 Network setting Start VO NO iaa eee a 5 6 Network NoO Q cccccccssscceessseeeeessseeeeesseeeeeseaes 5 6 Total Slave stations 0 00 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 6 Network test Stopping restarting the cyclic TTANSMISSION pa upre ea 7 20 Stopping link refreshing ceeeeeeeees 7 20 Network refresh assignment status 5 19 O Operation mode ORINE a baths erste 5 7 ONIN Gs anna aces heen tion RA ee 5 7 Forward loop test cccceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeees 5 7 Reverse loop test cccessceeeeeeeeteeesnees 5 7 Optical fiber Cable c ccceecceeeeeeeeteeteees 3 4 R RAS function Station detach function cc ee eeeeeteeees 3 18 Automatic return function ccceeeeees 3 15 Diagnostic function eee eeeeeeeeeeeteeeee 3 21 Loopback function ceccceeeeseeeeeeees 3 16 READ instruc
46. Cause gt The power is not being supplied Or the overcurrent protection is active lt Troubleshooting gt e Verify the power supply status Check that the total current consumption of the modules installed on the base unit does not exceed the rated output current of the power supply module used Yes Execute offline tests 1 Hardware test 2 Self loopback test 3 Internal self loopback test MELSEC Q lt Cause gt May be due to module WDT error NG lt Troubleshooting gt lt Troubleshooting gt 1 Reexamine base mounting 2 Reset remote I O module 3 Replace remote I O module and check Replace the network module Value 7 Line error lt Troubleshooting gt Wait for the completion of the online tests lt Troubleshooting gt Read from SWB8 to SWFF and check the line status From the contents of SB SW check the cable and connector connected to the station where the error was detected No lt Troubleshooting gt Review the host number setting and the common parameter settings Value 2 Offline tests lt Troubleshooting gt Wait for the completion of the offline tests 8 17 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Is the send and receive data within the system specifications Yes No Value 0 The host transmitting normally Value of SW47 Value 3 No host send area Value 4 Abnormal parameters detected
47. Extension cable No setting 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 1 The operation mode of a remote I O station under the error status can be set differently from the parameters of the remote master station CPU module When an error fuse blowout or I O verification error occurs on the remote master station CPU module and remote I O station the data link and output of the remote I O station are determined based on the combination of the parameter settings of remote I O stations and remote master station CPU module The table below shows the status of the data link and output of the remote I O station based on the combination of parameter settings i When an error occurs on the remote master station CPU module Setting of operation mode when an error has occurred on the remote master station CPU module Data link Stopped on all stations Output Conforms to the setting of output Data link All stations are normal Setting of operation Output All stations output normally g p holding clearing 5 p mode upon an error Data link Stopped on all stations of remote I O station N Data link All stations are normal Continue Output Conforms to the setting of output Output All stations output normally holding clearing ii When an error occurs on a remote I O station Setting of operation mode when an error has occurred on the remote master station CPU module Data link The error station is dis
48. J SW70 Other station baton pass status SW74 1 H K 73 J SW74 Data link status of each station SH78 1 H K 74 J SW78 Other station parameter communication status B20 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 S HF F F at F F Hc No Mi J SB20 Network module status NOM r r l Communication program with remote I O station No 2 i Ses E MCR NO TEND Set the values shown below for timer constant K O Baton pass status TO T2 Cyclic transmission status Parameter communication status Sequence scan time x 3 or more T1 T3 T4 Sequence scan time x 4 or more Reason This is to prevent occasional errors due to cable conditions or electrical noise from stopping control Also the multipliers of 4 and 3 should only be considered as a guideline 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q If the initial settings for the buffer memory of the intelligent function module on a remote I O station are set by a dedicated link command REMTO instruction write the program so that when only that remote I O module is reset by turning the remote I O module power supply off or by using the remote I O module reset switch the remote master station will detect that condition and will once again execute the initial settings in the intelligent function module This program is for resetting the intelligent function module on the remote I O station whenever the remote I O station is reset Remote I O Intelligent function CPU module Master module module module j j Buffe
49. KR LYM gt R LBM gt R LWM gt R x 16 16 x 0 0003 LXMR LBMR LWM lt R x 16 16 x 0 0003 T x 0 001 4 0 0 45 x 8 1024 1024 O O0 x 16 8 x 0 001 3 9 1024 O 0 x 16 16 x 0 0003 1024 O 0 x 16 16 x 0 0003 0 x 0 001 11 8 ms c I O refresh time TRIOR XK 16 x 0 0016 XZ 16 x 0 0024 YK 16 x 0 0014 YZ 16 x 0 0022 128 16 x 0 0016 0 128 16 x 0 0014 0 0 024 ms 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q d Cyclic transmission delay Since Sm 1 ms LS 11 8 ms the Sm lt LS formula is used 1 Input transmission delay time Tpx Tpx Sm am x round up LS Sm am x 2 Sm TRIOR 1 0 41 x 11 8 1 0 41 x 2 1 0 024 24 6 ms 2 Output transmission delay time Toy Toy Sm am x round up LS Sm am LS TRior 1 0 41 x 11 8 1 0 41 11 8 0 024 23 6 ms 3 3 3 Switching time from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station in a multiplexed remote I O network In the multiplexed remote I O network system the multiplexed remote sub master station takes over the control of the remote I O station from of the multiplexed remote master station when it develops an error While control is switched from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station the remote station holds output data The switching time from the multiplexed remote master station to the multip
50. LW 0 REEE EEE 0 0 0 2048 to points to to to A55 7FF 7FF 7FF 2048 i i i i to i 1 j 1 i points i f i i too A TT O i 3 cards to 2048 l i i i points i i i 1855 TAA N EE o j i l 1 i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 ji l i i i 1 j 1 i 1 1 1 I l 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 i 1 1 l i 1 1 1 1 1 i i 1 1 i 4 cards i i i I I I I I I 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 1 LX LY cannot be automatically set with the Default button b Setting method When using the assignment method of Start End set the start and end addresses of the network module and the start address of the PLC side PLC side Dev name Points Stat End Dev name Points Stat End se sa ooo FF P ISB s12 ooo 000 1FFF 1 Make sure that the refresh range does not duplicate with other ranges used actual I O etc when setting the device range of the PLC side 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS CPU module X 1000 to 107F 1100 to 117F 1200 to 127F 1300 to 137F 1400 to 147F 1500 to 157F 1800 to 1FFF 0 to FFF wel WwW 0 to FFF 1FFF 3 3 Setting example MELSEC Q The following shows an example of the refresh parameters settings System configuration QCPU QJ71 LP21 Power supply 1MR QJ71 BR11 2MR Network No 1 E R2 1R3 Network No 2
51. MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual for QnA e SFC QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC App 31 App 31 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Special Register List Diagnostic Information Corresponding Applicable Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU pi DoT spo Diagnostic Diagnosis Error codes for errors found by diagnosis are stored as BIN data S Error D9008 format errors error code e Contents identical to latest fault history information change e Year last two digits and month that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code Example B15 to B8 B7 to BO October 1995 Year 0 to 99 Month 1 to 12 H9510 The day and hour that SDO was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit Clock time for Clock time for code E diagnosis error B15 to B8B7 to Bo Example Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 10 p m on 25th occurrence y H2510 The minute and second that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code B15 to B8B87 to Bo Example 35 min 48 sec Minutes 0 to 59 Seconds 0 to 59 past the hour H3548 Category codes which help indicate what type of information is being stored in the common information areas SD5 through SD15 and the individual information areas SD16 through SD26 are stored here B15 to B8 B7 to BO Individual information Common
52. Network module Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 I i i if i i i i HRmwey f Channel 4H h Channel 4 gt Clock data Ll T ti i I i i f RTMWR data into i Channel 5 Channel 6 1 Channel 7 1 Channel 8 1 For details of READ WRITE instructions refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network 2 If the QNPRHCPU of the execution station executes the unusable instructions such as SEND RECV RECVS to the target station once it will not result in an error However if it executes the unusable instruction again it will result in an error 3 It is recommended to use SB48 ON multiplexed remote master station as an interlock signal when executing PRUN or RSTOP instruction to see if the host station operates as a master station 1 Eight channels may be used with each dedicated link instruction Hence up to eight instructions can make simultaneous access to the intelligent function modules of the remote I O station We recommend you to combine GX Configurator s automatic refresh setting and cyclic transmission to access the data of the intelligent function module that is continuously accessed e g the analog input value of the analog input module Refer to Section 6 3 Execute the dedicated link instructions during data link If it is executed in the offline mode an error will not occur but the dedicated link instruction
53. Normal mode On Constant scan mode 3 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 6 App 6 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 1 Special link relay SB list Continued Use permitted prohibited a Control Normal Pemo Remote I O Description i master station station station Optical Coaxial Optical Optical Indicates the transmission designation status status of supplemental settings of the common parameters Valid when the SB0049 is off Off Normal transmission designation On Multiplex transmission designation Indicates the transmission status Off Normal transmission On Multiplex transmission 3 Multiplex remote function Indicates the status of designating the multiplex remote function SB006B designation Off Not designated 107 On Designated Indicates the baton pass status of each station Not applicable to reserved stations and the station with the maximum station Baton pass status of each number or higher Off All stations normal On Faulty station exists Turns off when the SW0070 to SW0073 are all 0 Indicates the baton pass status of the master station Including Baton pass status of the when there is an online loop test remote master station Off Master station baton pass normal On Master station baton pass error SB0069 Multiplex transmission designation Multiplex transmission status 3 SB0070 SB0071 113 Indicate
54. O module as needed After writing the parameters to the remote I O module reset it to enable the parameters that have been set To reset the remote I O module use the reset switch on the body of the main module or reset the power supply for the remote I O station 5 2 1 Remote I O station possible parameter settings The following parameters are set as needed on the remote I O station and written to the remote I O module If settings are not needed the remote I O station operates using the remote I O module default settings so there is no need to write the parameters to the remote I O module 1 PLC parameters The remote I O module can set the set the PLC parameters in the same manner as the CPU module However only the required items can be set as a remote I O station Major item Intermediate item Small item Default value Number of empty slots Number of empty slots 16 points PLC system settings EAN Synchronizes intelligent module s pulse Module synchronization p Synchronizes u Operation mode upon an error 1 ST I O module verification error PLC RAS settings Carry out fuse blown check Error check r Carry out I O module comparison Remote I O switch settings Remote I O switch settings a ae Points start Assignment method Start End Operational settings Forwarding parameter between devices __ Points Start No setting Start End O assignment No setting I O assignment Base model name Standard setting
55. SW0042 66 JE a SW0043 67 Mode status App 13 Network No Station No P Indicates the processing results of the SEND RECV READ WRITE REQ RECVS RRUN RSTOP RTMRD RTMWR REMFR REMTO instructions when physical channel 3 is used 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion see the error codes in Section 8 3 Indicates the processing results of the SEND RECV READ WRITE REQ RECVS RRUN RSTOP RTMRD RTMWR REMFR REMTO instructions when physical channel 4 is used 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion see the error codes in Section 8 3 Indicates the processing results of the SEND RECV READ WRITE REQ RECVS RRUN RSTOP RTMRD RTMWR REMFR REMTO instructions when physical channel 5 is used 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion see the error codes in Section 8 3 Indicates the processing results of the SEND RECV READ WRITE REQ RECVS RRUN RSTOP RTMRD RTMWR REMFR REMTO instructions when physical channel 6 is used 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion see the error codes in Section 8 3 Indicates the processing results of the SEND RECV READWRITE REQ RECVS RRUN RSTOP RTMRD RTMWR REMFR REMTO instructions when physical channel 7 is used 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion see the error codes in Section 8 3 Indicates the processing results of the SEND RECV READ WRITE REQ RECVS RRUN RSTOP RTMRD RTMWR REMFR REMTO instruction
56. Value 5 Parameters not received lt Troubleshooting gt Check the contents of the common parameters lt Troubleshooting gt Checks the contents of each parameter that has been set in the refresh parameters and remote I O station that have been set by the CPU of the remote master station and station inherent parameters If SW47 3 consider the following as a possible cause MELSEC Q Is the send receive data according to system specifications Yes No lt Troubleshooting gt Checks the contents of each parameter that has been set in the refresh parameters Normal communication and remote I O station that have been set by the CPU of the remote master station Only the station number has been set in the common parameters and there is no link device allocation Is the RUN LED of the applicable station lit No Is the power supplied to the power source module Yes Is the ERR LED of the applicable station lit Yes Yes Y Execute offline tests 1 Hardware test 2 Self loopback test 3 Internal self loopback test NG y No lt Troubleshooting gt Takes action according to the contents of SW47 and the error code contents that Yy Replace the network module lt Cause gt error have been stored in SW48 8 18 May be due to module WDT lt Troubleshooting gt 1 Reexamine base mounting 2 R
57. X range set by the common parameters of the network parameters The output module is the range of modules mounted to the remote I O station from the first output module mounted to the main base unit to the last output module mounted to the extension base unit In the formula the main base unit and extension base units from the range referenced above are allocated Intelligent function module and refresh time TRBF Ner Ncr Not Nex ms TReF Refresh time between intelligent function module and GX Configurator Refresh time generated by auto refresh settings of GX Configurator for intelligent function module Ner number of set modules X 0 05ms number of set items X 0 22ms number of set words X 0 005ms ms Refresh time generated by CC Link auto refresh settings of remote I O station Ncr number of set modules X 3ms number of set words X 0 003ms 1ms ms Refresh time generated by device to device transfer parameter settings of remote I O station Nor number of set devices X 0 3ms number of set words X 0 006ms ms Delay time by external access or relay processing 1 Nex 0 ms or 20 ms 1 In the case of the following access reading and writing devices monitoring etc or relay processing 20 ms is generated as delay time Without any access or relay processing the delay time is 0 ms e When accessing a remote I O station from GX Developer or GOT or when accessing other station from G
58. abnormality was detected in other station 1 If wiring is incorrect Check the connections of IN and OUT connectors and other connectors If an incorrect connection is found connect properly 2 Ifan optical fiber cable is faulty or other station is abnormal Replace the defective cable or module 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 10 Network Diagnostics from GX Developer Online Test With the network diagnostic function of GX Developer the line status can easily be checked and diagnosed Conduct network diagnostics by connecting GX Developer with a remote master station For a remote sub master station and remote I O station the line status can be confirmed through the network diagnostics of the remote master station To conduct the network diagnostics the network parameters station number switch mode switch number of module cards network settings and common parameters must be set However even if not all the parameters were set the loop test can be performed while the T PASS LED is on The network diagnostics function allows the diagnostics of the network module while maintaining it in the online status when a problem occurs during system operation The following table lists the tests that can be conducted for each network system Data link status of cyclic and transient transmissions Network test Section 7 9 Optical loop Coaxial loop Reference Test item i section Loop tes
59. address 0 by the automatic refresh settings of the intelligent parameters X0 vov DO wo Remote master station Remote I O station Intelligent Network module function module Buffer memory Address 0 QCPU Network module LW LW nce scan Device memory storage area Refresh data 3 Link data storage area storage area x2 x2 lt Link data storage area gt storage area x2 x2 Link refresh x1 Automatic refresh 3 1 Set by network refresh parameters 2 Set by remote master station common parameters 3 Set by intelligent parameter automatic refresh settings 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Link refresh link scan I O refresh and automatic refresh Link refresh of the remote master station is done in the END processing of the CPU module Link scan is performed synchronously with the CPU module sequence scan The I O refresh and automatic refresh of the remote I O station and performed asynchronously with the link scan Remote master station 0 END 0 END 0 sequence scan END 0 END Link refresh Link refresh Link refresh Link scan Remote O station network module Input output module Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Intelligent function module 3 Link data when communication error station communication stop station has occ
60. and smaller numbers as well as Swo0085 reserved stations 133 ae RUN status ofeach 4 stop PAUSE ERROR station SW0086 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b2 Eee OOHOOH p fae et ao 28 o atm tee a7 swooss aa far ae as fe ar ae fas oe swoer oe ea fe fe fe es wo Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores each station s CPU status including the host Valid only for stations registered as normal in the SW70 to sw73 0 Normal including the stations with the maximum station number and smaller numbers as well as reserved stations 136 1 Minor error SW0089 137 CPU operation status of b15 b14 b13 b12 to swoosA each station 2 swo0s8 15114113 138 swo0s9 19 18 17 oe MOOOC A pete efoto ole solo Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained 10 Minor errors battery error etc are the type of errors that do not affect the CPU operation App 19 App 19 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued Use permitted prohibited Name Description Control Normal Remote Remote I O 3 master station station station station Indicates whether external power supply is available to each station For QJ71LP21 25 0 is ON Valid only for stations registered as normal in the SW70 to x2 sw73 SW008C 0 Without external power
61. at a fixed interval LOOP This error occurs when the forward or reverse loop line is faulty and the power to the adjacent station which sends data to the host station is turned OFF or the cable connector is faulty lt Corrective action gt Check the cables and connectors detached or loosened connectors wrong IN OUT connections broken or damaged cables improper cable routing etc For more details see the Network Diagnostics Section 8 1 off No communication error SS O 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 When a remote I O module is used in a redundant power supply system the REM LED and ERR LED indicate errors as follows according to the failure causes of the power supply module Power supply module REM LED _ ERR LED Failure of only one Input power supply off fuse blown Internal failure Input power supply off fuse blown Internal failure Both the LEDs are off or on depending on the failure part The faulty power supply module can be confirmed by the error code Refer to section 8 3 2 When a remote I O module of function version C or later is used the ERR LED remains off even if one or two power supply modules fail Confirm the failure of the power supply module on the LED of the module If the power supply module is mounted on an extension base unit the error can also be confirmed by the ERR contact of the power supply module For the specification of the LED of the
62. at both ends of the loop may be stored because the loop switch request is issued by the station that first detected the loop error App 25 App 25 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued Use permitted prohibited Ani Control Remote Remote I O Description i master station j station station Accumulates and stores the number of transient transmission errors Other than 0 Number of errors Transient transmission Transient transmission Stores the pointer that sets the data for the next transient error pointer transmission error 240 Transient transmission Stores the error codes of the transient transmission errors see the to error history error codes in Section 8 3 O O O O O O O O SWOOFF 255 Stores the result of a shift from master operation to sub master 2 R t b i operation SW01C4 pale Q Su zmas Or 0 Normal completion x x x x O O x x station switching result y 452 1 or later Abnormal completion refer to Section 8 3 for error codes Valid only when SB01C8 is ON For remote master station The send LY device number to the remote sub master station is stored In 1 point units For remote sub master station The send LY device number to the remote master station is stored In 1 point units Valid only when SB01C8 is ON For remote master station The receive LX device number from the remote sub master station is stored In 1 point units For remote sub
63. base unit failure are detected The work area RAM in the Remote I O module is faulty There is an output module with a blown fuse e There was no response from the intelligent function module in the initial processing e The size of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module is invalid MELSEC Q Corrective Action e Take noise reduction measures e Reset the Remote I O module If the same error is displayed again this suggests a Remote I O module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Reset the Remote I O module If the same error is displayed again this suggests a Remote I O module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative This suggests a Remote I O module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Check FUSE LED of the output modules and replace the module whose LED is lit The module with a blown fuse can also be identified using GX Developer Check the special registers SD1300 to SD1331 to see if the bit corresponding to the module is a This suggests the intelligient function module Remote I O module and or base unit is expecting a hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code Error Message SD0 SP UNIT DOWN Common Information SD5 to SD15 Module No SD16 to SD26 MELSEC Q LED Status CPU f Diagnostic Operation Timin REM ERR Statuses g CONTR
64. communication protocol Access Destination Target Station Number to Be Set Multiplexed remote master station D H Station No 0 Multiplexed remote sub master station Multiplexed remote sub master station No Master operating station e The outputs of the remote I O stations are held while master operation is being switched from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station sub master station SS ax 9 A ZN le g 2 Master operation ie mica ica Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Lb Multiplexed remote master station returns to system Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station sub master station as j Information Sub master operation transfer M _After switching outputs are cleared _ Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Start up the multiplexed remote sub master station last after the data link of the multiplexed remote master station and remote I O stations is established To start from a data link using the multiplexed remote master station independently of the startup order do not set Total stations and Setup common in the parameters of the multiplexed remote sub master station The multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station cannot be mounted together on a single PLC CPU
65. e the system to which the system A connector of tracking cable is connected within the redundant system For station No of the multiplexed remote sub master station set any of No 1 to 64 which should not be overlapped with any of remote I O stations The number of remote I O stations connectable to a multiplexed remote I O network for the redundant system is 63 in the optical loop system and 31 in the coaxial bus system The CPU module applicable for the multiplexed remote master or sub master station in the redundant system is the QnNPRHCPU only The QO02CPU QO02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU are not applicable Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station Remote I O station 2 lanPru System qu71 Sicpu B tpat QJ72 1 0 1 0 LP25 gt QnPRH System Q71 cpu A LP21 Tracking cable Optical fiber cable Power supply ZI QU72 olo Qu72 10 1 0 Z Qu72 o vo S LP25 2 LP25 S LP25 n n N D D D z z z jo O je A ao ao Station No 64 Station No 4 Station No 3 Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station In the optical loop system up to 63 remote I O stations can be connected Connection of up to 31 stations is allowed for the coaxial bus system 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 3 2 Setting items 1 Table 2 5 indicates the parameter setting items
66. execution source of the SEND instruction is set in the target network module Alternatively specify the logical channel number set in the target network module Review the target network number and target station No in the control data at the execution source of the SEND instruction The hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative The hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Destination group number error Review the destination group number Received data size error Number of relay stations invalid The cable is faulty or The hardware of the network module is faulty If a communication error has occurred review the cable If not the hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Set stations to which data can be sent Review the system Review the routing parameters Receiving group number error Review the group number of the target station Receiving network number error System error Response wait timeout Review the network No parameter If the parameter is not set the network No is preset to 1 default so check the network No of other stations The cable is faulty or the hardware of the network module is faulty If a communication error has occurred review the cable If not the hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representativ
67. extension l 1 Q Bis When no extension installed to base is installed the value is fixed to 0 Q mode ph extension ase S D241 D242 SD243 B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO No of base SD243 Extension 3 Extension 2 Extension 1 Main P D244 slots No of base slots SD244 Extension 7 Extension 6 Extension 5 Extension 4 S Initial S D250 S S S S When Xn0 of the installed CC Link goes ON the bit corresponding to the station switches ON When either Xn1 or XnF of the installed CC Link switch OFF the bit corresponding to the station switches ON Switches ON when the CPU cannot communicate with the installed CC Link Information Information Information of ne of ie GAO gt QCPU B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO Remote Vacant 1st module 2nd module sp280 CC Link error Error detection 3rd module status 4th module As shown above each area stores the number of slots being installed Loaded Loaded maximum When SM250 goes from OFF to ON the upper 2 digits of the final maximum I O I O No 1 0 number plus 1 of the modules loaded are stored as BIN values Request END When Xn0 of the installed CC Link goes ON the bit corresponding to the station switches ON When either Xn1 or XnF of the installed CC Link switch OFF the bit corresponding to the station switches ON Switches ON when the CPU cannot communicate with the installed CC Link B15 to B9 B8 to
68. follows e Remote master station scan time Sm gt Link scan time LS TpB2 Sm am LS Trer ms e Remote master station scan time Sm lt Link scan time LS TpB2 Sm am x round up LS Sm am x 2 LS TRF ms 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q b REMFR REMTO READ WRITE instructions REMFR REMTO READ WRITE instructions transmission delay time is the sum of the following e Remote master station scan time Except for the link refreshing time e Remote master station refresh time e Link scan time Calculate the sum as shown below Instruction transmission delay time Mp Remote master station scan time Sm gt link scan time LS MD Sm am x 3 ms a Completion flag ON Sm S Sm Remote master station Link scan time LS Remote I O station Mra E END step Remote master station scan time Sm lt link scan time LS Mb Sm am x round up LS Sm am x 3 ms Completion flag ON m Remote master station EX Link scan time 0 0 step E END step Remote I O station Sm Remote master station scan time am Remote master station link refresh time LS Link scan time Mra Instruction access data refresh time round up Round up the decimal point of the result operation LS Sm am 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Multiplexed remote master station gt multiplexed remote sub master station a Cyclic trans
69. for the sending range of the host station If no station specific parameters are set the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative The hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Set common parameters station specific parameters for the sending range of the host station Parameter consistency error If no station specific parameters are set the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Rewrite the network parameters for the control station to the PLC CPU parameter check error If the error recurs the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Set parameters suitable for the sub control station or activate it as a control station Parameter mismatch error Review and reset the parameters for the master and sub master stations If the error recurs the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative F828 No control station shift setting Set with data link by the sub control station when the control station is down Set with pairing to the station connected to the redundant system QnPRHCPU Link parameter error Station specific parameter error F822 System error F829 No pairing setting Network type mismatch normal station detected Match the network type set for the
70. from the remote master station to the remote I O station Even when the Y output is set to ON on the sequence program it is not output from the remote I O station allowing output testing of the sequence program to be tested safely Moreover if the GX Developer is connected directly to the remote I O module force output from the GX Developer to the remote I O module can be performed At this time the X input from the remote I O station is input to the remote master station Common parameters StationNo End OO1F OOIF iv 0020 0020 32 QCPU L TR Remote master station Forced output for station D number No 1 Y1020 n Remote I O Remote I O Forced output Y station No 1 station No 2 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 The remote I O module stops the X input from the input module At this time the remote I O station is performing X Y communication with the remote master station The remote master station uses the GX Developer which is connected directly to the remote I O module to perform make an X input from the GX Developer to the remote I O station and perform an X input test Common parameters StationNo 0020 OO1F OOF y 0020 GX Developer Monitors No 1 C X1000 R Remote I O station No 1 eh eu Remote I O E forced Feri ree os remote I O module does not take station No 2 ON OFF A t
71. function module buffer memory to the intelligent function module Input output 3 X Y LX LY is the same as communication with input output module 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q c The CPU uses the X Y LX LY and B W LB LW devices set by the common parameters and the automatic refresh settings for the intelligent function module parameters that where written in the remote I O station to periodically read and write intelligent function module data The difference between this and a is that with the automatic refresh settings for the intelligent function module parameters the automatic refresh destination of the intelligent function module is network module data register D Data register D uses the PLC parameters for the network module to transmit to link register W among devices With this method a sequence program can be created to allow communication in the same way as with an intelligent function module mounted to the same base units as the CPU module The analog input value for the analog input module current value for the high speed count module and others are periodically read to suit the analog output module analog output value being periodically written In addition there is no need to revise the intelligent parameters even if the network parameters for the remote master station are changed Remote master station Remote I O station Intelligent QCPU Master module Remote I O module function module
72. has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion Microsoft Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States countries Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners
73. information O Rem category codes category codes The common information category codes store the following codes 0 No error Unit module No PLC No Base No File name Drive name Time value set Program error location Error Switch cause for Q4AR only information Fora multiple PLC system the module number or PLC category code number is stored depending on the error that occurred Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been stored PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 e The individual information category codes store the following codes 0 No error 1 Open 2 File name Drive name 3 Time value actually measured 4 Program error location 5 Parameter number 6 Annunciator number 7 Check instruction malfunction number App 32 App 32 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set by Corresponding Applicable Number Name Meaning Explanation CPU Common information corresponding to the error codes SDO is stored here The following four types of information are stored here Slot No Number Meaning SD5 Slot No PLC No 1 2 3 SD6 1 0 No SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 Vacant SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 1 For a multiple PLC system the slot number or PLC number is stored depending on the error that occurred Slot 0 in the multiple PLC system is the one on the slot on the
74. lengthen the link scan to match if the setting for return sequence is increased Normally there is no problem using the default settings The maximum number of return sequence stations is set in the supplemental settings for the common parameters Setting range is 1 to 64 stations The default is set to 2 stations 7 6 Reserved Station Function Lo 7 The reserved station designation is a function that handles stations to be connected in the future as stations with communication errors These stations are not actually connected but they are included in the total number of stations remote in the network Since reserved stations do not affect scan time full performance can be realized even when they remain reserved Reserved stations are set in the common parameters 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 7 Interrupt Settings x The remote master station uses the host interrupt setting parameters to check interrupt conditions at the time data is being received from the remote I O station When the interrupt conditions are matched it issues an interrupt request to CPU module from the master module and starts the interrupt sequence program of the CPU module Up to 16 interrupt conditions can be set per network module Advantages 1 The startup of the interrupt sequence program of the applicable station can be instructed from remote I O stations 2 The number of programming steps is reduced and the scan time is sho
75. loop checks conducted han 0 Number of loop switches x x x x x x x x x x x x x Stores the pointer that indicates the next loop switch data H pogga H H pogga eHe pogga ERE pogga pogga pogga pogga poong 3 To reset from the SWOO0B8 to C7 turn on the SB0006 The numbers of times stored in the SWO0B8 to SW00C7 will not cause any problems if they are counting up gradually over a long period of time If they are counted up rapidly in a short period of time while monitoring with GX Developer etc the cable may be faulty 4 This may be counted up at power on reset but it is not an error Clear with the SB0005 when the number of retries is not required before starting data linking 5 To reset the SWOOCC turn on the SBO007 6 To reset the SWOOCD turn on the SB0008 7 To reset the SWOOCE to SWO00E7 turn on the SB0009 App 24 App 24 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued Remote Control Normal Remote I O i A master station station j station station Optical Optical Coaxial Optical Optical Description Stores the cause and status of the loop switch Whether the data should be overwritten or retained is set in the common parameters b15 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Sw00D0 to SWOODF Status after switching lt Cause gt The bit corresponding to each error is set to 1 Loop switch data All 0 Return direction lt Status a
76. mail info estl ru e mail Ipia pmail com SCG 113000 Smederevo ICOS RUSSIA UTU Elektrotehnika AS ESTONIA Phone 381 0 26 617 163 Industrial Computer Systems Zao P rnu mnt 160i Fax 381 0 26 617 163 Ryazanskij Prospekt 8A Off 100 EE 11317 Tallinn e mail inea_sr verat net RU 109428 Moscow Phone 372 0 6 51 72 80 Phone 7 095 232 0207 Fax 372 0 6 51 72 88 AutoCont Controlsro SLOVAKIA Ea 7095 232 0327 e mail utu utu ee SK 02601 Doln Kub n e mail mail icos ru Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Phone 421 435868 210 NPP Uralelektra RUSSIA Ansatie 6a Fax 421 435868 210 Sverdlova 11A FIN 01740 Vantaa e mail info autocontcontrol sk RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Phone 358 0 9 886 77 500 Phone 7 34 32 532745 Fax 358 0 9 886 77 555 a SLOVENIA Fax 7 3432 532745 e mail info beijerfi SI 1000 Ljubljana e mail elektra etel ru UTECO A B E E GREECE Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 STC Drive Technique RUSSIA 5 Mavrogenous Str GR 18542 Piraeus Phone 302 0 10 42 10 050 Fax 302 0 10 42 12 033 e mail sales uteco gr Meltrade Automatika Kft 55 Harmat St HU 1105 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 2605 602 Fax 36 0 1 2605 602 e mail office meltrade hu HUNGARY SIA POWEL Lienes iela 28 LV 1009 Riga Phone 371 784 22 80 Fax 371 784 22 81 e mail utu utu lv LATVIA Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 e mail inea inea si Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Box 426 S 20124 Malm Ph
77. manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with M
78. many transient requests during one scan b Setting on the remote master station CPU module 1 Execute the COM instruction Transient requests are processed when the remote master station executes the COM instruction This is effective when the scan time of the remote master station is long 2 Using special register SD315 secure the communication processing time In the END processing of the remote master station the processing time for transient requests is secured This is effective when the scan time is short Either of the above 1 or 2 can reduce the wait time for transient request processing on the remote master station even if multiple remote I O stations issue transient requests 2 Although the above 1 can reduce the transient request processing time it may affect the process as described below Adjust each set value shown in 1 to a value suitable for the system being used a Link scan time of MELSECNET H When transient requests are issued from multiple stations at the same time the link scan time may be temporarily prolonged b Scan time of the remote master station CPU module The scan time may be prolonged by execution of the COM instruction or by securing the communication processing time 6 Link start designation For future expansion Cannot be set at present time 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 5 1 5 Network refresh parameters The refresh parameters are used to transfer the link device dat
79. master station The receive LX device number from the remote master station is stored In 1 point units Valid only when SB01C8 is ON For remote master station The send LB device number to the remote sub master station is stored In 1 point units For remote sub master station The send LB device number to the remote master station is stored In 1 point units Valid only when SB01C8 is ON For remote master station The receive LB device number from the remote sub master station is stored In 1 point units For remote sub master station The receive LB device number from the remote master station is stored In 1 point units Valid only when SB01C8 is ON For remote master station The send LW device number to Send LW device the remote sub master station is stored In 1 point units For remote sub master station The send LW device number to the remote master station is stored In 1 point units Valid only when SB01C8 is ON For remote master station The receive LW device number from the remote sub master station is stored In 1 point units For remote sub master station The receive LW device number from the remote master station is stored In 1 point units Receive LX device number number Receive LW device number 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained 9 To reset the SWOOEE to SWOOEF turn on the SBOOOA App 26 App 26 APPENDIX 2
80. mode The table below shows the mode settings when conducting the forward loop reverse loop test on the redundant system Target station Set up N Redundant In backup mode _ Set to forward loop test Test target station system In separate mode jor reverse loop test Redundant In backup mode _ Set to offline system In separate mode Set to online Remote I O station Set to online Non test target station The figure below shows the settings when the forward loop test is executed on the system A station No 1 of the redundant system in the backup mode Remote I O station Remote I O station Power Qu72 Power QJ72 supply 1 pas supply p25 module module Station Station No 3 No 2 I TT a system Standby system system A Lt system B Power Redundant Station Power Redundant Station supply cpu No 0 supply cpu No 1 module i module i Redundant settings MNET H Multiplexed remote master 0000 Network type Starting 1 0 No Network No Total stations Group No Station No MNET H Muliplexed remote master Network type 4 Start 1 0 No 0000 Mode System A Mode System B Off line Forward loop test X Refresh parameters Interrupt settings Set the mode of the system B station No 1 to offline T Redundant settings Set the mode of the system A station No 0 to forward
81. module is installed to the slot whose number is greater than e Remove the module installed at the slot the number of slots specified in the base setting whose number is greater than the number of 2124 A module is installed to the location corresponding to the I O slots specified in the base setting points of the 4 096 or greater e Remove the module installed to the location A module is installed to the slot whose assigned I O range inclds of I O points 4 096 or greater the limit of e Replace the last module to a module which does not exceed the 4 096th point e Install a usable module 2125 A module which the QCPU cannot recognise has been installed The intelligent function module is e There was no response form the intelligent function module experiencing a hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative In the PLC parameter points for the empty slot are not set within e Read the detailed information of the error 3000 the range available for the remote I O module using the peripheral device check the The parameter settings in the error individual information parameter items corresponding to those special register SD16 are illegal numerical values parameter numbers and correct when necessary e Rewrite corrected parameters to the Remote I O module reload the Remote I O station power supply and or reset the module e If the same error occurs it is thought to be a 3001 The parameter settings are corrupted hard
82. network operate In setting the parameters it is possible to make settings from the selection of the type of MELSECNETHH to the application functions The following is a flow chart of the settings 1 Parameter settings for the remote master station Setting the number of module cards Network type MNET H Remote master Section 5 1 1 Network settings 1 Starting I O No 2 Network No 1 to 239 3 Total stations gt gt Remote master station only Section 5 1 2 Common parameters 1 Transmission range of each station LB LW LXILY setting Set the following items as necessary 2 Reserved station setting Section 5 1 3 Auxiliary setting Section 5 1 4 Set the following functions as necessary t Required n A a aa E S A ae S oR Refresh parameter settings i Section 5 1 5 1 1 N TRT ERE R E ne E I EEIE IE TEE ti 4 Not required Section 7 7 Redundant settings for redundant system 2 J Section 5 1 7 e Writing parameter to CPU module 3 CPU module reset To cable connection lt Section 4 6 1 Refer to the Q corresponding MELSECNET H network system reference manual PLC to PLC network for details x2 Make the settings only when using the redundant system 3 For the redundant system write the parameter to the CPU module of the control system 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS Not required
83. number error station No 0 specified Send target station number error station No 65 or higher number specified Corrective measure Check for the operation status of the control sub control station faulty cables incorrect cable wiring absence of terminating resistor in the case of the bus and duplication of station numbers control stations and remote master stations Confirm whether network modules in MESLECNET H and MELSECNET 10 modes exist together confirm the control station type Check for faulty cables faulty hardware incorrect wiring absence of terminating resistor in the case of the bus and duplication of station numbers control stations and remote master stations Check for coaxial cable connection proper connector connection connection of terminating resistor or faulty cables The hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Retry after a little while If the error recurs as a result of a retry review the number of transient communication times and communication interval of the entire system Turn off the power supply to the entire system and turn it on again The hardware of the module on the transient transmission source station is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative The hardware of the module on the transient transmission source station is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Check if the logical channel number designated in the
84. of the multiplexed remote master station DMR and multiplexed remote sub master station DSMkr In the redundant system the same network parameters are set to both the control and standby systems For this reason parameter setting for the multiplexed remote sub master station is not required Make sure to assign No 0 to the network module mounted on the system A i e the system to which the system A connector of tracking cable is connected within the redundant system Table 2 5 Setting Items of Multiplexed Remote Master Station and Multiplexed Remote Sub master Station Remote ae Remote master Setting items submaster Reference station Mr f station DSMr Network module switch stavioNNo o iie Section 4 2 1 Mobos Section 4 2 4 Parameter setting on GX Developer MELSECNET H Ethernet card settings MELSECNET H Network type Remote master x Section 5 1 1 station Starting VO No pe x Section 5 1 2 x x Network No ee Section 5 1 2 x Total stations Section 5 1 2 ee ee ee Mode TY ection 5 1 2 lausiiayseting AT i Section 5 1 T Refresh Refresh parameters sid Valid module number during other station Section 5 1 6 ieee Interlink data transfer linterlink data transfer parameters sd Setting of redundant configuration es Section 5 1 7 Routing parameters O A a a El Always set A Default setting A Set as needed X No need to set du i 1 Default value is not set in LX LY Se
85. only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 10 App 10 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 3 Link Special Register SW List In the link special register the data linking information is stored as numeric values Thus faulty areas and causes of errors can be checked using or monitoring the link special registers in the sequence programs Moreover the link special register SW that stores the link status is used for the detailed information of the network diagnostics of GX Developer For a list of the device numbers for each display item see Section 8 1 Network Diagnostics Line Monitor When multiple network modules are installed the SW of each network module is refreshed to the corresponding SW of the CPU module if each network module s refresh parameters are not set If the refresh parameters are set for at least one network module the refresh parameters of all the network modules should be reviewed Module installing position Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 SW0000 to 01FF SW0200 to 03FF SW0400 to O5FF SW0600 to 07FF The link special register has the user setting area range SW000 to SW001F and the system setting area range SW0020 to SWO1FF When the module is installed in the position of Module 1 Table 2 Link special register SW list Control Remote Remote I O Description station master station station Optical Optical Coaxial Optical Optical Sets the station t
86. only when data is needed e When link register W to remote I O station is insufficient For details on the read write instructions refer to the Q corresponding MELSECNET H network system reference manual PLC to PLC network Remote master station Remote I O station Intelligent QCPU Master module Remote I O module function module JP READ Initial settings Buffer memory 1 The GX Configurator is used to write the initial settings for the intelligent function module and the automatic refresh settings to the remote I O station remote I O module 2 The remote I O module follows the automatic refresh contents and refreshes the data in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module to the data register D of the remote I O module 3 QCPU uses the read write instructions to read and write to remote I O module data register D Input Output 4 XIY LXILY is the same as communication with input output module 3 14 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 2 2 RAS functions RAS stands for Reliability Availability and Serviceability and is an automated facility for overall ease of use 1 Output reset function for communication errors Remote I O net will set all output of remote I O stations to off when there is a data link error It will also set all output of remote I O stations to off when the data links are operating properly but the remote master station CPU module is down If you wish to save
87. refer to the description on the programming of link dedicated instructions in section 7 1 1 For details about READ WRITE instructions refer to the Q corresponding MELSECNET H network system reference manual PLC to PLC network 1 REMFR REMTO SW31 When channel 1 is used SW33 When channel 2 is used SW35 When channel 3 is used SW37 When channel 4 is used SW39 When channel 5 is used SW3B When channel 6 is used SW3D When channel 7 is used SWS3F When channel 8 is used 3 READ WRITE Control data completion status S1 1 YS ao TH rH wa lt lt x 4 Table 8 1 lists the descriptions of error codes Table 8 1 Error code list Error No Description of error Corrective measure 4000 to 4FFF Error detected by the PLC CPU Take measures referring to the troubleshooting section of the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Error detected by the serial Take measures referring to the troubleshooting section of the Serial 7000 to 7FFF ae wee communication module etc Communication Module User s Manual Tak ferring to the troubleshooti ti f the CC Link Syst B000 to BFFF Error detected by the CC Link module ake measures referring 9 e troubleshooting section of the ink System Master Local Module User s Manual C000 to CFFF Error detected by the Ethernet module Take measures referring to the troubleshooting section of the Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual F101 Initial stat
88. remote I O station Toh Output holding time Toh Toh Tsw Scan x 2 ms Tsw Redundant CPU system switching time ms Scan Scanning time of the redundant CPU ms For the CPU system switching time refer to QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 System switching when a system switching dedicated instruction is executed a system switching request is issued by GX Developer or the link cable is disconnected on other network module Multiplexed remote master station DMr Multiplexed remote sub master station DSMr Control system standby system Standby system control system System switching request ma e oa 2 o gt OE GX Developer EE a 1L al oe z 2z BE EE GEE of IE JE JE Remote I O station R Remote I O station R Remote I O station R a CPU system switching time lt System switching time from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station System switching request from GX Developer Control system standby system CPU oom Ds2 Standby system control system CPU Output holding time of remote I O station Toh Output holding time Toh Toh Ds2 Scan ms Ds2 Switching time from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station ms Scan Scanning time of the redundant CPU ms 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELS
89. right of the rightmost CPU Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been stored PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 If a fuse blown or I O verify error occurred in the module loaded in the MELSECNET H remote I O station the network number is stored into the upper 8 bits and the station number into the lower 8 bits Use the I O No to check the module where the fuse blown or I O verify error occurred Definitions of base No and slot No lt Base No gt Value used to identify the base unit on which the CPU module has been mounted The following shows the definition of the Error base No common Error Sammon Base No Definition information 0 Indicates the main base unit mounted with the CPU module 1to7 Indicates the extension base unit The stage number setting made by the stage number setting connector on the extension base unit is the base No When stage number setting is extension 1 Base No 1 when stage number setting is extension 7 Base No 7 n a n iw O information The base No of the Redundant CPU is always 0 because it cannot be connected to extension base units lt Slot No gt Value used to identify the slot of each base unit and the module mounted on that slot The I O slot 0 slot on the right side of the CPU slot of the main base unit is defined as the slot of Slot No 0 The slot Nos are consecutively assigned t
90. rise Clears the retry count SW0C8 to SWOC9 to 0 Off Clear not instructed On Clear instructed valid when on Clears the communication error SWOB8 to SW0C7 to 0 Off Clear not instructed On Clear instructed valid when on 2 2 j 2 Availability column Optical optical loop Coaxial coaxial bus O Available X Not available 1 Used in the network tests of peripheral devices 2 SB0000 to SB0003 become valid when only one point turns on SB0000 SBo0001 J _ ABO0001 is valid SB0000 is valid 3 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 3 App 3 APPENDIX Zz o x e2 SB0007 Clear forward loop transmission errors SB0008 Clear reverse loop transmission errors SB0009 Clear loop switch count SBOOOA Clear transient 10 transmission errors El SBO000B 11 Transient transmission error area setting B0011 17 Data link operation designation Remote sub master station switching command B0014 20 System switching monitoring time setting valid flag B0018 24 SB0020 32 Module status SB0040 64 Network type host Host station s redundant function support information B0041 65 B0042 66 Power supply status of host B0043 67 Online switch host Table 1 Special link relay SB list Continued Control station Coaxial Description he l
91. setting for the remote master station side to the input output number of the remote I O station module that is mounted Remote master station Remote I O station Actual I O If there is an error in the mounting condition malfunctioning will occur Remote master station Remote I O station 2 It is possible to reduce the number of links if the mounting of is consolidated into groups of input modules intelligent function modules and input output modules gt Q Qa 3 no o z e a XO X10 X Y30 Y50 X60 Y80 YCO XO X10 X30 X Y50 Y70 Y80 YCO Intelligent Intelligent function module function module Input modules Input modules Output modules Input modules Output modules Output modules Power supply Input modules Input modules Input modules Output modules amp Output modules Output modules a 9 Ss w Ss D gt g Output allocation range 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 2 LB LW setting The LB LW data on each remote I O station are transferred to the CPU module via LB LW of the remote master station for control in the CPU module In the LB LW setting set the area ranges for sending data from the remote master station to each remote I O station and for receiving data from each remote I O station to the remote master station In addition if intelligent function parameters automatic refresh setting are set to an intelligent function modu
92. specifications for a MELSECNET H network system for PLC to PLC network SH 080049 It explains the procedures and settings up to operation setting the parameters programming and 13JF92 troubleshooting Sold separately QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection SH 080483ENG This manual provides the specifications of the CPU modules power supply modules base units 13JR73 extension cables memory cards and others Sold separately QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals SH 080484ENG This manual explains the functions programming methods devices and so necessary to create 13JR74 programs with the QCPU Sold separately QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System This manual explains the multiple CPU system overview system configuration I O numbers SH 080485ENG communication between CPU modules and communication with the I O modules or intelligent function 13JR75 modules Sold separately QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System This manual explains the redundant system configuration functions communication with external SH 080486ENG devices and troubleshooting for redundant system construction using the Redundant CPU 13JR76 Sold separately GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual SH 080373E This manual describes the programming printing monitoring and debugging procedures and other 13JU41 online functions using GX Developer Sold separately Confo
93. standby system operates as the sub master station System switching request The network module mounted in the control system multiplexed remote master Section 7 11 3 function of control system station issues the system switching request control system to standby system to the QnPRHCPU of the host station when a data link error such as disconnection is detected Access function by specifying Access from GX Developer to QNPRHCPU can be performed by specifying the Section 7 11 4 control system or standby control system standby system instead of station No Therefore the control system system can be accessed any time even if system is switched It is not required to create each project for control system standby system In a redundant system parameters and sequence programs common to both systems can be created in one project Therefore network modules mounted in both systems can communicate through a network parameter 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 11 1 Backup function of master operation on system switching between control system and standby system a The redundant system consists of a control system multiplexed remote master station and standby system multiplexed remote sub master station of the same system configuration If a power supply error or CPU error occurs in the control system the QNPRHCPU of the standby system switches to the control system to continue the operation of the redundant system With the s
94. station and a remote I O station can be set up to 1600 bytes The link points of up to 2000 bytes can be set between a master station and a sub master station on a multiplexed remote I O network c Either of the following systems can be chosen the optical loop system maximum total extension of 30 km 98430 ft which has a long station to station distance and total distance and is resistant to noise or the coaxial bus system maximum total extension of 500 m 1640 5 ft which can easy be wired See Section 3 1 Performance Specifications 1 OVERVIEW d e f MELSEC Q The following functions facilitate network connection 1 Any station to be connected in the future can be specified as a reserved station Specifying a station not actually connected as a reserved station prevents a communication error See Section 5 1 3 Common parameter 2 It is not necessary to connect stations in order of the station Nos in the network See Section 4 2 1 4 2 2 The parameters can be written to remote I O modules using GX Developer in the same way as to CPU modules The parameters of the remote I O module can be used to change the detailed settings response time error output mode for I O modules on a remote I O station intelligent function module switch settings and I O allocations and remote password settings Refer to Section 5 2 Remote I O Station Parameter Settings Setting up a master station DMr
95. step Remote I O station E END step Intelligent function module Remote master station scan time Remote master station link refresh time Link scan time TRBF Intelligent function module buffer memory refresh time round up Round up the decimal point of the result operation LS Sm am POINT The same formula is used to calculate the transmission delay time TpB1 independently of the Secured data send receive setting 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q W output transmission delay time Tpsz2 Remote master station scan time Sm gt link scan time LS Tps2 Sm am LS Trer ms 0 0 step HH MOV D100 w100 E END step Remote master station Link scan time Remote I O station Intelligent function module Buffer memory X Remote master station scan time Sm lt link scan time LS Tps2 Sm am x round up LS Sm am LS TrReF ms 0 0 step HH Mov D100 w100 H E END step sm Remote master station EO Link scan time Remote I O station Intelligent function module Tps2 Remote master station scan time Remote master station link refresh time Link scan time TRBF Intelligent function module buffer memory refresh time round up Round up the decimal point of the result operation LS Sm am When the Secured data send receive setting is enabled the transmission delay time Tpsz is calculated as
96. step Remote master station Link scan time Remote I O station Remote master station scan time Sm lt link scan time LS DY Sm am x round up LS Sm am LS TrRior ms T T station sets Y 0 0 step dy ls on near 0 T E END step Remote master station 0 EP Link scan time Remote I O station Remote master station scan time Remote master station link refresh time Link scan time TRIOR I O refresh time round up Round up the decimal point of the result operation LS Sm am When the Secured data send receive setting is enabled the transmission delay time Toy is calculated as follows e Remote master station scan time Sm gt Link scan time LS Toy Sm am LS TRior ms e Remote master station scan time Sm lt Link scan time LS Toy Sm am x round up LS Sm am x 2 LS TRior ms 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q W input transmission delay time TpB1 Remote master station scan time Sm gt link scan time LS Tps1 Sm am x 2 Sm TrRBF ms Mov wo Do H Ff Remote master station Link scan time 0 0 step Remote I O station E END step Intelligent function module Remote master station scan time Sm lt link scan time LS Tps1 Sm am x round up LS Sm am x 2 Sm Tree ms HiH ov wo Do H Sm Remote master station m EMO Link scan time 0 0
97. supply on a remote I O station A redundant power supply can be configured on a remote I O station by mounting a pair of power supply modules onto the dedicated base unit A redundant power supply offers the following advantages 1 The remote I O station can continue the operation after either power supply module stops power supply The remote I O station with a redundant power supply can continue the operation even if either of the power supply modules stops power supply as the remaining power supply module supplies power instead 2 A faulty power supply module can be replaced online hot swapping A faulty power supply module can be replaced online hot swapping as the remote I O station operates using the remaining power supply module To take advantages of the redundant power supply connect separate power supplies to the power supply modules Q61P Power supply A Power supply B i Power supply A stops supplying power Q61P QCPU QJ71 LP21 QJ72LP25 continues operation by supplying power from power supply B Q38RB Power supply A ne If either of the power supply modules stops supplying power the remote I O station detects error code 1510 SINGLE PS DOWN or 1520 SINGLE PS ERROR moderate error Errors in the remote I O station can be confirmed through the PLC diagnostics system monitor of GX Developer version 8 17T or later the ERR LED of the remote I O module
98. temperature adjustment module output cannot be retained when data link is resumed 1 The remote I O station No 2 is disconnected 2 The station No 2 recovers to the normal due to a data link error status and returns to the system Return Remote master station station No 0 Remote master station station No 0 Remote 1 0 station station No 1 Remote O station station No 1 Remote I O station station No 2 Network No 1 Network No 1 station No 5 station No 4 station No 3 station No 5 station No 4 There is a limit to the number of faulty stations that can return to the system within one link scan For details see Section 5 1 4 Supplemental Settings 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Loopback function optical loop system In the optical loop system the transmission path is dual structured When an error occurs in a transmission path the faulty area is disconnected by switching the transmission path from the forward loop to the reverse loop or from the reverse loop to the forward loop or performing a loopback The transmission is continued normally between the stations that are still able to perform data communication a When normal The data link is performed using the forward loop or the reverse loop Remote master station station No 0 R
99. the CPU module is cleared For a multiplexed remote I O network for the redundant system clear an error of the CPU module from the control system CPU module and then on the standby system CPU module When the CPU restarts after resetting the error special relays special registers LEDs and LED display module related to the error are restored to the state before the occurrence of the error After the resetting of an error if the same error occurs again it is registered to the trouble history again If more than one annunciator is detected error resetting operation resets only the F number that was detected first Lower 2 digits of the error code stored to SD50 are ignored for error clear operation Example After the errors of error codes 2100 and 2111 occur if error code 2100 is stored to SD50 and the error is cleared the error of error code 2111 is also cleared 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 4 H W Information MELSEC Q H W information screen displays details of the LED and switch information of the network modules To display the H W information screen click the H W information button on the system monitor window of GX Developer 1 H W information on the master module 1 a 1 b Module Display format Module Name QJ71LP21 25 Product information 060510000000000 D HEX C DEC HAW LED Information HAW SW Information V
100. the calculation m X transmission delay time Tpx Remote master station scan time Sm gt link scan time LS Tox Sm am x 2 Sm TrRior ms x The master station confirms the X attached near the end step Sm m Sm a Sm Sm n Sm Remote master station 0 EM EMMO Fo E Link scan time LS H LS HLS HH LS LS H ARONA z 0 0 step Remote I O station a E END step Tox Remote master station scan time Sm lt link scan time LS Tox Sm am x round up LS Sm am x 2 Sm TRior ms The master station confirms the X attached near the end step sm i Sm Sm S Sm Remote master station 0 EFO Elo EFO EFO Eo E X Link scan time LS Thio zes 0 0 step Remote I O station _ ie E END step i i Sm Remote master station scan time am Remote master station link refresh time LS Link scan time TRIOR I O refresh time round up Round up the decimal point of the result operation LS Sm am The same formula is used to calculate the transmission delay time Tpx independently of the Secured data send receive setting 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Y transmission delay time Tpy Remote master station scan time Sm gt link scan time LS Toy Sm am LS Trior ms Remote station sets Y 0 0 step _4 cat to on near 0 step E END
101. the current baton pass Current remote master i Remote master station or multiplexed x x x x O O O O station 7DH 3 remote master station 1 to 64 Multiplexed remote sub master station At the PLC to PLC network Designated control station Stores the number of the station that is set as the control station SW0057 Range 1 to 64 0 Designated control station error 87 A When remote I O network Designated remote i z master station 7DH Remote master station Other than 7DH_ Remote master station error Stores the total number of link stations that is set with the parameters Range 1 to 64 64 when there is no parameter Stores the maximum station number among the stations executing the baton pass Range 1 to 64 Stores the maximum station number among the stations executing the cyclic transmission Range 1 to 64 Stores the station number of the I O master station of block 1 with PLC to PLC network 0 None O O O O x x x x 1 to 64 Station number Valid when the SB0049 is off Stores the station number of the I O master station of block 2 with PLC to PLC network 0 None 1 to 64 Station number Valid when the SB0049 is off Stores the stations that are set as reserved stations 0 Other than reserved station swo064 1 Reserved station 100 Valid when the SB0049 is off SW0059 Total number of link stations Maximum baton pass Maximum cyclic transmission station SWO05C I O master station 92 block
102. the directly connected module can be canceled unlocked by remote operation of GX Developer The remote password for the indirectly connected module cannot be canceled by remote operation 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 TROUBLESHOOTING In order to ensure high system reliability it is important to take precautions before the system is operated and to quickly and effectively correct problems if they do occur This is why it is important to perform off line testing of the network and checking of the cables when first starting the system Make sure to perform the following checks which are explained in Chapter 4 Setup and Procedures Before Starting the Operation 1 2 3 Standalone operation check and operational setting of the network module Offline tests Hardware test Internal self loopback test self loopback test and forward loop reverse loop test Check the connection of the data link cable Network diagnostic loop test requires optical loop Even with this if an error does occur it is important to quickly and accurately understand the nature of the problem The following are three methods for confirming the contents of an error 1 Network diagnostics to remote master station with GX Developer a Line monitor see Section 8 1 The status of the following four types of networks can be checked by monitoring the line 1 Status of the entire network Host information 2 Data link status and parameter statu
103. the module 8 Mount a new module in the same slot 9 Mount the terminal block or connector to the module 10 Turn on the switch of the external power supply for modules to resume power supply 3 29 3 29 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 11 Connect between the external device and module I O signal by the switch and so on 12 Mount the module and then click the Execute button The table below indicates the communication status of the new module when the screen below is displayed Online module change Operation Target module 1 0 address 020H Module name Qy50 Module change execution Installation confirmation Status Module control restart i i Change module installation completion Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Cancel Target modules and items Execute not execute Input module refreshing Not execute en oo eel are retained Output module refreshing module refreshing Not execute execute I O combined module data are retained Intelligent function module If the initial settings of the intelligent function module have been made by GX Configurator the setting data are written in to the intelligent function module 13 Click the Execute button to start control 14 The Online Module Change Completion
104. the network module The following three test are available for the offline tests 1 Self loopback test mode setting switch 1 or 5 This test checks the hardware of the internal circuits including the send receive circuit of the network module as well as the cables 2 Internal self loopback test mode setting switch 2 or 6 This test checks the hardware of the internal circuits including the send receive circuit of the network module 3 Hardware test mode setting switch 3 or 7 This test checks the hardware inside the network module Flow of offline tests Test start Self loopback test Mode setting switch 1 or 5 am OK Test completed Internal self loopback test Mode setting switch 2 or 6 NG Test result OK Hardware test Mode setting switch 3 or 7 Test result OK y Y Defective send receive circuit Corrective action Replace module Defective cable Corrective action Replace cable Defective internal circuit Corrective action Replace module The data link operation cannot be executed normally if at least one station is placed in the test mode offline MODE switches 1 to 3 or 5 to 7 during data linking online 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION 4 7 1 Self loopback test MELSEC Q This test checks the hardware of a standalone network module including the send
105. 0 channel 3 0 Logical channel number 3 default 1to64 Other logical channel number is set 1 Used in the network test of GX Developer App 11 App 11 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued Use permitted prohibited Control PETOLE Remote I O Name Description 8 A master station x station station Optical Coaxial Optical Coaxial Optical Coaxial Optical Coaxial SWO000B Logical channel setting 11 channel 4 SWO00C Logical channel setting 12 channel 5 SW000D Logical channel setting 13 channel 6 SWOOOE Logical channel setting 14 channel 7 SWOOOF Logical channel setting 15 channel 8 SW0018 System switching 24 monitoring time setting swoo1 7 Number of retries SW0020 32 Module status ZNRD instruction processing result SW0031 49 Send receive instruction 1 processing result Sets the logical channel number for physical channel number 4 Valid only for channels on the receiving side 0 Logical channel number 4 default 1to64 Other logical channel number is set Sets the logical channel number for physical channel number 5 Valid only for channels on the receiving side 0 Logical channel number 5 default 1to64 Other logical channel number is set Sets the logical channel number for physical channel number 6 Valid only for channels on the receiving side 0 Logical channel number 6 defau
106. 1 On NET 10H type modules exist Indicates the host s loop status SB0090 Hostiorztat s Off Normal 144 p On Abnormal Turns off when the SW0090 is all 0 Indicates the status of stations connected to the forward loop Off All stations normal o On Faulty stations exist Turns off when the SW0091 to SW0094 are all 0 Indicates the status of stations connected to the forward loop Forward loop status of the Off All stations normal O x x x x x x SB0092 146 remote master station On Faulty stations exist Turns off when the SW0091 to SW0094 are all 0 3 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained 4 Minor errors battery error etc are the type of errors that do not affect the CPU operation 5 Serious errors WDT error etc are the type of errors that stop the CPU operation Fatal errors RAM error etc are also the type of errors that stop the CPU operation App 8 App 8 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 1 Special link relay SB list Continued Use permitted prohibited ae Control Ronee Remote I O Description master station f station station Optical Optical Coaxial Optical Optical Indicates the status of stations connected to the reverse loop Off All stations normal On Faulty stations exist Turns off when the SW0095 to SW0098 are all 0 Indicate the reverse loop status of the remote master station Reverse loop status
107. 124 B Model addition QJ71LP21G QU72LP25G QJ71LP21GE QU72LP25GE Correction Product Components About The Generic Terms And Abbreviations Chapter 1 Section 1 2 2 4 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 8 2 Chapter 5 Section 5 1 5 5 2 1 6 1 2 6 2 1 6 3 6 4 7 1 1 7 8 8 1 8 1 1 8 1 4 8 3 1 8 3 2 Appendix 2 3 4 5 Index Addition Section 8 2 6 pr 2002 SH NA 080124 C Section 1 2 1 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 5 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 2 1 6 1 1 6 4 Chapter 7 Section 8 4 Appendix 2 3 Changed item numbers Section 2 3 Section 2 4 Section 2 4 Section 2 5 Addition Section 7 10 Nov 2002 SH NA 080124 D Model addition QJ71LP21S 25 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CONTENTS Generic Terms And Abbreviations Product Components Section 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 3 1 2 4 1 2 4 8 1 4 8 2 7 1 1 8 1 4 Appendix 2 3 pr 2003 SH NA 080124 E SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About Manuals Section 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 5 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 1 Chapter 5 Section 5 1 3 5 1 5 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 5 8 3 1 A A x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date_ Manual Number Jun 2004 SH NA 080124 F SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Manuals Generic Terms And Abbreviations Section 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 2 2 5 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 2 3 2 2 4 2 2 4 9 1 4 10 4 10 1 4 10 2 4 10 3 Chapter 5 Section 5 1 1 5 2 5 2 1 6
108. 21 32 bit data gua IMOG tet aha dtad EA ate dead inden dete ead ena det 6 6 6 2 2 Block guarantee of cyclic data per Station eeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeseesaneatesas 6 7 6 3 Communication Between Input Output Module and Intelligent Function Module ecee 6 8 6 4 Dedicated Link Instruction List oa r sriruiar iresi annasan a aaa eana aaua aa aAa aaa an aaia d anara 6 12 6 5 Using the Link Special Relays SB Link Special Registers SW eeseeeesessesreeresresrssrerrsrrsrrsrreesn 6 16 7 1 Transient Transmission Function Non Periodical Communication cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeenreeatens 7 2 7 1 1 Dedicated link INStrUCtiOn ii cecceencteedea dive dreds aeencvtiecaddenedusadeadeeiadene i 7 3 1 Reading writing remote I O station intelligent function module buffer memory REMERIREMTO cic fic hetten ct catia dite d tase An ENA eaten ee atta dite iees 7 3 7 2 Remote I O Station System MOnitor eenn A AERE 7 13 A 9 A 9 7 3 Device Test for Remote 1 O Station ccc ccccceecssssessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeauaaauaauaaaaeaaueauauauaauaaueeseeueeeeaaass 7 14 7 4 Multiplex Transmission Function Optical Loop System cceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeatens 7 16 7 5 Return Sequence Station Number Setting FUNCtION cc eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeens 7 17 7 6 Reserved Station FUNCIO rsru reran AAAA E E ANE 7 17 TT Antemupt Se
109. 301 error Auto refresh setting Module information Module model name Q64AD Start 1 0 No Module type A D Conversion Module Setting item nS Digi CURVES ta 2 This single line is counted as one parameter CH2 Digital output value A blank field is counted out NUT EEL EE ETS Add all the setting items on this setting Ehio Valle 7 screen to all numbers of parameters of the CH1 Maximum value x 7 TET other intelligent function modules Minimum value CH2 Maximum value CH2 Minimum value CH3 Maximum value Make text file End setup If the error has been detected read write the data of the intelligent function modules using the REMFR REMTO instruction The number of parameters for automatic refresh setting is preset to each intelligent function module To confirm the numbers of parameters for automatic refresh setting refer to the user s manuals of the corresponding intelligent function modules Refer to the manual for the intelligent function module for details about the method for setting the intelligent parameters 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Program example 1 Program for communicating with input output module QX40 QY40P The sequence program uses input X100 to X10F and output Y110 to Y11F to handle remote I O station station No 1 QX40 input and QY40P output X100 1 E Input from remote I O station XO KAS 0110 Output to rem
110. 4 6 5 Chapter 7 Section 8 1 8 1 1 8 1 2 8 1 3 8 1 4 8 2 1 8 2 3 8 2 5 8 2 7 8 3 1 8 3 2 Appendix 2 3 Addition Section 1 4 2 4 2 7 3 3 3 3 3 4 7 11 7 12 8 2 7 Appendix 7 Changed section No Section 2 4 Section 2 5 Section 2 5 Section 2 6 Mar 2005 SH NA 080124 G Safety Precautions Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction Product Configuration Section 1 1 1 2 2 6 2 7 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 4 3 2 2 3 3 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 3 4 4 4 8 1 4 8 2 4 9 1 4 10 1 5 1 4 6 1 1 6 2 6 2 2 6 3 7 4 8 1 8 1 2 8 1 3 8 2 8 2 1 8 3 1 8 3 2 Appendix 2 3 4 5 7 Addition Section 8 2 8 Sep 2005 SH NA 080124 H Generic Terms And Abbreviations Section 1 2 Section 2 5 Section 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 Section 5 1 5 5 2 1 Section 6 3 6 5 Section 7 12 Section 8 2 8 2 5 8 3 1 8 3 2 Appendix 3 4 5 May 2006 SH NA 080124 Generic Terms And Abbreviations Section 1 1 Chapter 2 Section 2 2 1 2 5 3 1 1 3 1 4 4 2 1 4 2 2 5 1 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 6 3 6 4 7 1 1 8 1 2 8 3 2 Appendix 5 Addition Section 2 5 1 2 5 2 Sep 2006 SH NA 080124 J Section 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 8 3 2 Japanese Manual Version SH 080123 M This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial p
111. 4 points OH to 1FFFH 8192 points The device range excluding that of I O module mounted on the host station should be assigned to LY OH to 1FFFH 8192 points exc SRNR modile 10001 20001 30001 3FFFH 0 4096 8192 12288 16383 Extended 1 CPU module B W Co jees Network module LB LW YZ CPU module X Y Actual vo Network module LX LY Actual VME LLL Z Available device range 1 Expandable by changing from PLC parameters Device settings 2 6 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 3 Multiplexed Remote I O Network for Redundant System QnPRHCPU Only 2 3 1 Configuration The redundant system including QNPRHCPU utilizes the multiplexed remote I O network system in order to control I O modules and intelligent function modules In the multiplexed remote I O network system for the redundant system the network module on the side of the control QNPRHCPU started up as a control system acts as a multiplexed remote master station and controls remote I O stations while the network module mounted on the side of the standby QNPRHCPU performs the sub master operation as a multiplexed remote sub master station When the control system CPU or the multiplexed remote master station goes down the multiplexed remote sub master station switches from standby to control and takes over the control of the remote I O stations Make sure to assign No 0 to the network module mounted on the system A i
112. 6 mm 0 26 in single annealed copper wire mesh 5C 2V connector plug BNC P 5 NiCAu is recommended 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Connecting the coaxial cable connectors The following section explains how to connect the BNC connector the connector plug for the coaxial cable to the cable e Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions CAUTION a Structure of the BNC connector and coaxial cable The structure of the BNC connector and coaxial cable are shown in Figure 3 1 Components of the BNC connector oO External conductor Outer sheath Insulating material Structure of the coaxial cable SY Nut Washer Gasket Plug shell P Contact Figure 3 1 Structure of the BNC connector and coaxial cable Internal conductor b How to connect the BNC connector and the coaxial cable 1 Cut the portion of the outer sheath of the coaxial cable as shown in the diagram below ERIM RRR REEI 15mm 0 59 in Cut this portion of the outer sheath 2 Fit the nut washer gasket and clamp onto the coaxial cable as shown below and then loosen the external conductor Clamp Washer Gasket 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Cut the external conductor insulating material and internal conductor to the dimensions shown below Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same dimension as the tapered section of the cla
113. 67 17 48 e mail info koningenhartman com e mail consys consys spb ru e mail info koningenhartman com_ Beijer Electronics A S NORWAY Electrotechnical RUSSIA TELECON CO BULGARIA Teglverksveien 1 Systems Siberia Andrej Ljapchev Lbvd Pb 21 4 N 3002 Drammen Shetinkina St 33 Office 116 BG 1756 Sofia Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 RU 630088 Novosibirsk Phone 359 0 2 97 44 05 8 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 Phone 7 3832 119598 Fax 359 0 2 97 44061 e mail info beijer no Fax 7 3832 119598 e mail MPL Technology Sp zo o POLAND mail info eltechsystems ru AutoCont CZECH REPUBLIC ul Sliczna 36 Elektrostyle RUSSIA Control Systems s r o PL 31 444 Krak w Poslannikov Per 9 Str 1 Nemocnicni 12 Phone 48 0 12 632 28 85 RU 107005 Moscow CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Fax 48 0 12 632 47 82 Phone 7 095 542 4323 Phone 420 59 6152 111 e mail krakow mpl pl Fax 7 095 956 7526 Fax 420 59 6152 562 Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA e mail info estl ru e mail consys autocont cz Str Biharia No 67 77 Elektrostyle RUSSIA louis poulsen DENMARK RO 013981 Bucuresti 1 Krasnij Prospekt 220 1 Office No industri amp automation Phone 40 0 21 201 1146 312 Geminivej 32 Fax 40 0 21 201 1148 RU 630049 Novosibirsk DK 2670 Greve e mail sirius siriustrading ro Phone 7 3832 106618 Phone 45 0 70 10 15 35 INEA SRd o 0 SERBIA AND MONTENEGRO Fax 7 3832 106626 Fax 45 0 43 95 9591 Karadjordjeva 12 260 e
114. 9600bps K192 19 2kbps K384 38 4kbps S New Renot setting a NO K576 57 6kbps K1152 115 2kbps Pye RS232 Error No for eternal Module No which Stores the smallest head No of the module whose external QCPU SD120 POr has external power power supply is OFF S Error New Romo supply OFF supply error x Applicable only for Q series modules For future use App 37 App 37 APPENDIX Number Name SD200 State of switch App 38 Special Register List 2 System information Meaning Explanation e The switch status of the remote I O module is stored in the following DIP switch format Pp 5 aa l pO L L L 3 Vacant i 7 1 Remote I O module switch status Always 1 STOP e The CPU switch status is stored in the following format B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO T T T T T T T T T T T T q L L 1 L L L L gt a L gt L L L ma Vacant CPU switch status 0 RUN 1 STOP 2 L CLR Memory card switch Always OFF B8 through BC correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1 0 OFF 1 ON State of CPU BD through BF are vacant switch e The CPU switch state is stored in the following format B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO T T T y T T T T T T T T i J i i i i i 1 i L i i lt 4 gt gt lt p4 gt Vacant CPU key 0 RUN State of switch 1 STOP 2 L CLR Memory cards switch DIP switch B4 cor
115. A Purchased from Mitsubishi Electric Europe GmbH 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 1 4 Coaxial cable specifications The following table lists the specifications of the coaxial cables used for the coaxial bus system The high frequency coaxial cable 3C 2V or 5C 2V conforms to JIS 3501 is used However when configuring a multiplexed remote I O network for redundant system use a double shield coaxial cable Refer to section 4 8 2 1 Coaxial cable specifications The specifications of the coaxial cable are shown in Table 3 4 Select coaxial cables that meet the operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C shown in the general specifications of the PLC Table 3 4 Coaxial cable specifications Structure Internal conductive material Insulating material External conductor Outer Sheath Cable diameter Minimum allowable bend radius 22mm 0 87 inJormore 0 mm 1 18in ormore Internal conductor diameter 0 5 mm 0 02 in annealed copper wire 0 8 mm 0 03 in annealed copper wire Insulating material diameter External conductor diameter Applicable connector plug 5 4 mm 0 21 in 22 mm 0 87 in or more 3 1 mm 0 12 in polyethylene 3 8 mm 0 15 in 3C 2V connector plug BNC P 3 NiCAu is recommended single annealed copper wire mesh Consult the nearest Mitsubishi representative with connector plugs 7 4 mm 0 29 in 30 mm 1 18 in or more 4 9 mm 0 19 in polyethylene 6
116. APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q M1100 152 SET Y219 Write Operation completion condition flag setting request X210 Y219 X219 154 1 AF RST y219 Module Operation Operating Operation read condition condition condition setting setting setting request completed request flag Digital output value read processing M1150 X210 X21E Y219 158 H wo gt Digital Module A D Operation value read conversion condition reading completed setting request flag request HKO gt r RENFR J K5 K1 H1 K11 D1110 K4 M1110 Error code read and reset process M1151 X21F 198 At 2P RENFR H K6 K1 H1 K19 D1130 K1 M1120 Error Error Read reset flag completion request flag BCD D1130 K4Y30 M1120 241 H SET Y21F Read Error completion clear flag request Y21F X21F 243 a A SS st Y21F Error Error Error clear flag clear request request 4O NO 29 s L 7 12 7 12 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 2 Remote I O Station System Monitor It is possible to Remote I O network can monitor the intelligent function module mounted to the remote I O station system using GX Developer By using this it is possible to easily diagnose the intelligent function module on the remote I O station For details on operating the system monitor please refer to the operating manual for the GX Developer There are 3 methods for performing system monitoring 1 Connecting the GX Developer directly to the remo
117. ATIONNO Section 4 2 1 MODE Yt Stig 4 2 1 Parameter setting on GX Developer MELSECNET H Ethernet card settings MELSECNET H Network t Section 5 1 1 PORC YRO Remote master station a Starting O No OY Section 5 4 2 Networkno Section 5 41 2 Total number of remote modules Section 5 1 2 GroupNow lt a E E e a Station specific parameters eee eee ee Refresh parameters Section 5 1 5 Valid module number during other station Section 5 1 6 access Inter link data transfer parameters Routing parameters Do eee a eee Always set A Default setting A Set as needed x No need to set 1 Default value is not set in LX LY Set refresh parameters 2 Refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC Network SH 080049 2 10 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 Table 2 8 shows the setting items for the remote I O module main module for the remote I O station R and the parameter setting items from the GX Developer Table 2 8 Remote I O station setting items Remote I O station R Network module main module switch Moose oo Section 2 2 Parameter setting PLC systemseting PLCRASseting Pa WOassignment PA Operation setting A Section 5 2 1 Ethemetseting A CC Linkseting A Remote password setting A Section 7 12_ GX Configurator setting Initial seting A Auto refresh setting EA Always set A Default setting A Set as needed x No need to s
118. AUSE state is entered if this relay is ON when the u M9040 coil ON PAUSE enabled remote PAUSE contact goes ON SM206 Device test OFF Device test not yet request y Comes ON when the device test mode is executed on executed S Request New Remote acceptance Paes GX Developer status ON Device test executed Clock data read OFF Ignored e When this relay is ON clock data is read to SD210 sieis ON Read request through SD213 as BCD values M2028 Max loaded I O OFF Ignored When this relay goes from OFF to ON maximum loaded Sei ON Read VO number is read to SD250 y New SAREM Goes ON when a CC Link error is detected in any of the S Status installed QJ61QBT11 Goes OFF when normal operation change OFF Normal is restored ON Error Goes ON when a CC Link error is detected in any of the installed A 1S J61QBT11 Stays ON even after normal operation is restored SM280 CC Link error 3 Scan information Meaning Explanation When Set When this goes from OFF to ON the module service interval designated by SD550 is read to SD551 through 552 Reads module service interval App 29 App 29 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Redundant power supply module information When Set OFF No redundant power supply module with e Turns ON when one or more redundant power supply input power OFF modules with input power OFF are detected Power supply off detected e Turns on if any of SD1780 bits i
119. B 41H A SD18 File name 44H D 43H C SD19 ASCII code 8 characters A6H F 45H E D20 48H H 47H G SD21 Extension 4 2EH 49H 1 2DH SD22 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH B SD23 D24 Vacant SD25 SD26 Time value actu1ally measured Number Meaning SD16 Time 1 us units 0 to 999 us SD17 Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms SD22 Vacant Program error location Number Meaning SD17 File name ASCII code 8 characters Error rsp79 individual D20 Extension 4 2EH S Error New O Rem information SD21 ASCII code 3 characters SD22 Patternx5 SD23 Block No SD24 Step No transition No SD25 Sequence step No L SD26 Sequence step No H Error individual information x5 Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number 070 to o olxlxlx L sfc block designation present Not used 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 Parameter number Annunciator Intelligent function number CHK module parameter instruction error malfunction for QCPU only number Number Meaning Number Meaning Number Meaning SD16 Parameter No 6 SD16 No SD16 Parameter No 6 SD17 SD17 SD17 Error cod
120. B0078 Off Executing communication other than parameter station are 120 communication On Executing parameter communication Turns off when the SW0078 to SW007B are all 0 Indicates the low speed cycle communication status It is indicated to have transmitted by turning the bit on for either the SB007A or SBO07B Low speed cyclic communication status SB007A o Low speed cyclic i communication status SB007B A Cycle interval A A A 3 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 7 App 7 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 1 Special link relay SB list Continued ae Control RETO Remote I O Description master station y station station Optical Coaxial Indicates the parameter status of each station Not applicable to reserved stations and the station with the maximum station O x x 3 Parameter status of each number and higher SB007C 124 station Off No station detected parameter errors On A station detected parameter errors Turns off when the SW007C to SW007F are all 0 Indicates the operation status of each station s CPU on the PLC to PLC network including the host station Off All stations normal On A moderate or serous error identified T3 KO Operation status of each This relay turns off when all of SW0080 to SW0083 are 0 SB0080 128 station s CPU Indicates the operation status of each remote I O station on the r
121. CPU Sean y Network Standby system control system CPU Output holding time of remote I O station Output holding time Toh Toh 500 K Tc Tsw Scan x 2 ms K Data link monitoring time set up by the common parameters in the network parameters ms Tc Switching monitoring time specify the setting range using SW0018 x 10ms ms Tsw Redundant CPU system switching time ms Scan Scanning time of the redundant CPU ms For the CPU system switching time refer to QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION This chapter explains the procedures settings connections and testing that are required to start the data link operation 4 1 Procedures Before Starting the Operation The following flowchart shows the proced operation Start Module switch settings Set the operation conditions of the network module STATION No MODE Install the network module Stop the CPU to prevent unintentional outputs e Check the input power supply voltage Power on Turn on the power and check that the POWER LED of the power supply module and the RUN LED of the network module are turned on Standalone check of the network module Self loopback test e Internal self loopback test Hardware test Remote master station s parameter se
122. E Seinen e Q61SP is applicable to Q3L SB Shee 00128 QC30B r NCS0B Overall extension cable length 13 2m or less 5 QI60 QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 QJ71LP21G QJ71LP21GE QJ71BR11 QU71WS96 e Function version B or later is available QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 100 Interrupt pointers dedicated instructions and e mail function are not available To the next page 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q QJ71024 QU71024 R2 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QJ 1CMO ODST QDS1RZA Interrupt pointers and intelligent function QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 ptp 9 module dedicated instructions are not QD62 QD62D QD62E QD75P1 QD75P2 available QD75P4 QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 QD75M1 QD75M2 QD75M4 QD75MH1 QD75MH2 QD75MH4 refresh are not available x1 Total of up to 64 modules can be mounted to a base unit Refer to the data book for the latest information A series and QnA series modules are not usable 2 Online module change can be performed for modules mounted on Q3L B Q3LIRB Q6LJB or Q6L_JRB Modules mounted on the following base unit cannot be replaced online 1 Q3LISB 2 Q5LB Modules mounted on Q3LB cannot be replaced online while those mounted on Q6L_B can be replaced online 3 When using the Q5 _ B calculate the operating voltage of the Q5 _ B and confirm that it is within the specified range Refer to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Insp
123. EC Q b CPU system switching time gt Switching time from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station System switching request from GX Developer Control system standby system CPU Scan Tsw Standby system control system CPU Output holding time of remote I O station Tohi Output holding time Toh Toh Tsw Scan ms Tsw Redundant CPU system switching time ms Scan Scanning time of the redundant CPU ms For the CPU system switching time refer to QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 System switching when the link cable disconnection occurs in the host network module If acommunication error occurs due to link cable disconnection on the host network module it will considerably increase data link monitoring time switching monitoring time Therefore the calculation formula is not affected by the CPU system switching time and the switching time from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station Control system standby system Standby system control system lol gl F d j f i E A a xi ee eae EEA EH B IE Remote I O station R Remote I O station R Remote I O station R An error has occurred on the control system Control system standby system
124. ER ie eA a ee 5 9 2 EB LW SOUING aad eit che Sian hla then idle ela tien eld Mice ect freee decades 5 12 3 Reserved station designation eccecceceeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeecaeseaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaesereeteeatesas 5 13 4 Remote sub master Station eccecceceeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeecaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeeerseateeaeeeas 5 13 5 1 4 Supplemental SettingS ccccececceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaecceaeeccaeeecaceeseaeeseaeeseaeescaeeeeaeeeseeesaeeeseaeessaees 5 15 5 1 5 Network refresh parameters cccccecccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeneesneeseaeeesacesseneesneeseaeessaeeeseceeeeneessnees 5 18 5 1 6 Valid Module During Other Station ACCESS cceeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeecaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeeeeeesaeeeaeeeaeeas 5 26 51 7 Redundant setings issoria aA anA A AA AA AA AA stawtes ta senna atte 5 27 5 2 Remote I O Station Parameter Settings ernaria Rai Eip ERA AREA ARAA ARINE RARER 5 28 5 2 1 Remote I O station possible parameter settings c ccccscceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeteaeetseeteaes 5 28 6 1 Progt amming Precautions Sresi nann naai A EEr ADR AAE EAR E EEAS AIE IA RNA ETA 6 1 6 1 1 Interlock related Signal Sx 0 cc ceedeedecees deneeeecdenceenceeneseneeeneees vena eenedenc AERA A AEA 6 1 6 1 2 Progranmce xem ple ccs E aga saa ah vases E ae R 6 4 6 2 Cyclic Irans mission aana fake ae en eee Gade eee aan Eee eae adh dene Eos aa ee 6 6 6
125. IX MELSEC Q Appendix 4 Special Relay SM for Remote I O Modules List App 28 Special relays SM are internal relays whose specifications are decided by the CPU and remote I O module For this reason they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the normal internal relays However they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to control the CPU and remote I O modules Use the GX Developer to monitor and control the ON OFF functions of the remote I O module s special relay Connect the GX Developer to the remote master station or the remote I O module then operate the online menu monitor and the device test The following table applies only to special relays related to remote I O modules The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user in sequence program or test operation at a peripheral device S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt gt indicated only if setting is done by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error is generated Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there i
126. Initial settings 1 MOV WO DO H iN MOV D10 wio X1000 He lt Y1018 gt Buffer memory 1 The GX Configurator is used to write the initial settings for the intelligent function module and the automatic refresh settings to the remote I O station remote I O module 2 The remote I O module follows the automatic refresh contents and refreshes the data in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module to the data register D of the remote I O module 3 The remote I O module uses transfer among devices for the PLC parameters written to the host to send data register D to link register W 3 SPECIFICATIONS d MELSEC Q 4 Link register W follows the common parameters set in the remote master station for communication between the remote master station and the remote I O station 5 Link register W between the master module and QCPU are refreshed Input output 6 X Y LXI LY is the same as communication with input output module The CPU module uses the intelligent function module parameter automatic refresh settings to write the intelligent function module data that has been refreshed in data register D of the remote I O station network module using dedicated link instructions Read Write instructions This method can be used for the following applications e During intelligent function module control when reading and writing data with the sequence program
127. J71C24N QU71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QJ71C24 and QJ71C24 Serial communication module ao at R2 serial communication modules MELSECNET H Abbreviation for Q series MELSECNET H network system Abbreviation for AnU series MELSECNET 10 network system and QnA Q4AR series Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QnPHCPU Abbreviation for Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU QnPRHCPU Abbreviation for Q12PRHCPU and Q 25PRHCPU modules ee ee modules 6OR AnUCPU Generic term for MELSEC A series A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 ASUCPU A4UCPU A2USCPU A2ZUSCPU S1 and AZUSHCPU S1 CPU modules Generic term for Q38RB main base units for the redundant power supply system B Generic term for QA1S65B and QA1S68B extension base units Q Generic term for Q61P Q63RP and Q64RP power supply modules for the redundant power supply system Tracking cable Abbreviation for QC10TR and QC30TR tracking cables B B B 60 P Product Components vent QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 MELSECNET H Network Module optical loop type QJ71LP21 25 QJ71LP21 25 MELSECNET H Network Module optical loop type BENE QJ71LP21S 25 QJ71LP21S 25 MELSECNET H Network Module optical loop type with external power supply function QJ71LP21G_ QJ71LP21G MELSECNET H Network Module optical loop type e QJ71LP21GE_ QJ71LP21GE MELSECNET H Network Module optical loop type 1 Qu71BR11 Q971BR11 MELSECNET H Network Module coaxial bus type 1 F type connector QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25 25 MELSECNET H Network Mod
128. LSECNET H JacPu Qu71 QJ72 QU71 2 LP21 n D 3 O A 1 Transfer the remote password 3 QJ71E71 checks the remote password to QJ71E71 when the system is powered on or it is reset GX Developer c Number of modules for that can be set to check remote passwords The table below shows the number of modules that can be set to check remote passwords Max number of modules Module name Max number of modules 7 re 7 in the system Ethemet module Serial communication module ooog 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q d Setting procedure of remote password GX Developer gt Remote Password Remote Password Setting screen Remote Password Details Setting screen 1 Setting screen Set a remote password Detailed setting is necessary Remote password settings for QU71E71 Password settings A Characters that can be used in password Password 4 characters Numbers 4 2 a z Special characters Password active module settings __Modelname _Staixv Condtig QJ71E71 0010 Necessary setting No setting Already set Clear Setting completion Cancel 2 Setting items Password valid module setting Set the module s top address 0000H to OFEOH GX Developer communication Connection for system port TCP IP Check the remote password valid port GX Developer communication port UDP IP HTTP port x1 Indicates the upper lower case
129. MELSEC Q isn Remote master station Remote O station QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21G QU71LP21GE QJ71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 QJ72LP25 25 QU72LP25G QJ72LP25GE 20 4 to 31 2 V Voltage Dc C E rr External screw Power Suitable crimp Supply terminal R1 25 3 3 Suitable cable size 0 3 a 1 25 5V DC internal current 0 55 A consumption Weight 0 11 kg 0 20 kg 1 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 2 On a multiplexed remote I O network one of 64 remote I O stations works as a multiplexed remote sub master station 3 The optical fiber cable A 2P Q differs in interstation distance between the L and H types Refer to Section 4 8 1 for details 4 Two slots are occupied Set the numeric value resulted from adding 10H to the I O No of the slot where a module mounted as the Starting I O No of the Network parameter The first empty 16 points can be set to 0 on the I O assignment tab screen within the Qn H Parameter screen Example Set 10H as the Starting I O No when the module is mounted on slot 0 Set OH as the Starting I O No when 0 has been set to slot 0 on the I O assignment tab screen 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 1 2 Coaxial cable system performance specifications Table 3 2 shows the performance of the coaxial bus system Table 3 2 Coaxial cable system performance spe
130. MELSEC Q 2 Parameter settings for remote I O station Set the following 1 functions as necessary PLC Parameters lt Section 5 1 1 1 PLC system settings 2 PLC RAS settings 3 Operational settings 4 O assignment 1 Intelligent function module parameter settings Set the following functions as necessary N t DE RT a a a a a a a gla HC PUP EPA AA O g 2 Network parameter settings i i 1 Ethernet 2 CC Link required Section 5 2 1 1 1 is Writing parameters to remote I O module i Resetting network module i To cable connection Section 4 6 1 If no parameters are written to the remote I O station operation is performed using the default settings See Section 5 2 1 2 Ifthe CPU module for the remote master station is reset or if set from STOP to RUN it also resets the remote I O station However the remote I O station can be reset when the following conditions are satisfied When the PLC parameter network parameter or remote password of a remote I O station is corrected and the corrected parameter is not effective because the remote I O station has been reset or due to other reasons e When a stop error has occurred Refer to section 8 3 2 Even if only one of the following settings is corrected all the parameters are written to the remote I O module PLC parameters intelligent function module parameters network para
131. MELSECNET H data communication can be performed with other stations having the same network number the same network as where the host is connected as well as with stations having other network numbers 1 Transient transmission function to a station on the same network 1R1 Network No 1 1R4 1R5 1MR 2 Transient transmission to stations on other networks routing function In this case the routing parameters must be set for the request source and relay stations When the source of the request is a remote I O station there is no need to set the routing parameters in the remote I O station of the request source 1 Request Request source destination 1R1 i 1R2 1R3 3M1 ans2 J l T E Ss Required Required Network No 3 zA Relay station Relay station gt rT P 1 1 1 Network No 2 Locations requiring routing parameters A remote I O station can only become a request source and request destination Do not set the relay station For details about routing refer to the Q corresponding MELSECNET H network system reference manual PLC to PLC network 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 1 1 Dedicated link instruction 1 Reading writing remote I O station intelligent function module buffer memory REMFR REMTO The following describes the REMFR REMTO instruction format and pr
132. Number of errors 3 Abort on the forward loop SWOOBC side AB IF coaxial bus abort AB IF 3 Timeout on the forward SWOOBD loop side TIME coaxial bus timeout TIME Receiving 2k bytes or 3 more on forward loop side DATA coaxial bus receiving 2k bytes or Accumulates and stores the number of DATA errors on the forward loop side for the optical loop or the number of DATA errors of the coaxial bus for the coaxial bus Other than 0 Number of errors 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained 3 To reset the SWOO0B8 to SW00C7 turn on the SBOO06 The number of times information stored in the SWOOB8 to SWO00C7 will not cause any problems if they are counted up gradually over a long period of time If they are counted up rapidly in a short period of time while monitoring with GX Developer etc the cable may be faulty App 23 App 23 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued Use permitted prohibited SN Control Normal Remote Remote I O Description i master station station j station station Optical Coal O x O x ates and stores the number of DPLL errors on the loop side for the optical loop or the number of DPLL errors of the coaxial bus for the coaxial bus Other than 0 Number of errors Accumulates and stores the number of UNDER errors on the reverse loop side Other than 0 Number of errors
133. O Accumulates and stores the number of CRC errors on the reverse loop side Other than 0 Number of errors Accumulates and stores the number of OVER errors on the reverse loop side Other than 0 Number of errors Accumulates and stores the number of Short frame errors on the reverse loop side Other than 0 Number of errors Short frame on the reverse loop side Accumulates and stores the number of AB IF errors on the reverse loop side Other than 0 Number of errors Abort on the reverse loop Accumulates and stores the number of TIME errors on the reverse loop side Other than 0 Number of errors Accumulates and stores the number of DATA errors on the reverse loop side Timeout on the reverse loop side TIME Other than 0 Number of errors Accumulates and stores the number of DPLL errors on the reverse loop side Other than 0 Number of errors Accumulates and stores the number of retries on the forward loop side for the optical loop or the number of retries of the coaxial bus for the coaxial bus O han 0 Number of errors A ates and stores the number of retries on the reverse Number of retries on the reverse loop side han 0 Number of errors ates and stores the number of detected line errors on d loop side han 0 Number of detected line errors ates and stores the number of detected line errors on e loop side han 0 Number of detected line errors ates and stores the number of
134. O network PLC selection time 2 Remote I O networks and PLC to PLC networks cannot be mixed on the same MELSECNET H network Always build separate networks 3 Only MELSECNET H network modules can be connected to a MELSECNET H remote I O network They cannot be mixed with MELSECNET 10 network modules AJ72LP25 A1SJ72QLP25 etc The following table shows the types of networks the CPU modules can be connected to Type of networks Network to be connected CPU module that can be used with CPU PLC to PLC network Remote I O network PLC to PLC network Remote I O network MELSECNET H O O acpu 10 Mbps MELSECNET 10 mode MESLECNET H mode EA MELSECNET H EA Mbps Extended mode AnUCPU MELSECNET 10 y QnACPU MELSECNET 10 Can be used x Cannot be used 1 2 Features The MELSECNET H remote I O network has the following features 1 Achievement of a high speed communication system a High speed data sending at a communication rate of 10 Mbps 25 Mbps is possible 25Mbps is available for only the optical loop type QU71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 and QJ72LP25 25 2 Large scale and flexible system configuration a The link device has a larger capacity 16384 points for the link relay LB and 16384 points for the link register LW See Section 2 1 3 Available device range settings b A maximum of 4096 I O points can be set for each remote I O station The link points between a remote master
135. O station gt gt gt 2 QCPU QJ71 QJ72 1 0 I O QJ72 1 0 1 0 5 LP21 3 LP25 3 LP25 n n n fa fa fa fe Oo fe a a a Optical fiber cable gt gt gt 2 QJ72 0 0 QJ72 0 I O QJ72 1 0 1 0 5 LP25 5 LP25 5 LP25 n n n fa fa fa je fe je a Station number 64 Station number 4 Station number 3 remote I O station remote I O station remote I O station 2 Coaxial cable bus system Up to 32 remote I O stations can be connected to a remote master station Always set the station number of the remote master station to 0 Station number 0 Station number 1 Station number 32 remote master station remote I O station remote I O station gt S QCPU QJ71 z BR11 fa je a Coaxial cable Terminator Terminator Sold separately Sold separately 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 1 2 Setting items Table 2 1 shows the setting items on the master module of the remote master station MR and the parameter setting items on GX Developer Table 2 1 Remote master station setting items Setting items Remote master station Mr Network module switch STATION NO Pr o Sectiong2a MODE CO Section4 22 Parameter setting on GX Developer MELSECNET H Ethernet module count setting MELSECNET H Network type Remote master station Section 5 1 1 Starting O No Section 5 4 2 Network no PY Section 5 1 2 Total stations Sec
136. OINT 9 ABORT SWOOBC SW00C4 Displays how many AB and IF errors have occurred lt Error Cause gt Isolation of the sending station faulty cable hardware failure noise etc lt Corrective Action gt See the following POINT TIMEOUT SWOOBD SWO00C5 Displays how many timeout errors have occurred lt Error Cause gt Data link monitoring time too short faulty cable noise etc lt Corrective Action gt See the following POINT Exceeding 2 kb SWOOBE SWO00C6 Display how many times messages exceeding 2k bytes were received lt Error Cause gt Faulty cable hardware failure noise etc lt Corrective Action gt See the following POINT DPLL ERROR SWOOBF SW00C7 Displays how many times the DPLL errors occurred lt Error Cause gt Faulty cable hardware failure noise etc lt Corrective Action gt See the following POINT The number of each error occurrence does not necessarily mean a problem unless the count value rises frequently during opeatoin If it rises frequently observe the following Check the power ON OFF status of the pertinent and other stations Check the condition of the cables and connectors Disconnection or 10 pey 12 x looseness of the connectors cable breakage cable length etc Perform the self loopback test internal self loopback test and hardware test Peform the station to station test forward reverse loop test Referring to the user s manual for hardwar
137. OL BUS ERR Stop CONTROL BUS ERR CONTROL Module No Stop BUS ERR Base No Stop SINGLE PS DOWN Base No Power supply No Continue SINGLE PS ERROR Base No Power supply No Continue UNIT VERIFY ERR BASE LAY ERROR SP UNIT LAY ERR Module No Base No Module No Stop k1 Continue At power ON At reset 7 At power ON At reset SP UNIT LAY ERR Module No 2 A remote I O station is reset by the following 1 Pressing the reset switch of the remote station At power ON At reset 7 2 Resetting the CPU module on the remote master station or turning it to RUN from STOP when the remote I O station is in the following status e The remote I O station has not been reset after modification of some remote I O station parameters e A stop error has occurred on the remote I O station 3 Function version is D or later 4 The first 5 digits of serial No is 08022 or greater 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 1403 1413 Error Contents and Cause e There was no response from the intelligent function module when the END instruction is executed An error is detected at the intelligent function module e The I O module intelligent function module is nearly removed completely removed or mounted during running An error is detected on the system bus e Self diagnosis error of the system bus e Self diagnos
138. R11 Il a d d The maximum number of mountable master modules per system is four The number of mounted modules exceeds the limit by one 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 4 By connecting to a remote I O station for access to other stations GX Developer can access stations in the other network system whether the relay stations in the multiple CPU system are controlled by the same or different CPUs Also GX Developer can access either the control CPU or non control CPU in the multiple CPU system a Accessible to remote I O station in other network GX Developer CPU CPU No 1 No 2 CPU No 1 is control CPU CPU No 1 is control CPU No 1 No 2 BR11 b Accessible to control CPU in other network GX Developer QJ71 QJ71 CPU No 1 is control CPU CPU CPU QJ71 No 1 No 2 BR11 d Accessible to other network even if relayed station is controlled by another control CPU CPU No 2 is control CPU No 1 No 2 BR11 CPU No 1 is control CPU 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 7 Checking Function Version and Serial No The following describes how to check the function version and serial No of the network module 1 Checking the rating plate on the side of the module The serial number of the module and function version number are
139. Reference ertian Rani aan hana Description Multiplexed ee fae pita remote sub master x2 station SEND Writes data to the target station network module of the target network No SEND Data RECV Reads the data sent by SEND to the CPU device x send O CPU Network module Network module CPU i Channel 1 Logical channel 1 Channel 1 i u Channel 2 4 Logical channel 2 Channel 2 es 1 HH senp H Logical channel 3 Channel 3 H RECV H O O f W Channel 4 f Logical channel 4 Channel 4 f ae l Channel 5 X f RECV O x l 1 Channel 6 Logical channel 6 Channel 6 l receive I Channel7 Logical channel 7 Channel 7 1 Channel 8 Logical channel 8 Channel 8 l Reads the CPU device data of the target station of the target network No in 16 bit units Network module READ x1 SREAD Writes data to the CPU device of the target station of the target network No in 16 bit units SWRITE can turn ON the device of the target station Network module Network module WRITE x1 SWRITE Performs remote RUN STOP or clock data read write to the other station CPU Network module Network module CPU Other l Channel 1 station 1 Channel 2 it i 1 REQ fiansiet O Channel 3 p O O 5 Ht treo gt Channel 4 4 STOP quest 1 Channel 5 iI i i u Channel6 iI i
140. SD13 Step No transition No SD14 Sequence step No L SD15 Sequence step No H 5 Contents of pattern data 1514 to 43 2 1 0 Bit number Error common 0 0 to 0 O sk gt k lk common gt P information L sFc block designation present Error information Not used 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 Switch cause Number Meaning Switch cause 0 automatic switch 1 manual switch Switch direction 0 standby system to control system 1 control system to standby system Tracking flag 7 Vacant Tracking flag contents Shows whether or not the tracking data is valid 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bitnumber 0 0 to Oj 0 ______ _ Invalid work data Not used invalid 0 valid 1 System data SFC active step information invalid 0 valid 1 Switching cause invalid 0 valid 1 4 Refer to REMARK App 35 App 35 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Applicable Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU Hei po TT e Individual information corresponding to error codes SD0 is stored here File name Drive name Example Sumber Meaning ABCDEFGH IJK SD16 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD17 42H
141. SWO01E0 480 SWO01E1 Network type 481 W SWO1E2 consistency check 482 500 SWO1F5 501 Redundant system SwotFe status 1 502 SWO01F7 503 2 SWO1F8 504 Tesi Redundant system tatus 2 swotra Sats 2 506 SWO01FB 507 508 SW01FD 509 Redundant system SWO1FE status 3 510 SWO01FF 511 Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued MELSEC Q Use permitted prohibited Control Description station Optical Optical SW01E2 SW01E3 Indicates whether there is a mismatch between the network types of the control station and normal stations on the network When the control station is in the MELSECNET H Extended mode 0 Set to the MELSECNET H Extended mode Including stations of station Nos greater than the maximum reserved stations and communication error stations 1 Set to the MELSECNET H mode or MELSECNET 10 mode When the control station is in the MELSECNET H mode or MELSECNET 10 mode 0 Set to the MELSECNET H mode or MELSECNET 10 mode Including stations of station Nos greater than the maximum reserved stations and communication error stations 1 Set to the MELSECNET H Extended mode b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b2 b1 sworeo ve a e efs a e eT savei sa forfal efa efe fetr 1 to 64 in the table indicate the station Nos Indicates the operation mode of each station s CPU 0 Backup mode including stations exceeding the maximum station number and res
142. T C and ST can be set in 16 point units and SW LW W D R and ZR can be set in one point units List of devices for which the refresh combination transfer can be executed Gants Devices for which transfer is allowed Setting item Link side device PLC side device SB transfer SW transfer LX LY LB LW Y M L T B C ST D W R ZR 1 Transfer 64 LX LY LB LW X Y M L T B C ST D W R ZR 1 x1 C T or ST cannot be selected as the refresh destination of LX 5 21 5 21 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 How to set the refresh parameters a Automatic setting with the Default button The refresh parameters can be set as follows based on the number of installed modules and the installation locations using the Default button MELSEC Q Installation 1 f f location CPU i Module1 Module2 Module3 Module 4 Number i l i of installation i i i LB LW i LB LW i i o i i i i i i i 1 i 1 i 1 i i 1 i i to 8192 ar to points F i i 1 1 card i i i I i i i i l i 1 i 1 i 1 i I i i i i i I 1 1FFF l 1FFF t 1 i I I is i i i I i i i i l t if 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i i i I I I l I i i 1 i 1 ij 1 i i 1 i 1 i 1 i i i i i i I l ab I 2 cards i I 1 i f i i 1 1 i 1 i 1 i i i 1 y 1 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 LB LW LB LW LB LW LB
143. TION eeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeteeteeeteetieeteetieeteeteee 3 9 1 Communicating with input output module eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeecaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeens 3 9 2 Communicating with intelligent function MOCUIE ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeas 3 10 32 2 RASNU ONE a istics ie dace eh Ben se nadie sek haha E da tintasa hedndaeabe re disdain tera eed ead iets 3 15 1 Output reset function for COMMUNICATION errors cee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeas 3 15 2 Automatic return FUNCTION cee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeseesieeeaeesas 3 15 3 Loopback function Optical loop SyStOM 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeaeeeas 3 16 4 Station detach function Coaxial DUS SYStOMS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeseaeeeaeenreeas 3 18 5 Transient transmission enabled even at CPU module CFr Ol eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeeaeeateeateas 3 19 6 Checking the transient transmission abnormal direction time ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeateas 3 20 7 Diagnostic FUNCTIONS ce ana a a AA E AAAA AE E NAA AE ARA AARE 3 21 8 Redundant power supply on a remote I O station oo eee eeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeatens 3 22 9 Online module change in a remote I O station oo ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaee
144. W PLC side X Y M L T B C ST D W R ZR However if the link side is LX any of C T and ST cannot be selected on the CPU side Set the values for Points Start End in 16 point units Default button Select this button to automatically assign the default link devices according to the number of installed cards button Select this button to check if there are any duplicate parameter data settings button Click this button to return to the network setting screen after completing the data settings Random cyclic is for future use An error will not occur even if it is selected but no processing will be performed 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q Either of the following settings must be made to use the entire device range 16k points of LB LW 1 Change the number of B W device points Refer to the following example 2 Make the refresh parameter settings so that B W and other devices will be assigned as the refresh destination devices of LB LW Refer to Section 5 1 5 Example To change Device settings of PLC parameters in order to use all 16k points of the LB and LW device range Note the following points when assigning device points 1 The total number of device points is 29k words for the Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25H Q12PH Q25PH Q12PRH Q25PRH CPU and 16 4k words for the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU 2 The total number of bit devices must be 64k bits In the case of Q25HCPU Default After change 8K 8K 8K
145. W provide the information about the entire network Remote master station CPU operation status ee status of each station moderate or major SB0080H SWo00801 to 834 Operation status of each station minor error 1 SB0088H SW0088 to 8BH Cyclic transmission status of each station SB0074u to 76H SW0074 to 77H Link scan communication mode SBO06SH Swv00e ek SBO0069H SWOO6Bu to 6DH SB00544 to 56H Teer A SB0058H Setting information of the network SB0064u SW00544 to 68H SBO0068 to 6BH Running information of the network SB0070H SW0070h to 73H SBO0090H to 92H Line status SBO0095x to 96H SW0090 to 9FH 1 SBO099H to 9AH x1 The minor moderate and major error levels indicate the following errors 1 Minor error error under which operation is continued I O verification error and so on 2 Moderate error error under which operation is stopped parameter error WDT error and so on 3 Major error error under which operation is stopped hardware error and so on 6 16 6 16 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS When applying the program examples introduced in this chapter to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Chapter 3 Basic Cyclic transmission function Communicating with input output module s sect tte Section 3 2 1 1 functions Periodic communication L Commun
146. X Developer or GOT via a remote I O station e When accessing a remote I O station from an intelligent function module or when accessing other station from an intelligent function module via a remote I O station e When accessing a remote I O station from a CPU module 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 6 Transmission delay time formula The transmission delay time is calculated based on the following system design and conditions System design conditions 1 CPU module QO6HCPU 2 Total number of remote I O stations 8 3 Number of link devices LX LY 1024 points LB LW 0 point SB SW 512 points Remote master station CPU module scan time 1 ms Communication speed 10 Mbps File register not used Transient transmission not used 0 NOOO A Remote master station mounts the network module to the main base unit All remote I O stations only use the input output module The link device per each remote I O station is LX LY 128 points lt Constants when a network module is mounted to the main base unit gt peu ee ey cary x 10 x 107 Ta cu os os E rAr RA QnPRHCPU a Link refresh time am am KM1 KM2 x LB LX LY SB LW x 16 SW x 16 16 aE 0 13 0 41x 10 x 0 1024 1024 512 0 x 16 512 x 16 116 0 0 41 ms gt b Link scan time LS LS KB 0 45 x total number of remote I O stations LX LY LB LW x 16 8 x 0 001
147. a LB LW LX LY of the network link module to the devices X Y M L T B C ST D W R ZR of the CPU module for operation of the sequence programs By eliminating the network refresh of those link devices that are not used by the sequence programs the scan time can also be reduced Because it is not necessary to transfer the link devices to different devices with the sequence programs the number of program steps is reduced and easy to understand programs can be created Note that there are no default settings for LX LY points in the refresh parameters A CPU that does not have the number of points set cannot input and output network link device LX LY Refresh parameters Refresh parameter setting screen Transient transmission error history status Overwrite C Hold Link side Dev name Points Stat End __ Dev name Points Stat End TrensferSB s8 512 ono FF SBT sif 000 Transfer SW Randomeyclc LB TTT Ly S See 0000 Transe w R 4096 0000 OFFF w 4036 0000 ransfer3 x E 2048 0000 OFFI x 2048 0000 tansferd ly 2048 0000 O7F iv v 2048 000 transfers wf TT Transfers Sw CT CCT The assignment status of the above refresh parameters can be checked with the assignment image diagram The assignment image diagram displays the device assignment status of the CPU module as well as between the MELSECNET H modules module 1 to 4 CPU module Master module 1 M
148. aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC System Q Programmable Logic Controllers Reference Manual QJ71LP21 _ QJ72LP25 _ _ QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15 MELSECNET H Network System Aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Version J e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the CPU module user s manual In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION 7 Nn A Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions D DANGER resulting in death or severe injury A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions L resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage f N A aa a a r a A Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please store this manual in a safe place and make it accessible when required Always forward it to the end user Design Precautions lt DANGER e When the network develops a communication erro
149. ach station extension e Search status of local station error e Each station PLC operation mode status e Each station paring status e Each station PLC system status e Each station network type status Network monitor details Network information e Network type Module No e Network No Group No Station No Remote master station information e Assign remote master station Present remote master station e Transmission information e Remote sub master station communication e LX LY alocations Data link information Total number of linked stations To next page e Station of maximum normal transmission Station of maximum data link e Transmission status e Reason for transmission Interruption e Reason for transmission stop Remote I O master station number block 1 block 2 2 When PLC to PLC network is diagnosed this information is effective 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q From previous page Status of self e Parameter settings Reserved station setting e Transmission mode Duplex transmission setting Duplex transmission status Error history monitor Network information e Network Type Module No e Network No Group No Station No Loop switching Number of occurrences Transient transmission Number of occurrences Forward loop Retry e Line trouble Communication error UNDER CRC OVER etc
150. alue Iten Y Item yi Item Value RUN 0001 STX10 0000 _J NETNO 0001 PC 0000 ING 0001 STx1 0000 GRPNO 0000 REMOTE 0001 5 ING 0000 MODE 0000 STNO 007D 2 b DUAL 0000 D LINK 0001 MODE 0000 SW E 0000 T PASS 0001 BAUD 0000 M S E 0000 CONFIG 0001 PRM E 0000 CRC 0000 CRC 0000 OVER 0000 OVER 0000 AB IF 0000 ap IF 0000 TIME 0000 Time 0000 DATA 0000 DATA 0000 UNDER 0000 juNpER 0000 LOOP 0000 LOOP 0000 2 a Stop monitor Close The following explains each of these items 1 H W LED information This shows the LED information on the master module The value for each item is displayed as 0001 on 0000 off MNG Remote master station set or multiplexed remote master station performing master operation on S MNG Multiplexed remote master station performing master operation on D LINK In data link on T PASS Baton pass participation on CRC Error during code check of receiving data on 1 a Forward loop 1 b Reverse loop OVER Error when receive data processing has been delayed on 1 a Forward loop 1 b Reverse loop Error when 1 over specification is continuously received or when the received data length is short 1 a Forward loop 1 b Reverse loop Error when data link monitor timer has operated on 1 a Forward loop 1 b Reverse loop DATA Error when error data of 2k byte or more has been received on n 1 a Forward loop 1 b Reverse loop UNDER Error internal processing of send data is
151. ame 2 SW0095 149 SW0096 Reverse loop status of 150 each station SW0097 151 SW0098 152 Loopback station forward loop side Loopback station reverse loop side 2 SW009C 156 Swo009D Loop usage status of 157 each station SWO009E 158 SWO009F 159 cmos tet 168 y requesting side SWOO0AQ Online test result requesting side Description Stores the reverse loop status of each station including the host 0 Normal including the stations with the maximum station number and smaller numbers as well as reserved stations 1 Abnormal Disconnected station remains in the status when it was disconnected b15 b14 b13 b12 to b0 16 15 14 13 to 5 4 3 2 1 fafo a fo a ao e e Psat s o oles Ca Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers b4 b3 b2 b1 SW0095 Swo0g6 Stores the number of stations executing the loopback on the forward loop side Range 1 to 64 Stores the number of stations executing the loopback on the reverse loop side Range 1 to 64 Stores the loop usage status during transmission at each station separately for each of the forward and reverse loops 0 Using the forward loop side including the stations with the maximum station number and smaller numbers as well as reserved stations 1 Using the reverse loop side b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b3 b2 bi bO swe ro s pepe es ee eT swo azor fofa e 2 e EE EEE fefee
152. an E hdceuated ected ddcetateslacuad tig Mea dbateadead cee 8 8 8 14 EMror MIStOPYyIMONMO heu i Ceszeesaceungts cesiciacenscdita R A aa ae 8 11 3 2 Troupleshootng aaan n E ana tea idea R E 8 14 8 2 1 Items to be Checked first 0 2 0 cecccecceecceecceeceeeeetecceeceteceneaeneceesaenecenecetecensaeteaeeeaeteceeeaeteceneaeteceteaeteattes 8 20 8 2 2 When data link cannot be executed on the entire system eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeaeeeaeeeteeas 8 20 8 2 3 When data link is disabled because of reset or power off of each station cceeceeeeeeees 8 21 8 2 4 When a specific station s data link cannot be executed ceccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesneeetaes 8 21 8 2 5 When the transmission and reception data are ADNOrMAl ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeetetenaees 8 22 8 2 6 When the dedicated link instruction is not Completed ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteaeetseeeeneeetaes 8 22 8 2 7 When a multiplexed remote I O network for the redundant system does not operate normally 8 23 8 2 8 When checking for reversely inserted fiber optic cables online eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteenteetteeneas 8 24 3 3 Error Codes oiriin aiie REE AET adidas nia len een 8 26 8 3 1 MELSECNET H error Code list cecceecceecceecereceeeccesceeeceeaensaenseesseensaenseensaesseesnaeseesneesneeeeeeaeeaes 8 26 8 3 2 Error codes corresponding to CPU module detected on remote I O station ec
153. and a sub master station DSM on the multiplexed remote I O network allows the sub master station to take over the control of remote I O stations R in case of the master station s failure The QnPHCPU should be used for the multiplexed remote master station and sub master station By making a parameter setting the multiplexed remote sub master station can continue the control of the remote I O stations even if the master station has recovered to normal and rejoined to the system Setting for the recovered master station to control the remote I O stations is also available Refer to Section 7 10 Multiplex Remote Master Function QNPHCPU Only Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station DMr sub master station DSMr Remote I O station R Remote I O station R Remote I O station R 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q g The redundant system uses the multiplex remote master function to control I O modules and intelligent function modules The QNPRHCPU should be used in the redundant system If the multiplexed master station control system fails the multiplex remote master function will switch the master station from control system to standby system At this time the multiplexed remote sub master station is switched from standby to control continuing the remote I O control The sub master station control system that is controlling the remote I O stations will keep its control even if the master station stand
154. andby station The multiplexed remote sub master station continues the control of the remote I O stations Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station sub master station ej il Master operation Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Return of multiplexed remote master station to normal Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station sub master station Sub master A Master operation Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station MELSEC Q 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c Switching of multiplexed remote master station operation When the multiplexed remote master station has returned to system it can be switched to master operation in the following procedure 1 The multiplexed remote sub master confirms that the multiplexed remote master station has returned to the system by checking the link special relay SB status 2 The multiplexed remote sub master station switches from master operation to sub master operation by operating the link special relay SB 3 The multiplexed remote master station switches to master operation when the multiplexed remote sub master station switches to sub master operation Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station sub master station a Sub master operation F E Master operation Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Jb SB14 of multiplexe
155. another station executes the SEND instruction to the target station s channel lt When this error occurs by the RECV instruction gt When another station is executing the SEND instruction increase the value of the arrival monitoring time Alternatively start the RECV instruction by turning the RECV instruction Arrival monitoring timeout execution request flag to ON lt When this error occurs in other cases gt Increase the value of the arrival monitoring time Confirm the operation status of the target station the network status and the relay station status in the case of sending to other network Increase the arrival monitoring time Re execute the REMFR REMTO instruction Confirm the operation status of the target station the network status and the relay station status in the case of sending to other network Resend count out Review the target network number and target station No in the request control data of send receive instructions Set the channel numbers of the host station and of the target station in the Channel number setting out of range request control data of send receive instructions within a range between 1 and 64 Target station specification error Specify the target station number in the request control data of send receive host station specification instructions to other than the number of host station F7C5 SEND instruction target station error When the execution abnormal completion type in the request contr
156. ansmission Suspend Data link Host cates stopped eevee No area is assigned for the host s B W transmission Baton Pass Parameter Halt An error is identified in the host s parameters The common parameters have not been received Station numbers are duplicated or the cable is not connected Disconnecting Link Error The cable is not connected In Test The online offline test is being executed Resetting Hardware fault Reason for transmission interruption SW0048 Displays the causes why the host cannot communicate transient transmission For details on actions to take see Section 8 3 Error Codes Baton Pass No area Baton Pass No Receive Disconnecting No Baton Shift Control Station Error occurred Error code F104 F106 Baton disappearance Error occurred Error code F107 Baton repetition Error occurred Error code F108 Same Station Present Error occurred Error code F10B Control Station repetition Error occurred Error code F10C Reception retry error Error occurred Error code F10E Error code Error occurred See the displayed error code Indication Description Action Normal Communications being executed normally 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 Reason for transmission stop SW0049 Displays the causes why the host s data linking cyclic transmission was disabled Indication Description Normal Communications being executed normally Cyclic transmission to all statio
157. arameters of the MELSECNET 10 remote I O network master module is set by the remote I O module PLC parameters on the MELSECNET H remote I O network When changing the intelligent function modules mounted to the remote I O station there is a need to make switch settings using the remote I O station PLC parameters For details refer to the user s manual for the intelligent function module being used App e App 1 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 5 Correcting the sequence program There is no need to change sequence programs such as the interlock program that used link special relays and link special resistors and the remote access program that used data link commands However the data link instructions ZNFR ZNTO instructions used for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module of the remote I O station and the data link instructions ZNRD ZNWR instructions used for reading writing of the remote station word device cannot be used on the MELSECNET H remote I O network Accordingly on the MELSECNET H rewrite the ZNFR ZNTO instructions to REMFR REMTO instructions and the ZNRD ZNWR instructions to READ WRITE instructions e The link special relays and link special register operations used in the MELSECNET 10 remote I O network are the same in the MELSECNET H network 6 Distance between stations using optical fiber cable When the remote I O network speed is changed to 25 Mbps the distance between stations con
158. are no stations having data link error power off MELSECNET H module failure 1 Checking procedure Follow the procedure given below to check for incorrect fiber optic cable connection IN IN OUT OUT during online Check the loopback information SW90 of the host station No Other than 0 Are the loops normal Is the SW90 value 0 Conduct a loop test to identify the faulty portion and change the cable Check the loop using status of each station SW9C to SW9F 1 The bit of only one station is ON or OFF lt Cause gt The cable of the station whose bit is ON is incorrectly connected IN IN OUT OUT lt Corrective action gt Check the cable connection status of the station whose bit is ON Are all bits of SW9C to SWOF OFF or ON 2 The bits of multiple stations are ON or OFF lt Cause gt The cables of the stations whose bits are ON are incorrectly connected IN IN OUT OUT lt Corrective action gt Check the cable connection status of the stations whose bits are ON The cables are connected normally to all stations 3 The bits of all stations except for the host station are ON or OFF lt Cause gt The cable of the host station is incorrectly connected End IN IN OUT OUT lt Corrective action gt Check the cable connection status of the host station 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Example of checking SWOO09C to SW009F a When cables are con
159. art I O number in the common parameters is different from a hardware fault Contact your local that of the actually mounted module y are f Mitsubishi representative e The station type of the CC Link module count setting parameters is 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Common Individual LeDstatus Status CPU Error Code Diagnostic Error Message Information Information Operation Sy SDO Timing SD5 to SD15 SD16 to SD26 Statuses At power ON 3301 SP PARA ERROR File name Parameter No Stop A cae rese 3400 REMOTE PASS Ge ae Sio At power ON ERR j At reset 3401 REMOTE PASS Si ea Sio At power ON ERR j At reset 2 A remote I O station is reset by the following 1 Pressing the reset switch of the remote station 2 Resetting the CPU module on the remote master station or turning it to RUN from STOP when the remote I O station is in the following status e The remote I O station has not been reset after modification of some remote I O station parameters e A stop error has occurred on the remote I O station 3 Function version is D or later 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action The intelligent function module s refresh parameter setting is outside 3301 Check the parameter setting the available range 3400 The head I O number of the target module in the remote password Change the head I O number of the target file is set to ot
160. ast data are retained 6 2 6 2 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Use permitted prohibited Remote vite Control Normal Remote I O Name Description p S master station station station station Optical Optical Optical Optical Stores the cyclic transmission status of each station including the host 4 0 Executing cyclic transmission including the station with the swo074 maximum station number and smaller number as well as 116 reserved stations SW0075 Cyclic transmission 1 Cyclic transmission not executed 117 status of each b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b3 b2 b1 O O O O O O O O W0076 station SW0074 16 15 14 13 to 5 4 ey swoo7s 1 pe swooze Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Availability column Optical optical loop Coaxial coaxial bus O Available X Not available 1 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 6 1 2 Program example Interlocks should be applied to the programs according to the link status of the host and other stations The following example shows an interlock in the communication program that uses the link status of the host SB47 SB49 and the link status of station number 2 bit 1 of SW70 and bit 1 of SW74 Example spa H K 10 J SB47 Host baton pass status SB4g H KL 11 J SB49 Host data link status SW70 1 H K 12
161. aster module 2 Ear RZZZXXZZXZXZ EA r O Bixercnsisesies 0 0 Not ibl R226822 ot possible 16te04tsts00sta s Aa 2905292600229090 Sesecesecaconecacenes i 2926092909290909 Duplicate to R888388 to EXE XKKS RSE 202602820262200 R925200 S00 PX RRR PRRRRER KI PS23922 to 5 F seooatatetonntetetenate 5FF 3FFF 3FFF Using the assignment image diagram assignment errors and duplicate settings between the modules can also be checked It is a convenient tool to view the assignment status when setting or changing the network refresh parameters RRL LS 2S SORE K KS SSI 5 18 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS Assignment image MELSEC Q Refresh parameter setting screen Device PLC side X DevicefLink side LX v Display w4 H magnification E Duplication of device I Refresh device Dev source of transfer between links Devftarget of transfer between links QO06H Module 1 Module 2 0000 0000 0800 L 0800 1000 1000 1800 1800 1FFO 1FF0 This check function only checks MELSECNET H network parameters 1 Assignment method Select the device range input method from either Points Start or Start End Default Start End Transient transmission error history status Select whether to overwrite or hold the error history e Default Overwrite Transfer settings on the Link side and the PLC side Select the device names from the following Link side LX LY LB L
162. ation 0 290 f 10 12 Multiplexed remote sub master station 20 o 12 10 Using the above values the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station can confirm the starting addresses of the LB LW devices sent received by themselves 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS NO M e Program example For multiplexed remote master station Host baton pass status H K10 SB49 H K10 H qi Host data link status B20 TO Ti MC NO MO Module status SB75 for multi R sub master zmo a AC spe H Kio Jf lt T2 R sub master cyclic o transmission go MC Ni Mi M1 400 MOVP wice z0 Send LB device No MOVP SW1CD zi Receive LB device No WOVP SWICE 2 Send LW device No MOVP SW1CF 23 Receive LW device No B1C8 Buov K4M1000 K4B0Z0 K1 Relative address valid invalid BMOV K4B0Z1 K4M2000 Ki BMOV D1000 WoZ2 K10 Bmov WOZ3 D2000 K10 NCR Ni MELSEC Q gt Data transfer 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q SB77 J wc N2 m2 R master cyclic trans control N2 Continuation processing program used when multiplexed remote master station fails e MI ee R 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S 53 1 1 1 1 1
163. ation aborted App 14 App 14 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued ae Control PETOLE Remote I O Description master station x station station Optical Optical Coaxial Optical Optical Stores the station that stopped the host data linking Valid when the SW0049 is 1 b15 b14 to b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 bO T T Data linking stop request station 0 Host 1 to 64 Station number 0 Station number designated 1 All stations designated b0 to b6 store 7D if a data link stop request is received from the remote master station multiplexed remote master station Indicates the CPU status of the host 0 Normal Other thanO Abnormal For the error codes see Section 8 3 or the Error Code chapter of QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection he result of the data linking start 0 Normal Other than 0 Abnormal see the error codes in Section 8 3 he result of the data linking stop 0 Normal Other than 0 Abnormal see the error codes in Section 8 3 a he result of the data linking start inking start status 0 Normal Other than 0 Abnormal see the error codes in Section 8 3 he result of the data linking stop 0 Normal Other than 0 Abnormal see the error codes in Section 8 3 the PLC to PLC network ores the parameter information When the SB0054 and SB0055 are off b15 b14 to b2 b1 bO 0 to 0 i L MELSECNET H Type 0 Not designa
164. ation s CPU module and network module with GX Developer s network diagnostics Check the network module and data link cable with the self loopback test and station to station test of the offline tests Check whether data linking is stopped for all stations Are the network parameters set for the remote Check whether the network parameters from the remote master station s CPU module master station are set Arethe switch settings of the remote master Check the station number setting switch and mode setting switch station s network module correct Are the switches of the network modules on all Make sure that the mode setting switches of the network modules on all stations are in stations set in the correct position the same position A aes on Set the link monitoring time to the maximum value and check whether or not data Is the link monitoring time set to a sufficient value linking can be performed P P Check the on off status of the LEDs of the network modules of the remote ma Did the remote master station go down station 20 th ster 8 8 20 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 2 3 When data link is disabled because of reset or power off of each station Check item Checking procedure Check the wiring status with GX Developer s network diagnostic loop test Is the cable wired properly See Section 4 10 1 Are he tables disconnected Check the status of each station to see whether the entire system is faulty or a specifi
165. ay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user Sequence programs or test operations from peripheral devices S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt Indicated only for registers set by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error occurs Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc e Indicates corresponding special register in ACPU D9 _ _ _ Change and notation when there has been a change in contents e Items indicated as New have been newly added for QnACPU e Indicates the applicable CPU type name Rem Can be applied to all CPU types and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Can be applied to all types of CPU QCPU Can be applied to Q series CPU Set by When set Corresponding ACPU m OOL QnA Can be applied to QnA series and Q2ASCPU series Remote Can be applied to the MELSECNET H remote I O modules Each CPU type name Can be applied only to the specific CPU e g QAARCPU Q3ACPU For details on the following items see these manuals CPU QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals e Networks Q corresponding
166. ay stop Identify the faulty network module in the following method 1 Check the LED indications RUN LED off ERR LED on of all network modules for a faulty station 2 Power off all stations and power them on in order starting from the master station At that time check up to which station the network operates properly Change the network module where the fault has been detected and confirm that the network is restored to normal 4 Station detach function coaxial bus system In the coaxial bus system even if the power to a connected station is turned off the data link continues between other stations which are still able to perform data communication a When normal Remote I O Remote I O Remote I O station station station station No 1 station No 2 station No 3 Terminal resistor Terminal resistor b When abnormal The data link continues excluding the station that is down Remote I O station station No 1 Remote master station station No 0 Remote I O station station No 3 When a cable disconnection occurs the data link cannot be performed because there will be no terminal resistors Remote Remote I O Remote I O Remote I O master station station station station station No 0 station No 1 station No 2 station No 3 Cable disconnection In addition even if the cable is normal the data link cannot be performed if a terminal resis
167. baton The baton SW70 to 73 station pass is being pass is Each bit corresponds to the status of each station executed stopped Shows the cyclic transmission status of all stations i Occurrence including the host However it only shows the All stations SB74 i i of abnormal status for the number of stations set with normal station parameters Shows the cyclic transmission status of each station SW74 to 77 i Normal Abnormal Each bit corresponds to the status of each station 3 3 2 Transmission delay time The names of items 1 2 on the following pages indicate those between the following stations R t ratati Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Cn emote Masich Slaton master station sub master station Cet 0 Remote 1 O station Remote I O station Item Name Remote master station lt remote I O station Multiplexed remote master station lt multiplexed remote sub master station 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Remote master station gt remote I O station a Cyclic transmission X Y W periodic communication Transmission delay time of X Y W is the sum of the following e Remote master station scan time Except for the link refreshing time e Remote master station link refresh time e Link scan time e Remote I O station I O refresh X Y or automatic refresh W Calculate the sum as shown below Note that for X Y communication time it is necessary to add the I O module response delay time to
168. be replaced online are limited and replacement procedures are determined for each module For details refer to the section of online module replacement in this manual Do not mount remove the module onto from base unit more than 50 times IEC61131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector Do not touch the terminals while the power is on This may cause breakdowns malfunctions injuries or fire Switch off all phases of the externally supplied power used in the system when cleaning the module or retightening the terminal or module mounting screws Failure to completely shut off all phases of the external power supply may cause module breakdowns and malfunctions If the screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off If the screws are tightened excessively it may damage the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off Before handling the module always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from the human body Failure to do so can cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions A CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste REVISIONS x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Oct 2000 SH NA 080124 A First printing May 2001 SH NA 080
169. ber setting switch was changed during operation 2 ee L ERR Red on A communication error occurred one of the following communication errors has occurred CRC Error generated by an abnormal cable noise etc OVER This error occurs when the next data is received before the last receive data is loaded into the module and the data is overwritten It is caused by a hardware error in the receive area of the network module i This error occurs when more than the specified number of bits are set to 1 among the receive data in the frame or when the receive data is shorter than the specified data length This error occurs when a baton pass was not handed to the host within the monitoring time This error is caused when abnormal code data is received This error occurs when the internal processing of the send data was not executed at a fixed interval This error occurs when the forward or reverse loop line is faulty and the power to the adjacent station which sends data to the host station is turned OFF or the cable connector is faulty lt Corrective action gt Check the cables and connectors detached or loosened connectors wrong IN OUT connections broken or damaged cables improper cable routing etc For more details see the Network Diagnostics Section 8 1 EXT PW Greenon_ External power being supplied oof External power not supplied 1 On a multiplexed remote I O network the LED of the sub
170. by system has returned to normal status Refer to Section 7 11 Multiplex Remote Master Function for Redundant System QnPRHCPU Only Multiplexed remote master station DMr Multiplexed remote sub master station DSMr Control system Standby system Standby system Control system Tracking cable Remote I O station R Remote I O station R Remote I O station R h A maximum of 7 extension base units can be connected to the remote I O module eight base units including the main base unit allowing the installation of up to 64 modules The maximum overall length of extension cables is 13 2m ensuring a flexible layout of extension base units 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 3 Providing versatile communication service a Reading and writing of data for an intelligent function module that has been mounted to a remote I O station can be easily performed There are four methods available for reading and writing 1 Use GX Configurator to make the initial settings and automatic refresh settings in the intelligent function module parameters and write them into the remote I O module in the remote I O station By refreshing the intelligent function module data to the link register W of the remote I O module in the auto refresh settings the remote master station can read write refreshed data by cyclic transmission Remote master station Remote I O station Intelligent function module QCPU Master module
171. c station is faulty and locate the faulty area Are the switches of the network modules on all Make sure that the mode setting switches of the network modules on all stations are in stations set in the correct position the same position Set the link monitoring time to the maximum value and check whether or not data Is the setting of the link monitoring time sufficient linking is possible If the L ERR LED of a normal station is lit check the TIME error with the GX Developer s network diagnostics Do not reset stations which are adjacent each other in a light loop system adjacent stations on the wire simultaneously resetting by the reset switch of the remote I O station or resetting by the key switches of the PLC CPUs of the remote master station and remote sub master station Otherwise data link may not be able to be established If initialization and so on is necessary on adjacent stations simultaneously turn off and on the power supply 8 2 4 When a specific station s data link cannot be executed Check item Checking procedure Perform line monitoring of the network diagnostics of GX Developer check for any abnormally communicating station and check the loop status Also check whether or Monitor the transmission status of each station not data linking is stopped In case of an optical loop system check the line condition and transmission status of each station as well using the loop test of GX Developer s network diagno
172. c transmission made by sub control station when control station fails On Cyclic transmission not made by sub control station when control station becomes faulty On remote I O network Indicates the status of designating cyclic transmission when the multiplexed remote master station fails Off Cyclic transmission made by multiplexed remote sub master station when multiplexed remote master station fails multiplexed remote I O network On Cyclic transmission not made when remote master station fails remote I O network Indicates whether or not there are any parameter settings for the low speed cyclic transmission Off No settings On Settings exist Indicates the parameter type of the control station Off MELSECNET 10 mode MELSECNET H mode On MELSECNET H Extended mode Indicates the I O master station setting Common parameter setting of block 1 Valid when SB0049 is OFF Off No setting On Setting exists Station No is stored in SWO05C Indicates the I O master station setting Common parameter setting of block 2 Valid when SB0049 is OFF Off No setting On Setting exists Station No is stored in SW005D Indicates whether or not the station is reserved Valid when the SB0049 is off Off No reserved station On Reserved station exists Turns off when the SW0064 to SW0067 are all 0 Indicates the link scan mode status of supplemental settings of the common parameters Valid when the SB0049 is off Off
173. can i Link scan Remote master station 1 Remote 1 O station Stores the number of link scans in the send interval of the low speed cyclic transmission Low speed cyclic scan Low speed cyclic x send request time gt A DE SEA ERR 6 Link scan HHH H Low speed cyclic Send interval transmission Stores the baton pass status of each station Including the host lt Online gt 0 Normal including the stations with the maximum station number and smaller numbers as well as reserved stations 1 Abnormal lt Offline test gt 1 12y 0 Normal swo071 1 Abnormal including the stations with the maximum station 113 Baton pass status of each number and smaller numbers as well as reserved stations station SW0072 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b2 b1 b3 bo Wi swovo 16 15 14 13 5 4 3 2 1 115 32 31 30 29 te 21 20 19 18 17 48 47 46 45 to 37 36 35 34 3s 64 63 62 61 to 53 82 51 50 49 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 17 App 17 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued ae Control RETO Remote I O Description z master station y station station Optical Optical Coaxial Optical Optical Stores the cyclic transmission stat
174. cards are installed Mounting position 1st card 2nd card 3rd card 4th card OHto1FFH 200Hto3FFH 400HtoSFFH 600H to 7FFH OHto1FFH 200Hto3FFH 400Hto5FFH 600H to 7FFH 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q List of Interlock Devices Use permitted prohibited Remote Noe Control Normal Remote I O Name Description i master station station station station Optical Optical Optical Optical SB0020 Indicates the network module status 32 Module status Off Normal On Abnormal When PLC to PLC network Indicates the station type set with the parameter of the host s network module Off Normal station On Control station SB0044 Station setting When remote I O network 68 host Indicates the station type set with the parameter of the host s network module Off Remote I O station or multiplexed remote sub master station On Remote master station or multiplexed remote master station Indicates the host s baton pass status transient transmission SB0047 Baton pass status enabled 71 Off Normal On Abnormal When PLC to PLC network Control station Indicates the host s status Off Normal station 4 On Control station SB0044 is on SB0048 Sub control station SB0044 is off 72 When remote I O network Remote master Indicate the host status station status host Off Remote I O station On Remote master station Indicates the host s data link operation status Off Normal On Abnormal Set after refreshing completes Indica
175. cations SI Multi particulate glass H PCF Plastic clad distance Clad diameter 220 um 250 u m Broad band H PCF Plastic clad 1km 1km 5 dB km 200 u m 250 um QSI Quartz glass 1km 1km 5 5 dB km 185 um 230 u m QI 50 125 Quartz glass 2 km Must not be used 3 dB km 50 um 125 um QI 62 5 125 Quartz glass 2km Must not be used 3 dB km 62 5 um 125 um Primary membrane 250nm om Applicable connector F06 F08 or equivalent JIS C5975 5977 conformance Prepare the following types of optical cables A type Cable for connection inside control panel B type Cable for connections between outside control panels C type Cable for outdoor connections D type Cable for outdoor connections that have been reinforced There are special cables available for moveable applications and resistance to heat Contact your Mitsubishi System Service for details 1 Cable loss of GI 62 5 125 optical fiber cable Conversion cable 1m 1 QJ71LP21GE 5 5 dB or less Conversion cable 1m QJ72LP25GE daptor Adaptor o Be j ee Nee j cleo zy Connection loss 1 dB max Connection loss 1 dB max reer SD out Total cable loss 7 5 dB or less Optical module x1 Conversion cable CA type FC type AGE 1P CA FC1 5M A CA type ST type AGE 1P CA ST1 5M A CA type SMA type AGE 1P CA SMA1 5M
176. ce Remote I O station Parameter setting item section Password setting Password setting tititi s si lt iCSstsi iw a O Section 5 2 1 Setting of password effective module EEE Section 5 2 1 Always set A Default setting exists A Set as needed X Setting not required Refer to the intelligent function module user s manual for details about intelligent function module parameters 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 5 1 Remote Master Station Parameter Setting The remote master station sets the network parameters to the CPU module 5 1 1 Setting the number of module cards Network type Set the network type and the station type for each module Up to four cards for the MELSECNET H and up to eight cards including the Ethernet can be selected Select the remote master station in the MELSECNET H network system Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Bg Network type Starting 1 0 No Network No Total stations Group No Station No 0 Mode On line X Network range assignment Refresh parameters ir el Interupt settings E r i z 5 z afr Necessary setting No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Z Already set x Valid module h E TALE during other station access 1 jad Please input the starting 1 0 No of the module in HEX 16 bit form Acknowledge XY assignment Fouling parameters Assignment image Check End Cancel 1 Selection typ
177. ce scan Read command Read completion device Device Host CPU designated in D5 Read completion device D5 1 device Set data Devices designated in D1 D2 D4 Error code storage device SW31 Error code Master module Irregular occurrence 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q REMTO instruction Sequence scan 0 END 0 Write command Write completion device Device designated in D5 Host CPU Write completion device D5 1 device Set data Devices designated in D1 D2 D4 Write data storage device Device Kxxx R W M gt R XXXX i designated in D3 Error code Error code storage device SW31 Master module Irregular occurrence 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c Program example The following shows an example of a REMFR REMTO instruction on the following system design It is a program for accessing the buffer memory of Q62DA and Q64AD mounted to a remote I O station System design Remote I O station Station number 0 REMFR REMTO i QCPU QJ71 QX40 QY40P LP21 instruction request source Network No 1 QJ72 Q62DA Q64AD Open LP25 REMFR REMTO instruction object station Station number 1 Program example 1 Q62DA Communication program for Q62DA SB47 H K4 o 70 X Host baton 1 msec pass sta
178. characters other than i e space that can be input using the keyboard For the details of the remote password function refer to the manuals below e When the serial communication module is used Q Series Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application e When the Ethernet module is used Q Series Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q e Error codes detected by remote I O module LED status REMOTE ERR LED The remote password file includes Correct the starting I O of the target PASS ERR incorrect settings module within 0000H to OFEOu of the The starting I O No of the target remote I O station module is not included in 00004 to OFEOu of the remote I O station REMOTE The module specified by the starting I O e Correct the starting I O to the I O No PASS ERR No of the remote password file is in the of the target module condition below e Correct the target module to QJ71C24 The module has not been mounted or QJ71E71 yet e Replace the module with QJ71C24 or e QJ71C24 or QU71E71 intelligent QJ71E71 of function version B function module or I O module e QJ71C24 and QJ71E71 of function version A f Cautions when setting a remote password 1 If the starting I O No is changed after the remote password is set the previous remote password set with the Ethernet module serial communication module becomes invalid 2 Only the remote password set for
179. cifications item Remote master station Remote I O station QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15 LX LY 8192 points 16384 points Remote master station remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 16384 points Remote master station remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points Remote Master Station Remote I O station LY LB 8 2 x LW lt 1600 bytes 1 Remote I O station Remote Master Station LX LB 8 2 x LW lt 1600 bytes e Multiplexed remote master station gt multiplexed remote sub master station LY LB 8 2 x LW lt 2000 bytes Maximum 1 O points per remote I O X Y lt 4096 points station If the X Y numbers are duplicate only one side is taken into consideration 8192 points Device points per 2048 points a Vee 12288 points SD station 2048 points Maximum number of links Maximum number of links per station Communication speed 10 Mbps Number of stations per network 33 stations Remote master stations 1 Remote I O stations 32 2 Overall distance CRC X X X 1 and retry by timeover Station separation function due to error detection or cable disconnection Diagnostic function for checking local link lines RAS functions e Detection using link special relays or link specia
180. connected Data link Stopped on all stations The other stations operate normally Output Conforms to the setting of output Output The error station conforms to the setting of holding clearing output holding clearing The other stations output normally Setting of operation mode upon an error of remote I O station F Data link Stopped on all stations Continue Output Conforms to the setting of output holding clearing Data link All stations are normal Output All stations output normally For details refer to the QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for details about PLC system settings PLC RAS settings and I O assignment 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q a Operational settings MNET 10H Remote I O station parameter 2 Points Start Start End Transfer to tansfer10 Defaut Check End Cancel 1 2 3 Remote I O switch settings For future expansion Cannot be set at present time Assignment method Select the allocation method for sending parameters between devices Points Start or Start End e Bit devices B M have number of points in units of 16 and the Start End address is allocated in multiple units of 16 Forwarding parameters between devices This sets the type of device and transfer range when performing data transfer between internal remote I O module devices Up to 64 units can be set With the basic set
181. correct wiring absence of terminating resistor in the case of the bus and duplication of station numbers FD24 Retry over and control stations The hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Light check forward side error There is a problem with the cable Light check reverse side error Connect a proper cable and perform an online test FD28 FD29 The hardware of the network module is faulty FD2A i i Contact your local Mitsubishi representative FD2B System error The hardware of the network module is faulty Response wait time out occurred FD36 i it ti Retry after a little while FD37 i i i Check the status of the relevant station and of the line FD38 FD39 FD25 Input port initial value check error Communication test request destination error host station Change the test request destination A station to which a test request is not available was specified c CPU module Communication test request destination N Network module error station to which the test cannot be GX Developer communication request requested disabled station C N CIN cin C N cin C N Sea Review the routing parameters or replace the relay CPU module with the AnU or QnA CPU module compatible with the MELECNET 10 Review the range of the device to be accessed with the ZNRD ZNWR instructions to the ACPU Check if access to other station is made from GX Developer with a project of a
182. current value of a power supply module 4 Connect a NF non fuse breaker to each power supply module so that power supply modules can be shut down separately when either of power supply modules has failed 5 The output of the ERR contact of the power supply module mounted on a main or extension base unit is turned off when AC DC power supply is not input or a power supply module error is detected 6 The output of the ERR contact of the power supply module mounted on a main base unit is turned off when an error that stops the remote I O module has occurred For a remote I O station including redundant power supply configuration remote I O modules of function version C or later can also be used However follow the precautions below 1 Precautions on redundant power supply e When power supply fails the remote I O module does not detect an error code In addition errors minor errors are not noticed to the remote master station When power supply fails the remote I O module does not store the error in link special registers SW0088 to 8B 2 Precautions on the ERR contact of power supply module When an error that stops a remote I O module operation occurs the output of the ERR contact is not turned off e When the remote I O module is mounted on the main base unit the output of the ERR contact is always OFF When it is mounted on the extension base unit the output is turned off in the case where AC DC power supply is not input
183. d control cables 2 Consider to use double shielded coaxial cables in locations where there is excessive noise 3 To configure a multiplexed remote I O network for redundant system use a double shielded coaxial cable Double shielded coaxial cable Mitsubishi Cable 5C 2V CCY lt i of Cable close up eee R2922 PELLS RELLA PELLS pags Setatatsteh Internal Insulator conductor External Sheath Externa conductor conductor Sheath ground Ground gt 5C 2V connector plug can be applied to double shielded coaxial cable Connect the plug to the coaxial cable inside the double shielded coaxial cable Ground the shielded section external part of the double shielded coaxial cable as shown above When connecting a coaxial cable the following restrictions on the bending radius must be observed Allowable bending radius Connector lt A gt Cable type r mm in A mm in Front of module 3C 2V 23 ee 91 55 2 17 5C 2V 30 ME 18 Do not pull any of the connected coaxial cables This may cause a faulty contact and cable disconnection or damage the module For coaxial bus type network systems be sure to connect both end stations to the terminal register Depending on the usage environment some white oxidation deposits may be seen on the F type connector However oxidation will not occur on the connection ar
184. d remote sub master station ON Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station sub master station E Sub master operation Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Link special relays used to confirm operating status of multiplexed remote master station SB0071 Remote master station baton pass status Indicates the baton pass status of the master station OFF Master station baton pass normal ON Master station baton pass abnormal SB0075 Remote master station cyclic transmission Indicates the cyclic transmission status of the master station status OFF Master station cyclic transmission normal ON Master station cyclic transmission abnormal 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Link special relays used to switch multiplexed remote sub master station operation SB0014 Remote sub master station switching Forcibly directs the remote sub master station that is performing command master operation to shift to sub master operation invalid for redundant systems OFF Without directive ON _ With directive SB01C4 Remote sub master station switching Indicates the status of accepting the directive to shift from master acceptance status operation to sub master operation OFF Without acceptance ON With acceptance SB01C5 Remote sub master station switching Indicates the operation status of a shift from master operation to status sub master operation OFF Without shift ON_ Shift complet
185. d the network module e Default No setting for both send and receive x1 The separation prevention refers to a prevention of link data with double word precision 32 bits such as the current value of the positioning module from being separated into new data and old data in one word 16 bits units due to the cyclic transmission timing 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 5 Transient setting 2 Set the execution conditions for the transient transmission Maximum no of transients in 1 scan Set the number of transients total for one entire network that a single network can execute in one link scan e Valid setting count 1 to 255 times Default 2 times Maximum no of transients in one station Set the number of transients that a single station can execute in one link scan e Valid setting count 1 to 10 times Default 2 times x2 When making the transient setting use the following network module and GX Developer e Remote master and remote I O stations First 5 digits of serial No is 07102 or later GX Developer GX Developer Version 8 29F or later 1 Transient request processing may be prolonged in a system where transient requests are made frequently e g a system including a remote I O station to which a GOT is mounted In such a case make the following setting a Parameter setting for the remote master station Increase the value set in No of transients Doing this enables concurrent execution of
186. different CPU type The hardware of the source module starting dedicated instructions and MC System error protocol is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Confirm the status of the target station and relay station CPU modules Alternatively change the CPU module concerned FE20 Received data error FE21 ZNRD ZNWR device range error FE22 AnU request error FE24 System error 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Error No MELSEC Q Table 8 1 Error code list Continued Description of error Corrective measure Confirm the power supply status insufficient voltage instantaneous interruption overvoltage etc of the target station for transient transmission FE25 System error and the relay station Alternatively change the CPU module concerned Confirm the operation status WDT error etc of the target station and relay FE26 System error station CPU modules Alternatively change the CPU module concerned The hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty FE27 System error ee Contact your local Mitsubishi representative FE38 The hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty FE39 System error A Contact your local Mitsubishi representative System error System error System error System error System error System error System error System error System error System error System error System error The hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mi
187. e Wait until SB0047 baton pass status and SB0049 data link status are recovered 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Table 8 1 Error code list Continued Error No Description of error Corrective measure The cable is faulty or the hardware of the network module is faulty If a communication error has occurred review the cable If not the hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative F70C System error F70E System error F710 F711 The hardware of the network module is faulty E72 Contact your local Mitsubishi representative The hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Check if C24 connection or CC Link connection is specified for access to other stations If the setting is correct the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative F781 System error Connection target specification error The hardware of the network module is faulty F783 System error rou f Contact your local Mitsubishi representative The same channel cannot be used at the same time Host station channel in use Change the channel number Alternatively do not use the same channel at the same time Retry the SEND instruction after a little while Check if the target station uses the channel concerned to execute the Target station channel in use instruction or if RECV processing is executed Check if
188. e Select the following item e MNET H Remote master When the remote master station is specified e MNET H multiplexed remote master When the multiplexed remote master station is specified e MNET H multiplexed remote sub master When the multiplexed remote sub master station is specified 2 Precautions a Ifa MELSECNET 10 network module for QnA A is erroneously connected to a MELSECNET H remote I O network the network system will operate as follows If the remote master station is a MELSECNET H network module the remote I O station MELSECNET 10 network module will break away e If the remote master station is a MELSECNET 10 network module the remote I O station MELSECNET H network module will break away 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 5 1 2 Network settings These parameters are used to configure the MELSECNET H network Set the starting I O No network No total number of slave stations group No and mode for each of the module model names set in the number of module cards settings 1 Starting I O No Set the starting input output number to which the module is loaded in 16 point units in hexadecimal for each applicable network module For example set 130 when the network module is loaded onto X Y130 to 14F Q61P QCPU QX42 QX42 QX41 QY41 QY41 QY41 QJ71 64 pts 64 pts 32 pts 32 pts 32 pts 32 pts 48 pts 32 pts 00u 404 804 AOH COn E0u 1004 xY D to to to to to to to 3Fu 7Fu
189. e master station and multiplexed remote sub master station The following program example assumes that the same program is used on the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station to transfer data between the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station a b c System configuration Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station sub master station station No 0 station No 1 Remote I O station station No 2 LB and LW range assignment Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Remote I O station master station sub master station LBO s LB10 LB20 LB40 Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Remote I O station master station sub master station LW100 LW110 LW120 LW140 Purpose of using LB LW for data transfer between multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station LB LW for data transfer transfers from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station the data that is needed to switch remote I O station control from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q d Link special relay and link special registers used to make the programs identical The following link special relay and link special registers can be used to check the send receive device ranges of the multiple
190. e of the network nodule perform the wiring again Also set the system again referring to the user s manual of the CPU module 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Error history monitor details Displays the causes of loop switches and the history of the transient transmission errors Error history detail monitoring Network info Network NET H Loop Network No 1 Type Remote 1 0 master station Group No E Module No 1 Station No 0 Loop switching Transient transmission errors 4 Loop switching 1 Requested by SWOOEO to E7 Displays the number of the station not necessarily an adjacent station that requested the loop switch and loopback 2 Factor SWOODO to DF Displays the reason why the loop switch and loop back are executed e Normal return e Forward loop hardware error Cable or optical module error e Reverse loop hardware error Cable or optical module error 3 Switched to SW00D0 to DF Displays the data link status after the loop switch e Multiplex transmission Forward loop reverse loop normal Forward loop transmission e Reverse loop transmission e Loopback transmission Transient transmission errors 4 Err code Error type SWOOFO to FF Displays the error code See Section 8 3 3 Clear of error history Select the check box of the items whose error history should be cleared from the list of clear items The error history can be cleared for each clear item Clear of error
191. e for intelligent SD18 SD18 function module SD19 SD19 D18 D20 SD20 SD19 021 021 D20 SD22 Vacant Sp22 Vacant SD21 SD23 SD23 SD22 Vacant D24 024 D23 D25 SD25 024 D26 026 025 D26 6 For details of the parameter numbers refer to the user s manual of the CPU used 4 Refer to REMARK n n n n n n n n n n n g g g g p g g iw is is is N N N N N N N oO a J wo N oO Ko N e gt n App 36 App 36 APPENDIX eae Error number that performs error reset SD50 Error reset SD53 AC DOWN detection SD60 SD61 Blown fuse number I O module verification error number Special Register List Continued e Each time the voltage falls below 85 of normal AC power 65 DC power while the CPU module is calculating it will be saved as a BIN code with 1 added to the value AC DOWN Number of time for Number of module with blown fuse I O module verification error module number The lowest I O number of the module where the I O module verification number took place MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU DIT Set by When set Applicable CPU Stores error number that performs error reset S Error D9005 Value stored here is the lowest station I O number of the module S Error D9000 with the blown fuse O Rem S Error D9002 CH1 transmission Rana ato K3 300bps K6 600bps K24 2400bps K48 4800bps re SD105 speed K96
192. e master station Multiplexed remote sub master station master operation sub master operation Multiplexed remote master station Remote O station Multiplexed remote master station fails Multiplexed remote sub master station master operation Remote I O station 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS e LB LW data flow between stations Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station master operation sub master operation LB LW LB LW M R R M H 0 i c Data transfer i 0 c Data transfer b Eaa cee tee an A NG ON ee a cee ee a HFFF Multiplexed remote master station fails Multiplexed remote sub master station master operation Remote I O station 5 Discrimination by LED indications of multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station It is possible to confirm either of the multiplexed remote master station or multiplexed remote sub master station is controlling the remote I O stations by ON OFF status of the MNG LED on the corresponding station ON Master operation station controlling remote I O station TPASS DLINK OFF Sub master operation soi HRD ERRO JLERR 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 Program example to transfer data between multiplexed remot
193. e module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit Then secure the module using the module fixing hole as a support point Incorrect mounting may cause malfunctions a failure or a drop of the module In an environment of frequent vibrations secure the module with the screw Tighten the screw within the specified torque range If the screw is too loose it may cause a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions If too tight it may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions e Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may damage the product For remote I O stations of function version D or later online module change can be performed However the modules which can be replaced online are limited and replacement procedures are determined for each module For details refer to the section of online module replacement in this manual Installation Precautions A CAUTION e Do not directly touch the conducting parts and electronic parts of the module This may cause the module to malfunction or fail Wiring Precautions lt DANGER e Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system when installing or placing wiring Failure to do so may cause electric shocks or damage the product A CAUTION e Be sure to ground the FG terminals independently for PLC b
194. ea so there will be no problems with the function of the unit 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Cable connection a Connection method Connect the coaxial cable as shown below Always install a terminal resistor sold separately AGRCON R75 to the stations connected at both ends The F type connector AGRCON F comes with the module 1 Without a repeater module Remote master station Remote I O station Remote I O station Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No n n lt 32 QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15 QJ72BR15 F type connector F type connector F type connector A6RCON F A6RCON F A6RCON F Terminal resistor Terminal resistor A6RCON R75 Coaxial cable A6RCON R75 sold separately sold separately 2 With a repeater module series connection Remote master station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No n n lt 32 QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15 QJ72BR15 QJ72BR15 F type connector F type connector F type connector F type connector A6RCON F A6RCON F A6RCON F A6RCON F Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Terminal resistor A6RCON R75 A6RCON R75 sold separately T type gt A6BR10 lt T type sold separately connector connector A6BR10 accessory nN oe A6BR10 accessory Terminal resistor A6RCON R75 sold separately Terminal resistor
195. eaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeenaeesaeeas 3 25 3 3 Link Data Send Receive Processing Time Specifications ceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeereeeeeeeeeesas 3 31 3 3 1 Link data send receive processing c eeceeeceeeeeteeeneeeeeeeeeeeecaeesaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeesaeeeaeeseenteeas 3 31 3 3 2 Transmission delay time c eccecccecceeccescceeceeeccneceneccnecenscenscensaenscensaenecenseenacensaeseeesseeseaaessenseenaeeaes 3 34 3 3 3 Switching time from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station in a multiplexed remote I O NetWork cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeaeeeseeeetsnees 3 47 3 3 4 Output holding time during system switching in the multiplexed remote I O network for red ndant system iscc2 csccea hie cee eel eha tal Sete a a a a a e 3 48 4 1 Procedures Before Starting the Operation ssessessesresrerrernesnernernerneenennetnstndtnennctnntndendnnetnenneneaennnnnaan 4 1 4 2 Network Module Names and Settings ecccecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseneseeeseeeeeneteaeeaaes 4 2 4 2 1 QJ71LP21 QU71LP21 25 QU71LP21G QJ71LP21GE QJ71BR11 Remote master station 4 2 4 2 2 QJ72LP25 25 QU72LP25G QU72LP25GE QU72BR15 o oo ee eee eee cette re tee teen teeter teeeeaetae 4 5 4 3 Installing and Uninstalling the MOCUIC cceceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeesaeesaeesaeeseeseeseesieeseeeaesieesieetaeee 4 8 4 4 Stopping the CPU Unint
196. ected read write the data of the intelligent function modules using the REMFR REMTO instruction a The following is the number of parameters that may be set for initial setting Sum total of the numbers of parameters within the setting ranges of all intelligent function modules lt 512 b The following is the number of parameters that may be set for automatic refresh setting Sum total of the numbers of parameters within the setting ranges of all intelligent function modules lt 256 The number of parameters for initial setting is fixed for each intelligent function module To confirm the numbers of parameters for initial setting refer to the user s manuals of the corresponding intelligent function modules Refer to Section 6 3 for the way to count the number of parameters for automatic refresh setting 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 6 When Using a Multiple CPU System Take the following points into consideration when configuring a remote I O network by utilizing multiple CPU system 1 Use the master module of function version B or later 2 Set the network parameters to the control CPU controlling the master module 3 Itis possible to set up to four master modules per control CPU Note that the maximum number of mountable master modules per multiple CPU system is four a CPU No 1 controls all master modules b CPU No 1 and CPU No 2 control each master module qu71 Jqu71 qu7y BR11 BR11 B
197. ection for the calculation expression and to the Data Book for the current consumption of each module mounted to the base unit x4 The ERR contact of the power supply module operates differently depending on the combination of the remote I O module function version and the base unit The following table indicates the ERR contact operation of the power supply module Base unit F B Q5 B 2 1 Output turns OFF when AC DC power is not input or power supply module fault or remote I O module stop error occurs 2 Output turns OFF when AC DC power is not input or power supply module fault occurs 3 Output turns OFF when AC DC power is not input or remote I O module stop error occurs X Output is always OFF x5 Note the following points when using extension cables 1 Do not install extension cables together with the main circuit high voltage large current cables 2 Connect an extension cable from OUT of the extension cable connector of the base unit to IN of the next extension base unit 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 4 Precautions for mounting an intelligent function module Note that the number of intelligent function module parameters that may be set initial setting automatic refresh setting is limited on the remote I O station If the number of parameters set exceeds the limited number the remote I O module detects the SP PARA ERROR 3301 error If the error has been det
198. ed for situations such as 1 when you want to set module data beforehand in order to conserve input output numbers for the empty slots on the remote I O station and 2 when you want to change the actual module design and input output number on the remote I O station To enable the I O assignment functions use GX Developer to set the I O assignment settings in the PLC parameters for the remote I O station The I O assignments are set within common parameter setting range that has been set in remote master station As for the I O assignment settings in the PLC parameters of the remote master station the I O assignment within the remote master station are enabled but they are not enabled in the remote I O station Moreover the I O assignment of the remote I O station is only set for remote I O stations requiring I O assignment There is no need to set for all remote I O stations GX Developer I O assignment setting screen MNET 10H Remote I O station parameter PLC system PLC RAS Operational settings 1 0 assignment 140 Assignment Slot J so Te Remote 0 Remote 1 0 v Li foro Input Ox40 gt Output O50 16points Detailed setting Intelli QJ71C24 32points Modelname Points Starxy Ug i Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Standard setting Base mode Auto C Detail
199. ed online test processing numbers and duplication of control stations Check for faulty cables hardware failure noise incorrect wiring and absence of terminal resistors when a bus is used Wait until SB0047 baton pass status SB0049 data link status is turned off normal F117 Send failure F118 Send failure baton regeneration Send failure f Ae Wait for a while and execute again multiplex transmission stopped Review the parameter and switch settings to see if there is a parameter error and the corresponding station is the control station or remote master station Being disconnected and properly set Check for faulty cables faulty hardware noise incorrect wiring and duplication of station numbers control stations and remote master stations The hardware of the network module is faulty F11C System error M Contact your local Mitsubishi representative F11A 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Error No F122 F221 F228 F301 F701 F702 F703 F707 F708 F709 F70B MELSEC Q Table 8 1 Error code list Continued Description of error Initial status no baton addressed to host Destination station specification error Send failure coaxial bus system System error No free area in the receive buffer buffer full error Receive data size error Logical channel number error Channel number error SEND instruction target station error System error Send target station
200. eeaeeeaeeaeeeatenas 4 26 4 10 2 Setup confirmation test c ccceccccesceeseceeeceeeeceeeeaeeceaeeeeaeeecaeeceaeeecaeeesaaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeesieesaeeeseaeessaees 4 27 4 10 3 Station order check test optical loop system only ee eeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeecaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeens 4 28 4 10 4 Communication test cecceccceceeeeeseeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeseeseeseeeseeesaeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeteaeseeeseneeaes 4 29 5 1 Remote Master Station Parameter Setting 0 0 ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeerseatesas 5 5 5 1 1 Setting the number of module cards Network type cceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeesieesieesieesieeseee 5 5 D2 NGtwork SOtINGS a toate atte Seder ecient aa Lead lenten ieeeadd aleales Mheeeddtad nana nerd aa adaa 5 6 H Starting TO NOsicte cetsiteest aen aae ea eed tie deeds 5 6 2 Network Noiedneniiei alae ite Ale ied Ale ide Al ie ied lie ede oe ed Ale dea 5 6 3 Total Slave stations rsa aa a a E Ta a A TAEAE AT EAE aaa 5 6 4 Group No Can be set for multiplexed remote master station multiplexed remote sub master station only 5 7 5 Modess 3 ier enea out cee ntubacnen dat umiin tala wae dead E E A 5 7 6 Parameter setting example c ccccceseccesceseceeccedeceenceseeesecedaeseeesaessceedaesenenseeeeeedaeeseensaeeseeesacesseedae 5 8 5 1 3 Common parameter 2 00 42 64ee awe ae eee a eee aie 5 9 1 LXYLY Setting s nchine chinese WE ie Ee Ae
201. eeeeeeeteeeeee 8 38 O74 EUW Omat O i esheets haa in be lated neat tie ea ii eel dee el be til diets 8 50 APPENDIX App 1 to App 50 Appendix 1 Precautions when Changing Over from a MELSECNET 10 Remote I O Network to a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network cc ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeseneeseaeeesaeeecaeeesaneeseneeseaees App 1 Appendix 2 Link Special Relay SB List ccccceceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeceaeeseaeeecaeeecaeeseaeeseaeessieeesieeeneeeeans App 3 Appendix 3 Link Special Register SW LiSt cccccecsceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeecaeeecaeeesaaeeseaeeseaeessaeeeeineseneetans App 11 Appendix 4 Special Relay SM for Remote I O Modules List c cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeseeess App 28 Appendix 5 Special Register SD for Remote I O Module List 2 ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseeees App 31 Appendix 6 Discontinued Models that can be Mounted on Remote I O Stations 0 cceeeeeeee App 44 Appendix 7 External Dimensions cccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeceaeecaeescaeeseaneeseaeeseaeeecaeeeeseeseaetscaeeseieeess App 45 INEDX Index 1 to Index 2 A 10 A 10 Manuals The following manuals are also related to this product In necessary order them by quoting the details in the tables below Related Manuals Manual Number Manual Name Model Code Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network This manual describes the
202. eereeeteeeeees App 2 Number 32 bit data guarantee ee eeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeee 6 6 Index 2 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction
203. efer to CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual SH 080394E Note that interrupt setting is not available k6 Refer to the user s manual of the corresponding intelligent function module 2 1 3 Available device ranges The remote I O network can use the following device ranges within each network module These device ranges indicate the remote master station Range setting Ou to 3FFFu 16384 points Ou to 3FFFu 16384 points Ou to 1FFFH 8192 points The device range excluding that of I O module mounted on the host Ou to 1FFFu 8192 points station should be assigned to each network module 10004 2000H 3000H 3FFFH 0 4096 8192 12288 16383 Extended x1 CPU module B W haou Network module LB LW VL LLL CPU module X Y Actual O Network module LX LY Actual vol Available device range 1 Expandable by changing from PLC parameters Device settings 2 3 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 Multiple Remote I O Network QnPHCPU Only 2 2 1 Configuration A multiplexed remote I O network system includes a multiplexed remote master station and a multiplexed remote sub master station The multiplexed remote sub master station takes control of remote I O stations when the multiplexed remote master station fails Always assign station No 0 to the multiplexed remote master station It is allowed to assign any of station number 1 to 64 to the multiplexed remote sub master
204. eive circuits and the Self loopback test cables of the transmission system of an individual network O Section 4 7 1 module Checks hardware including the send receive circuits of the Internal self loopback test te te O Section 4 7 2 transmission system of an individual network module Hardware test Checks hardware inside the network module ae eee Section 4 7 3 Checks the wiring status of the forward and reverse loops in Forward loop reverse loop f P fest the status in which all the stations are connected Remote O x Section 4 9 2 master station only 2 Online tests The status of a line and other items can be easily checked with GX Developer If an error occurs while the system is in operation the diagnostics listed below can be executed while remaining in the online status Data link status Optical loop Coaxial bus as Reference Item Description cyclic transmission or section transient transmission Loop test Checks the line status ee x eee Section 4 10 1 Checks for duplicate control stations Setup confirmation test Pause Section 4 10 2 and station numbers Checks the order of stations connected Station order check test in the directions of the forward and O x Pause Section 4 10 3 reverse loop Checks whether or not the transient transmission can be performed Communication test normally It also checks the routing parameter settings 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 8 Redundant power
205. emote I O station station No 5 Remote I O station station No 4 Forward loop gt Data flow Remote I O Remote I O Remote I O station station station station No 1 station No 2 station No 3 b When abnormal 1 Disconnection in the forward loop reverse loop The data link continues using the reverse loop forward loop Remote Remote I O Remote I O master station station station station No 0 station No 5 station No 4 TS X Aa EAA jay Aa ba Remote I O Remote I O Remote I O station station station station No 1 station No 2 station No 3 Cable disconnection 2 When some of the stations are down The data link continues excluding the stations that are down When two or more stations are down the data link cannot be performed with the station located between the stations that are down Loopback Remote master station station No 0 Remote I O station station No 5 Remote I O station station No 1 Remote I O station station No 3 Loopback Communication disabled 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q c Precautions in using the optical loop system 1 When the cable is inserted or removed the line forward loop reverse loop may be switched but the data link will be performed normally 2 When the loopback is being executed due to a cable disconnection both the forward and reverse l
206. emote I O network including the host station Off All stations normal On Error station identified This relay turns off when all of SW0080 to SW0083 are 0 D Indicates the CPU RUN status of each station 3 Off All stations are in the RUN or STEP RUN status CPU RUN status of each SB0084 uo ee On Stations in the STOP or PAUSE status exist olo 132 including the host Turns off when the SW0084 to SW0087 are all 0 3 Indicates the CPU run status of remote master station CPU RUN status of th SB0085 a E Off Run or STEP RUN status x 133 On STOP or PAUSE status Indicates the CPU status of the multiplexed remote sub master Remote sub master station station CPU RUN status Off RUN or STEP RUN status x On STOP or PAUSE status Indicates the operation status of each station s CPU or of each efe x3 x4 CPU operation status of remote I O station including the host station e each station 136 On Stations with minor errors exist Turns off when the SW0088 to SW008B are all 0 Indicates the information of the external power supply including External power supply ine Nest SB008C information Off All stations are without external power supply 140 On Stations with external power supply exist Turns off when the SW008C to SW008F are all 0 3 Indicates the module type of each station SB008D Module type of each station x3 SB0086 134 Off All stations normal Off All stations are NET 10 type modules O 14
207. ent transmission abnormal detection time By using this function the Time Abnormal detection network number and Abnormal detection station number can be checked when a transient transmission READ WRITE and other instructions ends abnormally The time log can be used to identify the network problems and to determine how the network can be improved For details on the instructions refer to the Q corresponding MELSECNET H network system reference manual PLC to PLC network Request sourse QCPU QJ71 LP21 Wke ine tee che See ee a aE eke Power supply Power supply Power supply Request destination Abnormal detection station 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 7 Diagnostic function The diagnostic function is used to check the network s line status and the module setting status The diagnostic function consists mainly of following two types of tests e Offline tests e Online tests Execute the online tests when the network module is communicating T PASS LED is on An error occurs if any of the online tests is executed from a station that has been disconnected from the data link 1 Offline tests The network module s hardware and the data link cable wiring can be checked at the system startup by setting the network module or GX Developer to the test mode on Optical loop Coaxial bus Reference Item Description i system system section Checks hardware including the send rec
208. entional Output Prevention cc eeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeseeseeseetieesieeteeeaees 4 10 4 5 Checking the Input Power Supply Voltage eeecceeceeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeseeesaeeseeseesieesieesieesieesieesieesieeeeeneees 4 10 AG POWERING Oeni E oh taglateneschedgagllensd ated vtashal wetter hehe 4 10 4 6 1 Checking the on status of the POWER LED of the power supply module ceseeee 4 10 4 6 2 Checking the on status of the RUN LED of the network module eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteeetees 4 10 4 7 Standalone Check of the Network Module Offline Tests ce cecceeceeneseeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeseeeseeeeeneeeneeeaes 4 11 4 7 1 Self loopback E EEE EE E E EEE A 4 12 4 7 2 Internal self loopback testin ai a e e e a ea A a a ea a e aaa a eaaa aai 4 13 Are Hardware ES anaa a aa A a A ENE A nanan Ei AE AAA 4 14 4 8 Gable Connections o snreosnrinriinn rE EE A AN TAE a RR 4 15 4 81 Optical loop systemic a ale eee e aie 4 15 4 8 2 Coaxial bus SYStOM anisini ia ariera ai adeir iaa aiiis 4 17 4 9 Offline Tests from GX Developer vmis e a lack dM a a a 4 22 A 8 A 8 4 9 1 Forward loop reverse loop test Remote master station ONIY c ceceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaeeeieeeneeas 4 22 4 10 Network Diagnostics from GX Developer Online Tests eeccecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeneeeeeeeneeaes 4 25 4 10 1 Loop test optical loop system ONLY cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeae
209. equest latter Operation is continued from the status before Q J 72 L P 4 25 switching GX Developer GX Developer 2 Continue the online Online module change is 1 module change being executed Cancel the execution of the online module change e When No is selected The operation of online module change GX Developer 2 which was the latter request is canceled The online module change being executed first GX Developer 1 is continued Q J 72 L P 4 25 GX Developer GX Developer 2 Cancel the online module Continue the online module 1 change change 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Ifan error has occurred on the target remote I O module the module holds the error even after online module change is completed Therefore it is necessary to clear the error by clearing the error using SM50 and SD50 on the PLC CPUs of the remote I O station and master station Reset the error in the order below a Remote I O station b PLC CPU of the master station 4 When the REMTO REMFR instruction is executed for an intelligent function module under online module change the system turns to the waiting for execution status without detecting an error The instruction is resumed after the online module change has finished The completion flag of the instruction is not turned on in the waiting for execution status c Procedure of online module change This
210. er D memory Ref Intelligent function module parameters e Initial settings S Automatic refresh Configurator settings 4 The automatic refresh setting of the intelligent function parameters enables the intelligent function module data to be refreshed into the remote I O module s data register D By refreshing the data register D to the link register W with the parameter of the remote I O module the remote master station can read write the intelligent function module data by cyclic transmission This method has the advantage that the intelligent function module parameters created for QCPU can be applied to the remote I O module without making any modifications Remote master station Remote I O station Intelligent function module QCPU Master station Intelligent Link register W Link register LW Remote I O module function module Refresh Link Data Buffer register W register D memory Intelligent function Refresh Refresh module parameters Initial settings GX e Automatic refresh Configurator settings b The interrupt sequence program of the host s CPU module can be started up using the event issue function This function reduces the response time of the system and enables real time data reception See Section 7 7 Starting Up the Interrupt Sequence Progra
211. er of times specifying Number of times for initial setting is 2 eting arae tie 2 500m a a ra Add this number to all numbers of lumber of times 4 to 62500 times iio aS r parameters of the other intelligent CH2 Sampling process averaging process setting Samping function modules CH2 Time number of times speciying Number of nes Details Select input Setting range Enable Disable Make text file End setup If the remote I O module has detected the error read write the data of the intelligent function modules using the REMFR REMTO instruction The number of parameters for initial setting is fixed for each intelligent function module To confirm the numbers of parameters for initial setting refer to the user s manuals of the corresponding intelligent function modules 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q d Remote I O module Intelligent parameters Automatic refresh Sets the digital output vale for channels 1 to 3 and the device for refreshing the error code 2 2 Note that the number of intelligent function module parameters that may be set for automatic refresh setting is limited The number of parameters that may be set for automatic refresh setting is as follows Sum total of the numbers of parameters within the setting ranges of all intelligent function modules lt 256 If the number of parameters set exceeds the limited number the remote I O module detects the SP PARA ERROR 3
212. erved stations 1 Separate mode b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b3 b2 bi bO snorre a a7 6 as w ar 35 ae arta sworrr 6a es ee 61 w s32 1 0 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Indicates the pairing setting status of each station In the case of a redundant system the bit of the station with the larger number is turned on 1 0 No pairing designation including the single CPU system including stations exceeding the maximum station number and reserved stations 1 Station with pairing designation b15 b14 b13 b12 to O epele ee s aJe e HH0H0HHNALM rae ar ao lt 5 w 27 30 5 36 30 res eo footer os 52 i 0 9 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Indicates the operation status of each station s CPU control system standby system 0 The host station CPU is on the control system including the single CPU system including stations exceeding the maximum station number and reserved stations 1 The host system CPU is on the standby system b15 b14 b13 b12 to sworo s pa e es ae e sworo sz sr 20 2f io zr a s re 7 sworre a ar a8 6 or se 6 50 SW01FF HOQOHAHHHNA Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 27 Coaxial Remote master station Remote I O station APPEND
213. es the forward loopback 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 1 4 Error history monitor With the error history monitor information the status of the forward reverse loop errors communication errors and transient transmission errors that have occurred can be checked In addition the detailed error history display and the error history can be cleared on this screen 1 Error history monitor Error history monitor Network info Loop switching 1 Network NET H Loop Network No 3 Type Remote 0 master station Group No Module No 1 Station No Transient transmission 2 F Loop R Loop 3 Retry Retry 4 Line trouble Line trouble Communication Error Communication Error 5 UNDER 0 UNDER 0 6 CRC 1 CRC 0 7 OVER 1 OVER 0 8 SHORTFRAME 0 SHORTFRAME 0 9 ABORT 0 ABORT 0 10 TIMEOUT 0 TIMEOUT 0 11 Exceeding 2Kb 0 Exceeding 2Kb 0 Error history detail 12 DPLL ERROR 0 DPLL ERROR 0 Clear error history Network info This area displays the same information as the host information in Section 8 1 1 1 Loop switching SW00CE Displays how many times loops were switched lt Error Cause gt Station s power ON OFF faulty cable noise etc lt Corrective Action gt See POINT on the next page 2 Transient transmission SWOOEE Displays how many transient transmission errors have occurred lt Error Cause gt Power OFF of the destination station failure of the destination station s CPU module faulty cable noise etc lt Co
214. eset remote I O module 3 Replace remote I O module and check lt Cause gt The power is not being supplied Or the overcurrent protection is active lt Troubleshooting gt 1 Review the power supply status 2 Check that the total current consumption of the modules installed on the base unit does not exceed the rated output current of the power supply module used 8 18 8 TROUBLESHOOTING lt Cause 1 gt M S error or SW error is assumed lt Troubleshooting 1 gt 1 Check for duplicate station number remote master station duplication or switch setting error 2 Take corrective action according to the contents of SW47 and the error code stored in SW48 lt Cause 2 gt PLC CPU or remote I O station error is assumed lt Troubleshooting 2 gt Check the PLC CPU or remote I O station error in the PLC diagnostics and restore the CPU to normal See Section 8 2 1 MELSEC Q 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 2 1 Items to be checked first Check item Checking procedure with GX Developer s network monitor the loop status of each station to search for the location where the error occurred Read the error code using GX Developer and take proper measures against the error For details see the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Is the ERR LED of the CPU module still lit or Check the following when LINK PARA ERROR occurs flickering 1 Check whether t
215. esults of the SEND RECV READ WRITE REQ RECVS RRUN RSTOP RTMRD RTMWR REMFR REMTO instructions when physical channel 1 is used 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion see the error codes in 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 12 App 12 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special Register SW List Continued ZNVWR instruction processing result SW0033 51 Send receive instruction 2 processing result Description Indicates the processing result of the ZNWR instruction 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion see the error codes in Section 8 3 Indicates the processing results of the SEND RECV READ WRITE REQ RECVS RRUN RSTOP RTMRD RTMWR REMFR REMTO instructions when physical channel 2 is used 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion see the error codes in Section 8 3 Use permitted prohibited Remote master station Control station Remote I O station Optical Coaxial SW0035 53 Send receive instruction 3 processing result Sw0037 Send receive instruction 4 processing result a a Sw0039 57 Send receive instruction 5 processing result Send receive instruction 6 processing result sw 003D Send receive instruction 7 processing result SW003F Send receive instruction 63 8 processing result SW0040 64 SW0041
216. et 3 Refer to QCPU User s Manual Functional Explanation Program Fundamentals SH 080484ENG 4 Refer to Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic SH 080009 Note that interrupt setting is not available 5 Refer to CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual SH 080394E Note that interrupt setting is not available 6 Refer to the user s manual of the corresponding intelligent function module 2 4 3 Available device ranges The remote I O network can use the following device ranges in the network module Device Available range Others On to 3FFFH 16384 points On to 3FFFH 16384 points Ou to 1FFFH 8192 points The device range excluding that of I O module mounted on the host On to 1FFFH 8192 points station should be assigned to each network module 10001 20004 30004 3FFFuH 0 4096 8192 12288 16383 bt tt CPU module B W Extended function area 1 ZN S Remote I O network 1 LB LW J Remote I O network2 LB LW Aann nn CPU module X Y Real BA QA AN A t Remote I O network 1 LX LY Real vo 1 Expandable by changing from PLC parameters Device settings 2 11 2 11 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 5 Applicable Systems 2 5 1 Applicable systems for remote master stations This section provides precautions on system configuration for use of a remote master station 1 Applicable CPUs and the number of
217. ettings for the intelligent function module parameters that where written in the remote I O station to periodically read and write intelligent function module data The intelligent function module parameters are created by GX Configurator For more detailed information refer to the manual for the intelligent function module you are using With this method a sequence program can be created to allow communication in the same way as with an intelligent function module mounted to the same base units as the CPU module The analog input values for the analog input module the current values of the high speed counter module and others are periodically read and suited for periodic writing of the analog output value for the analog output module With this method since data is read and written periodically there is no interlock with the intelligent functions Remote master station QCPU lt Y1018 gt Master module Remote I O station Intelligent Remote I O module function module Initial settings Buffer memory 1 The GX Configurator is used to write the initial settings for the intelligent function module and the automatic refresh settings to the remote I O station remote I O module 2 The remote I O module follows the automatic refresh settings and refreshes the data in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module to link register W of the
218. etwork are not included among the faulty stations because there is no response b15 b8 b7 bo SWOOAA Online test execution item responding side Item number 10x Loop test 20 Setup confirmation test 30 Station order check test 401 Communication test Stores the online test result of the responding side Valid when the SBOOAB is on a Online test result 0 Test normal O O O O O O O responding side i Other than 0 Test error content see the error codes in Section 8 3 Stores the offline test items and faulty station on the requesting side Valid when the SBOOAD is on Stations disconnected from the network are not included among the faulty stations because there is no response Any given station number 0 to 64 7Dx is saved in the maximum faulty station number b8 to b15 for the loop test Offline test execution b15 to b8 br to item faulty station to to requesting side L Maximum faulty iteninurnber station number 3 Loop test forward loop 4 Loop test reverse loop 5 Station to station test master station 6 Station to station test slave station 7 Self loopback tes 8 Internal self loopback test Stores the offline result of the requesting side Valid when the SBOOAD is on ea Offline test result requesting side 0 Test normal q E Other than 0 Test error content see the error codes in Section 8 3 Stores the request side offline test items and error stations Enabled when SBOOAF is on Whe
219. f system switching In addition it is affected by the CPU system switching time and the switching time between multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station The following shows the calculation formula of output holding time for each reason for system switching 1 When a power failure or CPU module stop error occurs Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station Control system standby system Standby system control system Remote I O station R Remote I O station R Remote I O station R a CPU system switching time lt System switching time from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station A power failure has occurred on the control system Control system standby system CPU scan Ds2 Standby system control system CPU Toh Output holding time of remote I O station Output holding time Toh Toh Ds2 Scan ms Ds2 Switching time from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station ms Scan Scanning time of the redundant CPU ms 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q b CPU system switching time gt Switching time from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station A power down has occurred on the control system Control system standby system CPU escan p Tsw Standby system control system CPU Output holding time of
220. fter the b0 Forward loop H W error switching gt b1 Reverse loop H W error 0 Multiplex transmission b2 Forward loop forced error Forward b3 Reverse loop forced error loop reverse loop b4 Forward loop continuous normal communication error Data link by forward b5 Reverse loop continuous loop communication error Data linking by b6 Forward loop continuous line reverse loop error Data linking by b7 Reverse loop continuous line loopback error Stores the number of the stations that requested the loop switch b15 to b8 b7 to bO SWOOEO g 5 to Switch request station SWOOE7 a W Odd numbered Even numbered switch station switch station Stores each station s module type 0 MELSECNET 10 module 1 MELSECNET H module b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b3 b2 bi bO swooes re e pe e e Ts e e e swnoes foi so ae fe fafo woe swnoea ae a7 fae os fe ar as oe swooes or eo e2 or e a se e eo a Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores execution results for low speed cyclic transmission start 2 Low speed cyclic execution results SWOOEC transmission start 0 Test normal execution results Other than 0 Test error content see the error codes in Section 8 3 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained 7 To reset the SWOOCE to SWO00E7 turn on the SB0009 8 For the loop switch request station stations other than the ones
221. g 2 power supply modules g When an input module an output module or an intelligent function module mounted on a remote I O station fails the faulty module can be replaced without stopping the system operation Online module change Online module change is available for Q series I O modules and function version D or later analog to digital and digital to analog converter modules temperature input modules and temperature control modules The following faults make the RAS functions valid e Break in cable e Power off of slave station e Network setting error e Fault detectable by self diagnostics of CPU module If the network module has become faulty the RAS functions may not be activated depending on the fault 5 Control of external connection to remote I O stations refer to Section 7 12 Setting a remote password for a remote I O station restricts connections from the outside via an Ethernet interface module or serial communication module Remote password 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 6 Strengthening network functions Remote I O station system monitor Select Q64AD Q64AD system monitor a Intelligent function modules mounted to remote I O stations can be diagnosed using the GX Developer system monitor Intelligent function modules mounted to remote I O stations can be diagnosed using the system monitor even if it is done via the network using a GX Developer connected to a remote master station or e
222. g a tool for securing the optical fiber cable bending radius This tool may be purchased from Mitsubishi Electric System Service Inc or your nearest dealer Please inquire for more information d When laying the optical fiber cables do not touch the fiber cores of the cable and module connectors and do not let dust or particles collect on them If oil from hands dust or particles adhere to the cores the accumulated transmission loss may cause malfunctions in the data link e When attaching or detaching the optical fiber cable to from the module pull or insert the cable by holding the cable connector securely with your hand f Connect the cable and module connectors securely until you hear a click sound 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Cable connection a Howto connect the cable Connect the IN and OUT terminals with optical fiber cables as shown below Connect the OUT terminal of the host station with the IN terminal of the next station Stations do not have to be connected in the order of station numbers Remote master station is set as station number 0 a 1 QJ71LP21 25 QU72LP25 25 QU71LP21G QU72LP25G Remote master station Remote I O station Remote I O station Station Station Station No 0 No 1 No n n lt 64 2 gt 2 2 QCPU QJ71 2 QJ72 2 QJ72 a LP21 a P235 __ LP25 D D D z z z O O O a a a n Tour N Tout
223. g time setting is enabled or enable flag disabled OFF The switching monitoring time setting SW0018 is disabled ON __ The switching monitoring time setting SW0018 is enabled SW0018 Switching monitoring time setting Set a time from the detection of a data link halt to issue of system switching request in the redundant system 0 2s default 1 to 500 in 10ms set up in 10ms units within the range of 10ms to 5s To reduce the system switching time from 2s to 0 5s set SB0018 SW0018 in the sequence program as follows System switching monitoring time setting enable directive f McK K0 S418 Set up a system switching time of 0 5s ST 8 Enable the SWO0018 setting System switching monitoring time setting disable directive f RST 18 Disable the SW0018 setting x1 1 If SB0018 is disabled OFF the system switching monitoring time is 2s default POINT The network module issues the system switching request to the QnPRHCPU even when the data link error is caused by the following accident the network module mounted in the control system is not connected with a cable or disconnected at the time of power ON The network module issues the system switching request within 4s after power ON 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 11 4 Access function by specifying the control system or standby system This function is for making access to the QNPRHCPU by specifying the control sy
224. gnostics of GX Developer For a list of the device numbers for each display item see Section 8 1 Network Diagnostics Line Monitor When multiple network modules are installed the SB of each network module is refreshed to the corresponding SB of the CPU module if each network module s refresh parameters are not set If the refresh parameters are set for at least one network module the refresh parameters of all the network modules should be reviewed Module installing position Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Device number SB0000 to 01FF SB0200 to 03FF SB0400 to 05FF SB0600 to O7FF In the link special relay there are ranges the user can set on and off SB0000 to SB001F and ranges the system can set on and off SB0020 to SB01FF When the unit mounting position is unit 1 Table 1 Special link relay SB list Use permitted prohibited Remote master stati Optical Remote I O station Normal station Control Description station Restarts the host s cyclic transmission Off Start not instructed On Start instructed valid at rise 2 Stops the host s cyclic transmission Off Stop not instructed On Stop instructed valid at rise 2 Restarts the cyclic transmission according to the contents of SW000 to SW004 Off Start not instructed On Start instructed valid at rise x2 Stops the cyclic transmission according to the contents of SW000 to SW004 Off Stop not instructed On Stop instructed valid at
225. h arrival check READ WRITE REQ ZNRD ZNWR instruction To2 St atT SR arR X2 LS x 4 LSu ms MAX To2 ST a T SR aR X2 LS x 6 LSu 2 SEND RECV arrival time TD3 ST a T LS X 2 SR X 2 a R LSu ms MAX TD3 ST a T LS X 3 SR X 2 a R LSU 3 SEND RECVS arrival time Toa ST a T LS X 2 SR a R LSu ms MAX To4 ST a T LS X 3 SR a R LSu ST Send side scan time SR Receive side scan time aT Send side link refresh time 2 aR Receive side link refresh time 2 LS Link scan time 1 _J Number of simultaneous transient requests LSu Maximum transient count 1 7x LS x2 Number of simultaneous transient requests Total number of transient requests made from stations on the same network during one link scan Maximum transient count Max transient count during one link scan set by supplemental settings of common parameters x1 Round up the fractional portion x2 Total number of mounted network modules 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Link refresh time The link refresh time CPU module end processing time extension is calculated as shown below e Link device allotment points e Type of CPU used Remote master station refresh time am am KM1 KM2 x LB LX LY SB LW x 16 SW x 16 16 ae ms aE KM3 x LB LX LY LW x 16 16 am Remote master station link refresh time LB The total number of link relay
226. hat stops restarts data linking 00x Host 01 All stations 02 Designated station O O O O 80x Host forced stop restart 811 All stations forced stop restart 82 Designated station forced stop restart I Sets whether the designated station should execute data linking When the SW0000 is 02h or 82h Sets the bits to 1 for stations whose data linking is stopped restarted 0 Invalid data linking stop restart instruction 1 Valid data linking stop restart instruction Link stop startup direction b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b3 b2 b1 bO lololo ia snoot fre Tis fa e e e e e eT swonoa 32 or 20 a6 e fer ao ve 8 77 Availability column Optical optical loop Coaxial coaxial bus snos afa ejeto ar e e swoon fatet e eea O Available X Not available The numters 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Sets the logical channel number for physical channel number 1 Logical channel setting Valid only for channels on the receiving side channel 1 0 Logical channel number 1 default 1to64 Other logical channel number is set Sets the logical channel number for physical channel number 2 Logical channel setting Valid only for channels on the receiving side 9 channel 2 0 Logical channel number 2 default 1to64 Other logical channel number is set Sets the logical channel number for physical channel number 3 SWOOODA Logical channel setting _ Valid only for channels on the receiving side 1
227. he Feri ree os module X input POINT 1 Always cancel the registration of the forced input output after the device test has been completed The REM LEDs on the remote I O module for in device testing will flash Once the device testing has been completed it is possible to check that the REM LEDs have stopped flashing If the device test is not cancelled the remote I O network could malfunction After the device has been cancelled the module operates with data remaining from the device test e When the Y output is on with the GX Developer and the device test is cancelled operation is performed in the Y output on status When the X input is on with the GX Developer and the device test is cancelled operation is performed in the X input on status 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 4 Multiplex Transmission Function Optical Loop System x The multiplex transmission function allows high speed communications using duplex transmission paths both the forward and reverse loops in the optical loop system In order to execute the multiplex transmission function setting for the Supplemental settings of the common parameters is required Note that this setting is not allowed unless the total number of link stations is four stations or more 1 Using the multiplex transmission function the high speed communication is performed using both the forward and reverse loops effectively 1R1 1R2 IN OUT IN OUT
228. he MELSECNET H For details on the format and program examples of each instruction see the applicable section listed in the Reference section column List of dedicated link instructions O Can be used X Cannot be used Executing A f N Target station Reference Instruction Name station Description section QCPU Remote I O station Reads data from the remote I O station intelligent function module Read buffer memory Remote I O Intelligent remote I O module function mod le station intelligent REMFR gt Section 7 1 1 1 function module Channel 5 buffer Channel 6 Channel 7 memory Channel 8 Writes data to object remote I O station intelligent function module Write buffer memory remote I O Remote I O Intelligent module function module station Channel 1 intelligent Channel 2 Channel 3 Section 7 1 1 1 module Channel 5 buffer Channel 6 Channel 7 memory Channel 8 Reads remote I O station device data for object network number 16 bit unit Remote I O Read other module station word 9 device Word device Channel 5 1 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Writes device to object network number remote I O station 16 bit unit function Remote I O Write other module Channel 1 Channel 2 word Channel 3 device Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 station 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Execution Target station station PEt i i
229. he host first address device for storing the read data Read completion device Host Designates the host device to be set to 1 scan on by the read completion Bit device 1 OFF Not completed ON Completed Word device bit designation D2 1 OFF Normal ON Abnormal 1 Bit device sees ess tees re ees X Y M L F V B x2 Word device ttt t tee T C D W ST R ZR x3 Word device bit designation Word device bit number 7 3 7 3 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 REMTO instruction Network No designation Write command Z REMTO Jn n1 n2 n3 n4 D1 n5 D2 Z Executed when on Write command c ZP REMTO Jn n1 n2 n3 n4 D1 n5 D2 ZP Executed when rising PT Description of setting Setting range First address input output number for object intelligent function module The upper 3 digits of the 4 digit expression designates the first address input output 0 to FEH number for the intelligent function module mounted to the remote I O station that is to be Word device x the object Write buffer memory first address Designates the first address of the buffer memory for the write destination intelligent function module Constant K H Word device Write data storage first address device Host Designates the host first address device for storing the written data 1 to 960 Number of write data points word modules Write completion device Host
230. he remote I O stations when multiplexed I O stations R when the multiplexed remote master station DMR becomes remote master station becomes fails fault 2 Selection of operating station It is possible to set parameter to select the operating station status when the status when multiplexed remote multiplexed remote master station returns to the system master station returns to system Return to system as control station The master operating station control station is switched from the multiplexed remote sub master station DSMr to the multiplexed remote master station DMR At the time of switching the remote I O stations are reset once Return to system as standby station The multiplexed remote sub master station DSMr operates continuously as the master operating station control station Furthermore when the multiplexed remote master station has returned to the system as the sub master operating station standby station it is switched to the master operating station control station manually 3 Startup of multiplexed remote sub By setting the same parameters as the multiplexed remote master station master station only DMR the multiplexed remote sub master station DSMr can resume control of remote I O stations if it is powered on and then off while controlling the remote I O stations In case that the multiplexed remote master station has 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q The following de
231. he starting I O in the network setting matches the slot where the network module is installed See Section 5 1 2 2 Check for consistency in the network type and the station number of the network module See Section 5 1 1 Are LEDs of the remote I O station operating Check the RUN ERR and L ERR LEDs and take the corrective action if any error normally is found Refer to Section 4 2 If the RUN REM T PASS and D LINK LEDs are OFF or the ERR and L ERR LEDs are ON diagnose the remote I O module by GX Developer See Section 4 2 If the T PASS L ERR LED turns on and off improperly and looks instable refer to Are the RUN REM T PASS and DLINK ihe folowing Fae eae Sabet ore ai The line status is assumed to be instable Are the ERR and L ERR LEDs OFF lt Troubleshooting gt 1 Check the connector for loose connection and the cable for a break 2 Check that the cable used conforms to the specifications 3 Check that the overall length and interstation distance conform to the specifications Refer to Section 4 8 Cable Connection Pre REM LEDS rithe tremor If the LEDs are out use GX Developer to diagnose the remote I O module Perform the error reset process by the procedure below after executing the online module change function 1 Perform the error reset process on the remote I O station 2 Perform the error reset proce
232. he target station in Clear the stop error on the route CPU module or CPU module of the target station the redundant system Change the route station No or the station No of the target station Check the routing parameters with the communication test of GX Developer s online Are the routing parameter settings correct diagnostics Check the network No parameter Is the network No parameter correct If the parameter is not set the network No has been set to 1 default so check other station s network No Did an error occur while the transient transmission was being executed 8 2 6 When the dedicated link instruction is not completed Check item Checking procedure l MEANN PERE EA Place the dedicated link instruction issuing station online and execute the dedicated link Is the dedicated link instruction issuing station online instruction Use SB43 as an interlock to confirm the online status in the sequence program 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 2 7 When a multiplexed remote I O network for the redundant system does not operate normally 1 QnPRHCPU will not perform system switching even when the data link cable is disconnected Check item Checking procedure lsn Ethe power supply module olin standby Confirm the status of the external power supply of the standby system system turned off the standby system diagnostics to check if any error has occurred Hasn t a stop error occurred on the networ
233. he year last two digits and month are stored as BCD code at SD210 as shown below Clock data B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 to B4 B3 so Example Cl k d ti T T T T T PAAS year month fl ii 30y 1993 Wt a H9307 The day and hour are stored as BCD code at SD211 as shown below B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 to B4B3 to Bo Example f S U Clock data peo 31st 10 a m Request O Rem day hour H3110 E The minutes and seconds after the hour are stored as BCD code at SD212 as shown below Clock data to B12B11 to B8 B7 Clock data minute i 35 min 48 sec i after the hour Minute The day of the week is stored as BCD code at SD213 as shown below B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 to 8483 to B0 Example ee cere el aes Friday a ee DEui Tae 1 L H0005 aR a it rey of week s u QCPU igher digits Clock data Jer cg l E Sunday D9028 of year day Higher digits Monday Request Remote of week of year 0 to 99 Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday App 39 App 39 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding D240 Base mode 0 Automatic mode Stores the base mode S Initial 1 Detail mode a ea extension RA A Stores the maximum number of the extension bases being installed S Initial extension bases bases B2 B1 BO Base type s ia Fixed to 0 differentiation rxedtoo e 0 QA Bis Basic base A Q base installed pee S Initial differentiation A mode zna
234. her than Ou to OFFOu module to within the On to OFFOn range or later Mount any of the following modules in the r oz position specified for the head I O number of Any of the following modules is not mounted on the slot specified the remote password for the head I O number of the remote password ae de ag Serial communication module of function 3401 e Serial communication module of function version B or later f version B or later e Ethernet module of function version B or later F gt i e Ethernet module of function version B or later Modem interface module of function version B or later Modem interface module of function version B 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Clearing an error If the error which allows the operation to continue occurs it can be cleared by remote I O module as well as CPU module Make sure to clear the error by remote I O module then perform the error clear operation by CPU module The error clear procedure using GX Developer is indicated below 1 2 Remove the error cause of the remote I O station Store the error code to be cleared in the special register SD50 of the remote I O module Turn off and on special relay SM50 of the remote I O module The target error of the remote I O module is cleared Store the error code to be cleared in the special register SD50 of the CPU module Turn off and on special relay SM50 of the CPU module The target error of
235. hernet module count parameter setting the SER e If the error occurs after correction it suggests 3103 number of actually mounted module is 0 7 a hardware fault Contact your local The start I O No of the Ethernet network parameter differs from the Mitsubishi representative I O No of the actually mounted module The network number station number or group number set in the d e Correct and write the network parameters network parameter is out of range ns S e If the error occurs after correction it suggests 3104 e The specified I O No is outside the range of the used CPU a hardware fault Contact your local module 2 Mitsubishi representative The Ethernet specific parameter setting is not normal different from that of the actually mounted station 3106 The network refresh parameter for CC Link is out of range Check the parameter setting The CC Link parameter setting is incorrect i 510r The set mode is not allowed for the version of the mounted CC Link Cneckthe parameter setting The start I O number in the intelligent function module parameter set 3300 f Check the parameter setting on GX Configurator differs from the actual I O number Though the number of CC Link modules set in the network parameters is one or more the number of actually mounted e Correct and write the network parameters modules is zero es A P e If the error occurs after correction it suggests 3105 The st
236. his case since the QnNPRHCPU of the standby system cannot process the sequence program the CPU controls the network only Various modules mounted in remote I O stations cannot be controlled Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station sub master operation master operation Control system Standby system Power QnPRHCPU QJ71 Fad QnPRHCPU QJ71 suppl System B Under an error For the details of system switching refer to QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q The network module issues a system switching request when the status of data link is changed from under data link to data link halted when the D LINK LED of the network module turns off Although the time interval from when the data link is stopped to when the system switching request is issued to the QNPRHCPU is set to two seconds the interval can be changed using the link special relay SB and link special register SW To issue the system switching request immediately after detecting that data link is stopped reduce the system switching monitoring time However note that a system switching request is issued frequently if the network is not stable and the system switching monitoring time is reduced too much Link special relay and link special register used for setting a system switching monitoring time SB0018 Switching monitoring time setting Indicates whether the switching monitorin
237. history Clear type M Clear Retry counter M Clear Communication Error Counter Close IY Clear F Loop Transmission Error V Clear R Loop Transmission Error I Clear Loop Switch Counter Clear Transient Transmission Error 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 2 Troubleshooting MELSEC Q Check the PLC CPU for an error before starting the troubleshooting of the network module and network If the RUN LED of the PLC CPU is off flickering or the ERR LED is on identify the error that occurred in the PLC CPU and take corrective action 1 Check that the host has joined the network Start the troubleshooting of the host by monitoring the status of the host First check whether or not the host has joined the network This is important because it is not possible to monitor the status of other stations and to perform troubleshooting on other stations unless the host has joined the network The troubleshooting flowchart shown below explains the sequence from checking an error to enabling a baton pass in order to join the network a For the remote master module Is the T PASS LED of the host lit No Is the RUN LED lit r Yes Is the ERR Yes The host s baton pass is normal End The host is in the normal status power supplied to the power source module No YES Execute offline tests 1 Hardware test 2 Self loopback test 3 Internal self loopback test
238. hows the error messages of the error codes the contents and causes and the corrective actions Common Individual LED Status CPU Error Code f Diagnostic Error Message Information Information Operation cae SD0 Timing SD5 to SD15 SD16 to SD26 Statuses a a Hp as a Ea Ea Ee Continue 1 At power ON At reset When On intelligent function module is accessed 2 Resetting the CPU module on the remote master station or turning it to RUN from STOP when the remote I O station is in the FUSE BREAK OFF Module No oh SP UNIT DOWN Module No oh 1 Remote I O operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence 2 A remote I O station is reset by the following 1 Pressing the reset switch of the remote station following status e The remote I O station has not been reset after modification of some remote I O station parameters A stop error has occurred on the remote I O station 3 Function version is D or later 5 The first 5 digits of serial No is 08062 or greater 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 1005 1009 1109 1300 1401 Error Contents and Cause Run mode suspended or failure of main CPU e Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason e Hardware fault A failure is detected on the power supply module Remote I O module base unit or extension cable When using the redundant base unit the redundant power supply module failure in both systems and or the redundant
239. i 1 Channel 7 i i i u Channel 8 iI Receives the channel data which was sent by SEND within an interrupt program and reads that data to the CPU device immediately Processing is completed when the instruction is executed Network module Network module pas aie Logical channel 5 Channel 5 Logical channel 6 Channel 6 H H RECvs Logical channel 7 Channel 7 Logical channel 8 Channel 8 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Execution Target station station Sat Multiplexed Multiplexed Reference Instruction Name QnPH QnPRH Description been een as CPU CPU section master x2 A compatible instruction Reads the CPU device data of the target station of the target network py e Word device HH zueo H4 Fixed 1 Word device i A compatible instruction Writes data to the CPU device of the target station of the target network No Network module Network module CPU Performs remote STOP to the CPU module of the other station Network module Network module CPU Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 H Hrtweo Word device Clock data Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 5 Channel 6 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Execution i Target station station ae Multiplexed Multiplexed Reference Instruction Name QnPH QnPRH Description oe aie ti CPU CPU section master 2 3 Write clock data to the CPU module of other station Network module
240. icating with intelligent function module gt rsrsrsrsrs Section 3 2 1 2 RAS functions _ Output reset function for communication errors s sree Section 3 2 2 1 Automatic return function sss scr r ttt ttt tenes Section 3 2 2 2 Loop back function Optical loop system ss tttt ttre Section 3 2 2 3 Station detach function Coaxial bus systems se crt rtee Section 3 2 2 4 Transient transmission enabled even at CPU module error Section 3 2 2 5 Checking the transient transmission abnormal direction time Section 3 2 2 6 Diagnostic functions ee ee ee Section 3 2 2 7 Redundant power supply on a remote I O station Section 3 2 2 8 L Online module change on a remote I O station s errr Section 3 2 2 9 Chapter 7 Application Transient transmission function Dedicated link Reading writing remote I O station intelligent function functions Non periodic communication instructions module buffer memory REMFR REMTO Section 7 1 1 1 p Remote I O station system monitor eT Section 7 2 t Device test for remote I O station st tee Section 7 3 Multiplex transmission function Optical loop system sss crt t ttt ttt tenes Section 7 4 Return sequence station number setting function ser t ttt tt ttt teeters Section 7 5 _ Reserved station function ee Ea O eA Section 7 6 Inter
241. in LX LY Set refresh parameters 3 Refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC Network SH 080049 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 Table 2 4 lists the setting items can be set on a remote I O module operating as a remote I O station R and the parameter setting items can be set from GX Developer Table 2 4 Setting Items of Remote I O Station Network module main module switch Moos Stig 4 2 2 Parameter setting PLC system setting a ee ee eee PLCRAS setting a d a WOassignment ya o o a Operation setting o A Section 5 1 2 Ethemetsetting A cCtinkseting A Remote password setting A Section 7 12 GX Configurator setting Initial setting A 7 L_ Auto refresh setting Pe a Always set A Default setting A Set as needed x No need to set x4 Refer to QCPU User s Manual Functional Explanation Program Fundamentals SH 080484ENG 5 Refer to Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic SH 080009 Note that interrupt setting is not available 6 Refer to CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual SH 080394E Note that interrupt setting is not available 7 Refer to the user s manual of the corresponding intelligent function module 2 2 3 Available device ranges The remote I O network can use the following ranges of devices inside network modules Available Range Ox to 3FFFH 16384 points Ox to 3FFFH 1638
242. ine abnormal detection SWOCC ol 0 Clear not instructed Clear instructed valid when on he line abnormal detection SWOCD o 0 Clear not instructed Clear instructed valid when on he loop switch count SWOCE to 0E7 Clear not instructed Clear instructed valid when on lears the transient transmission errors SWOEE SWOEF to 0 Off Clear not instructed On Clear instructed valid when on Designates whether to overwrite or retain the transient transmission errors SWOFO to SWOFF Off Overwrite On Retain Designates the data link operation Off No switch instruction On Switch instruction valid when on When On is detected data link switches from Online normal data link operation to Online debug operation or from Online debug operation to Online normal operation fi B0011 zap l Debug operation l Online operation ova operation Forcibly directs the remote sub master station that is performing master operation to shift to sub master operation It is invalid for the redundant system Off Without directive On With directive Indicates whether the system switching monitoring time setting SW0018 is valid or invalid in case of a data link error Off Invalid On Valid valid at the time of startup Indicates the network module status Off Normal On Abnormal Indicates the network type set with the parameters of the host s network module Off PLC to PLC network On Remote I O network I
243. ing data linking normally No 4 Check the stations that are not executing data linking Check the baton pass status of the applicable station with GX Developer s network monitor Is the applicable station executing the baton pass normally Yes Is the applicable station waiting for parameter communication SB54 On No Did a LINK PARA ERROR occur in the remote master station s CPU No error Value 3 Abnormal common parameters Value of SW49 Review the common parameters and station inherent parameters SW47 Host baton pass status SW48 Cause of host baton pass interruption SW49 Cause of host data linking stop SW54 Parameter information SW55 Parameter setting status 5 Check with SB70 to 72 and SW70 to 73 Yes Reexamine the remote master station network type Use GX Developer system monitor to check whether or not the function version of the master module is Version B Error Check that the network setting and the installation position of the master module match Conduct PC diagnostics Value 4 The remote I O module of the host is faulty Check the status of the remote I O module of the host Value 2 No common Value 1 Valje 6 f parameters Stop designated Communication stopped Set the common parameters Value 1 Is the value of inki Value of SW47 the l
244. ink monitoring time Data linking alue o parameter sufficient No problem stopped for the system Value 2 Data linking stopped Problem Check SW4A Check the data linking stop Check SBO0 to 03 and SW00 to 04 request station and the designation method 8 16 Try setting the link monitoring time to the maximum value e 8 16 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Check the baton pass status of the applicable station with GX Developer s network monitor Are all the stations executing the baton pass normally No y Check the stations that are not executing the baton pass Is the RUN LED of the applicable station lit Yes Is the ERR LED of the applicable station lit Yes Value of SW47 Value 1F Online tests Value 6 Being disconnected no baton pass lt Troubleshooting gt Change the mode switch to online Or wait for the current online test being executed by other station to complete Read SW42 Host No SW659 Maximum number of link stations SW5A Maximum normal baton pass station Is the host number included Yes Value 1 Offline Value of SW48 Value 3 or more Error code Y lt Troubleshooting gt Correct the error according to the error code lt Troubleshooting gt Change the module switch to online 8 17 Values 111 to 144 Online tests No Is the PLC power supply on AEE lt
245. ink registers Host communication status SW0047 1F Offline test Cause of communication interruption SW0048 2 Offline test Offline test status on requesting side SWOOAC gt 7 Self loopback test Offline test results on requesting side SWOOAD 0 Normal 1orlarger Error code For details on how to check the error contents see Chapter 8 If two or more modules are installed the testing status and the result of each module can be checked by adding 2004 to the corresponding device number 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 7 2 Internal self loopback test This test checks the hardware of a standalone network module including the send receive circuit of the transmission system 1 Do not connect the optical fiber cable with the QU71LP21 QJ72LP25 network module for LPthe optical loop system However make sure that the exterior random light does not enter from the connector Do not connect cables or terminal resistors if the QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15 network module for the coaxial bus system is used For QJ71LP21 QJ72LP25 For QJ71LP21 QJ72BR15 optical loop system coaxial bus system Do not allow exterior random light to enter Do not connect anything Set the mode setting switch of the network module to 2 Set it to 6 when using the QJ71LP21 QJ72LP25 at 25Mbps The internal self loopback test is selected
246. ink special registers SW0020 to SWO01FF used by the system 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q d The output of the remote I O station is held while master operation is switched from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station Av C CEEE BHI ORAHA Output is held during system switching Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station e Ifthe multiplexed remote master station returns to the normal status while the multiplexed remote sub master station controls remote I O stations the multiplexed remote master station will perform sub master operation as the standby system Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station standby system control system miii Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station 7 11 2 Master operation by the station that has started up as the control system The network module mounted in the station that has started up as the control system performs master operation The network module mounted in the standby system station performs sub master operation For the determination of the control system or standby system refer to the QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Which of the multiplexed remote master station or multiplexed remote sub master station are controlling remote I O station
247. ints Start End 32 0110 O12F 32 0110 O12F 48 000 O12F 48 0000 O02F v 4 1 4 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b CPU module Refresh parameters Sets the input output range for refreshing between the CPU module and master module Link eerie PLC side a Dev name Points _Stat Transfer SB a eG Transfer SW e p a ea Random cyclic rl a Random cyclic LW fT Transfert w o i a a Transter3 0100 ma 2F Transter4 mn m Transfer5 Transfer6 c Remote I O module Intelligent parameter Initial settings Set so that channel 1 is sampling process channel 2 is 50 times of average processing channel 3 is 100 ms of average processing 1 x1 Note that the number of intelligent function module parameters that may be set for initial setting is limited The number of parameters that may be set for initial setting is as follows Sum total of the numbers of parameters within the setting ranges of all intelligent function modules lt 512 If the number of parameters set exceeds the limited number the remote I O module detects the SP PARA ERROR 3301 error Initial setting Module information Module model name Q64AD Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type A D Conversion Module Setting tem Setting value CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable 1 The number of Q64AD parameters CH1 Sampling process averaging process setting Sampling ee an CHT Time numb
248. ion Program example Switching command m S M2 7 M2 SB71 SB75 R ST B R master R master R sub master baton pass cyclic switch status transmission command SB1C4 SB1C5 RST B14 R sub master R sub master R sub master switch switch switch acceptance status command 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Startup of multiplexed remote sub master station only By setting the same parameters as the multiplexed remote master station the multiplexed remote sub master station continues the control of the remote I O stations if it is powered on and then off while controlling the remote I O stations However the outputs of the remote I O stations are cleared when the multiplexed remote sub master stations resumes the controls Except items Network type and Starting I O No set the parameter of the multiplexed remote sub master station the same as the multiplexed remote master station Set the same parameters as the 7 multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station sub master station BEE When control is resumed outputs are cleared a Remote I O station Remote I O station If the multiplexed remote master station has returned to the system and performs sub master operation the multiplexed remote master station controls the remote I O stations Remote I O station b This function enables the remote I O stati
249. ion Station No 0 No 3 No 6 No 4 IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT T H a i aK va 1 my Fj Se aoe Il p abo i ploy OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN Station Station Station Station No 1 No 7 No 2 No 5 Reverse loop direction gt Loopback Faulty station Station order check test Network info Station order check test Network NET H Loop Network No Test method Object module Type Remote 1 0 master station Group No Parameter designation Module 1 Module No 1 Station No C All stations designation f Loop status Loopback No of stations Forward direction 4 Station Reverse direction 2 Station Execution results acta e Forward loop direction from own station 0 gt 6 4 2 E A AE EIET EE A E A E E eee eee eee P Reverse loop direction from own station F S S See 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 10 4 Communication test This test checks whether or not data communication can normally be performed between the host and a destination station designated with network number and station number Especially when the destination has another network number the relay network and station numbers are displayed So make sure that the routing parameters are properly set In the following system when the communication test is conducted to 4Ns6 of network number 4 by the GX Developer connected to 1MR 2Mp2 of network number 2 the monitor screen shown bel
250. ion status SBOOAB Online test response 171 completion Off Response not completed P On Response completed Indicates the offline test instruction status Brea Offline test instruction Off Not instructed On Instructed SBOOAD Indicates the offline test completion status 173 ine test completion Off Not completed On Completed SBOOAE Offline testin Indicates the response status for offline test g Off No response 174 Response designation On Response SBOOAF Offine testing Indica Be the response status for offline test end 175 Off No response end Response end On Response end SBOOEE Indicates the transient transmission error status 238 Transient error Off No error On Errors exist Indicates the status of accepting the directive to shift from master operation to sub master operation Off Without acceptance On With acceptance Indicates the operation status of a shift from master operation to Remote sub master sub master operation station switching status Off Without shift On Shift completion Indicates whether the send receive device numbers SW01C8 to 3 Send receive device SWO01CF of the remote master station or remote sub master SB01C8 number valid invalid station are valid or invalid Off Invalid On Valid Indicates whether there is a mismatch between the network types of the control station and normal stations on the network When the control station is in the MELSECNET H E
251. is errors F 7 S Error M9008 error A Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations ON Self diagnosis restored OFF No error common O Rem Error common information When SM0 is ON ON if there is error common z p i S Error New information ON Error common ormation information OFF No error common Error individual information When SMO is ON ON if there is error individual gt k S Error New ormation ON Error common nformation information OFF gt ON Error reset e Conducts error reset operation Comes ON even if there is only one output module with a lown fuse OFF Normal blown fuse and remains ON even after return to normal ON Module with blown fuse Blown fuse state is checked even for remote I O station output modules e Comes ON if there is a discrepancy between the actual 1 O modules and the registered information when the power is turned on I O module verification is also conducted for remote I O station modules OFF Normal Goes ON when at least one module is in the status ON There is a module where the external power supply is OFF Stays ON even whose external power after normal operation is restored supply is OFF x Applicable only for Q series module For future use Diagnostic errors I O module OFF Normal verification error ON Error Detection of SM120 external power supply OFF 2 System information agi as Set PAUSE enable OFF PAUSE disabled e P
252. is error of the CPU module 1414 1415 1510 1520 2000 2011 2100 2103 An error is detected on the system bus Fault of the main or extension base unit was detected The voltage of one power supply module dropped on the redundant base unit A fault of one redundant power supply module was detected in the redundant power supply system The I O module status is different from the I O module information at power ON I O module or intelligent function module is not installed properly or installed on the base unit The QA1S60B or QA6LB was used as the base unit In the I O assignment setting of PLC parameter Inteli intelligent function module was allocated to an I O module or vice versa In the I O assignment setting of the PLC parameter switch setting was made to the module that has no switch setting e A value smaller than the points for the actually mounted intelligent function module is set in the I O assignment setting of the PLC parameter The QI60 is loaded MELSEC Q Corrective Action The Remote I O module base unit and or the intelligent function module that was accessed is experiencing a hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Reset the Remote I O module If the same error is displayed again the intelligent function module Remote O module or base unit is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Check the power supplied to
253. isassemble or modify the module It may cause breakdowns malfunctions injuries or fire 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 Stopping the CPU Unintentional Output Prevention Set the CPU module s RUN STOP switch 1 to the STOP side STOP RUN 1 Use the RESET STOP RUN switch for the QOOJCPU QOOCPU or Q01CPU Cay 4 5 Checking the Input Power Supply Voltage Check that the supply power voltage to the power supply module is within the specifications 4 6 Powering On Check the power supply to the network module 4 6 1 Checking the on status of the POWER LED of the power supply module powe The POWER LED lights up at the same time when the PLC system is powered on a ea 4 6 2 Checking the on status of the RUN LED of the network module Remote master station The RUN LED lights up in green when the network module of remote master station RUN MNG and remote I O station is operating normally D ei If this LED does not light up see Chapter 8 Troubleshooting ERR L ERR ke N Remote I O station RUNE REM T PASS D LINK SD RD ERR L ERR Loo am 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 7 Standalone Check of the Network Module Offline Tests Before executing the data link operation check the network module and the cables Select a test using the mode setting switch on the front of
254. itsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller
255. k standby system 2 Errors on a remote I O station cannot be detected by the PLC CPU of the master operation station Check item Checking procedure Hasn t an error occurred on a remote I O station of Check the product information of the network module of the remote I O station by the function of version C or older system monitor of GX Developer 3 Cyclic data are turned off continuously or instantaneously when system switching is performed on QnNPRHCPU Check item Checking procedure r Confirm if the devices in the send range of the host is set as tracking devices with the Is the send range of the host a tracking range parameters of GX Developer 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 2 8 Checking for incorrect fiber optic cable connection during online This section explains the checking procedure for incorrect fiber optic cable connection IN IN OUT OUT during online and the link special registers SW009C to SWOO9F used for the check Unlike the loop test the checking procedure given in this section allows a check without stopping a data link If incorrect cable connection is found correct the wiring after shutting off all phases of the system Before starting the check given in this section make sure that the following conditions are satisfied If these are not satisfied conduct a loop test to make a check The fiber optic cables have no breaks Both the forward and reverse loop cables are normal There
256. l registers Configuring a redundant power supply on a remote I O station e Online module change in a remote I O station Application function e Remote password for remote I O station 1 1 communication Monitor program upload download etc e Various send receive commands from the PLC program READ WRITE REMFR REMTO Number of I O points 32 points Intelligent function module 32 points 5V DC internal current consumption 0 75 A 1 10 A Weight 0 11 kg 0 16 kg 1 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 2 On a multiplexed remote I O network one of 32 remote I O stations works as a multiplexed remote sub master station 3 There are restrictions on the interstation cable length depending on the number of connected stations Refer to Section 4 8 2 for details 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 1 3 Optical fiber cable specifications The following shows the specifications for the optical fiber cable used in the MELSECNET H loop system Confirm the details of the optical fiber specifications by the cable that is being used The optical fiber cables and connectors are dedicated parts Optical fiber cable with connectors are sold by Mitsubishi System Service A catalogue of optical fiber cables is available Mitsubishi System Service can also provide installation Contact your nearest representative for details Table 3 3 Optical fiber cable specifi
257. lable range Ou to 3FFFu 16384 points Ou to 3FFFu 16384 points Ou to 1FFFu 8192 points The device range excluding that of I O module mounted on the host Ou to 1FFFu 8192 points station should be assigned to each network module 10004 20001 30001 3FFFH 0 4096 8192 12288 16383 Extended x1 CPU module B W Network module LB LW WII TJ VV CPU module X Y Actual 1 0 Network module LX LY Actual vof Z Y Available device range x1 Expandable by changing from PLC parameters Device settings 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 4 Multiple Remote I O Network 2 4 1 Configuration A multiple remote I O network system is a network system with many networks connected to it Set so that a network number will not duplicate another If there are no duplications setting can be anywhere within a range from 1 to 239 On the QCPU a maximum of four network modules can be mounted 1MR 2MR QCPU QJ71 QJ71 LP21 Power supply Remote I O net Remote I O net 2 4 2 Setting items amp QU72 ivojvo QU72 0 V 0 3 3 3 z LP25 z z z z O O O O A A A A 1R1 1R2 2R1 2R2 1 Table 2 7 shows the setting items for the master module main module for remote master station MR and the parameter settings from the GX Developer Table 2 7 Remote master station setting items Network module main module switch IST
258. le eles oe Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores both the online test item requested by the requesting station and the faulty station Valid when the SBOOAQ is on Stations disconnected from the network are not included among the faulty stations because there is no response b15 to b8 b7 to SW00A8 Faulty station number Test item number 10 Loop test 20 Setup confirmation test 30 Station order check test 40x Communication test When there are multiple faulty stations the station number detected first is stored Stores the online result on the requesting side Valid when the SBOOA9 is on 0 Test normal Other than 0 Test error content see the error codes in Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued Remote I O Control station Optical Optical O BpE O O O O O MELSEC Q Remote master station Coaxial station Section 8 3 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 21 App 21 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued Use permitted prohibited Control PETOLE Remote I O Name Description 8 A master station x station station Optical Coaxial Optical Coaxial Optical Coaxial Optical Coaxial Stores the online test items on the responding side Valid when the SBOOAB is on Stations disconnected from the n
259. le on a remote I O station from GX Configurator the buffer memory of the intelligent function module can be read written from the remote master station using LW For details refer to Section 3 2 1 Screen setting a M station gt A station M station lt R station M station gt A station M station lt R station B B wW W StationNo 1080 10FF 1100 1117F 0100 017F Allocation An LW allocation is illustrated below The following is an example where LW of the master module is automatically refreshed to the area starting from WO in the CPU module Remote I O statiom 1R1 Remote master station 1Mr Intelligent function Remote I O module a sa module CPU module Master module te eee Receive from remote I O 1R3 Maa ANE All 1 The intelligent function module parameters automatic refresh setting must be set by GX Configurator The link device LB LW data of the remote master station are refreshed to the internal user devices e g B W of the CPU module to be used in sequence programs For details of the automatic refresh refer to Section 5 1 5 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 1 Set so that the M station gt R station and M station R station do not overlap Good example Bad example R1 R1 nhe R station M station 7 R station 2 When the MELSECNET H remote I O network u
260. lexed remote sub master station is expressed with the formula below An error has occurred on the multiplexed remote master station K1 Network Multiplexed remote sub master station Switching time Switching time from the multiplexed remote master station to the multiplexed remote sub master station Ds2 Ds2 K1 Cs Cm ms K1 Internal processing time When a power failure or CPU module stop error occurs 620ms e When a system switching is caused by the followings execution of system switching instruction system switching request by GX Developer or link cable disconnection on other network module 160ms Cs Normal station baton passing cyclic communication initializing time Number of normal stations x 9 ms Cm Error station baton passing cyclic communication initializing time Number of error stations X 16 ms only if any error station is found 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 4 Output holding time during system switching in the multiplexed remote I O network for redundant system In the multiplexed remote I O network for redundant system if an error occurs in the multiplexed remote master station of the control system the multiplexed remote sub master station of the standby system takes over the control of remote I O stations At the time of system switching remote I O stations hold the outputs data The output holding time of remote I O stations during system switching differs with the reason o
261. loop test 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Starting the test Set the STOP RUN switch of the CPU module to STOP position When resetting the CPU module use the RESET L CLR switch Perform this operation on the station to be tested first then on the station to execute the test Center RESET Center a at 3 nx 3 a4 a4 x5 5 Sot STOP RUN STOP RUN RESET L CLR RESET L CLR 3 Checking the test result The T PASS LED of the network module flashes at approximately 0 5 s intervals The T PASS LED flashes when the test is normal and the ERR LED flashes when an error occurs Normal test result a Before test Before test Test complete Switch position gt during RESET during STOP RUN MNG RUN ff MNG f T PASS D LINK T PASS D LINK Test is completed when Display section gt SDE ERD soi HRD T PASS I flashes 20 times approximately 10 s ERR LERR Abnormal test result o Before test Before test Test complete Switch position gt during RESET during STOP Display section gt Flashing of the ERR LED indicates an error Or JL ERR lt Possible causes of errors gt A loopback was executed because of a wiring error a faulty optical fiber cable or
262. lt 1to64 Other logical channel number is set Sets the logical channel number for physical channel number 7 Valid only for channels on the receiving side 0 Logical channel number 7 default 1to64 Other logical channel number is set Sets the logical channel number for physical channel number 8 Valid only for channels on the receiving side 0 Logical channel number 8 default 1to64 Other logical channel number is set Set the time from the occurrence of a data link error to the recognition of data link stop in the redundant system 0 2 seconds default Units of 10 ms Units of 10 ms for 10 ms to 5 seconds Indicates the change of the number of retries for the time of the issue of a request in send and receive instructions 0 7 times default 1to7 Setting exists Indicates the change of the retry interval for the time of the issue of a request in send and receive instructions 0 100 ms default 1toFEx Setting exists unit ms 1 to 500 Indicates the change of the number of gates for the time of the issue of a request in send and receive instructions 0 7 default 1to EF Setting exists Stores the status of the network module 0 Normal Other than 0 Abnormal see the error codes in Section 8 3 FF Module error Indicates the processing result of the ZNRD instruction 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion see the error codes in Section 8 3 Indicates the processing r
263. ltiple remote I O network Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU First 5 digits of the serial No are 04012 or lator QO02CPU QO02HCPU QO6HCPU Remote I O network Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Function version B or lator Version 6 or lator Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 5 2 Applicable systems for remote I O stations This section provides precautions on system configuration for use of remote I O stations 1 Applicable base units Listed below are the main base units applicable to remote I O modules Mount a remote I O module to a CPU slot of any of the following main base units Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Slim type main base unit Main base unit for the redundant power supply system 2 Network type The available network type varies depending on the function version of the remote module and the version of GX Developer Network type Remote I O module GX Developer Multiplexed remote I O network for i Function version D or later redundant system iersian 6 GF latee UIP Ie relate Linear Function version B or lator Remote I O network 3 Applicable modules The Q series modules are applicable to remote I O stations Note that the following modules have some restrictions Module Name Base unit for remote I O modules 1 Dae QITSBRQIERB et 2 Max mountable remote I O modules 1 Q6LB Q6URB Q5LB 1 2 3 Max mountable stages 7 QA1S6LB QA6LB Q6LRP is applicable to Q6LIRB EEE CO
264. ly when an error has occurred Maximum number of stations that return to system in a link scan setting 3 1 It ranges from the first address to the end of the device with allocation setting by the common parameters If there are empty areas midway they are included in the number 2 If simultaneous transient transmissions are performed from multiple stations during one link scan it totals the data length of the sending and receiving frames 0 when not used 3 Set the maximum number of stations that return to system in a link scan using the supplementary settings in the common parameters Refer to section 5 1 4 3 44 3 44 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 5 Refresh time with the remote I O network module input output module and intelligent function module Refresh time with the remote I O network module input output module and intelligent function module is according to the formula shown below Input output module and refresh time TRIOR XK 16 x 0 0016 Xz 16 x 0 0024 YK 16 x 0 0014 Yz 16 x 0 0022 ms Trior I O refresh time Xk Number of input modules mounted to main base unit Multiples of 16 Xz Number of input modules mounted to extension base unit Multiples of 16 Yx Number of output modules mounted to main base unit Multiples of 16 Yz Number of output modules mounted to extension base unit Multiples of 16 The number of input output modules ranges as follows The input module is the
265. m CPU module Network module MELSECNET H Condition check MAIN N Conditions matched Interrupt condition 150 a parameters cee hL o ee ei program n Td e Register data IRET Normal e Network status END 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 4 Enhanced RAS functions Refer to Section 3 2 2 RAS functions a When a faulty station recovers and can resume normal operation it automatically returns to the network to resume the data communication using the automatic return function b By using the loopback function the optical loop system it is possible to continue data transmission among operational stations by disconnecting faulty areas such as a part of the network where there is a cable disconnection a faulty station etc c By using the station detach function coaxial bus system even when some of the connected stations are down due to power off etc the normal communication can be continued among other operational stations d The network module can continue the transient transmission even if an error that stops the CPU module while the system is operating occurs e Itis possible to check the time when a transient error occurred f By mounting 2 power supply modules on a remote I O station either of them can be replaced without powering off the station Redundant power supply on remote I O station The redundant power supply base unit is required for mountin
266. m m a 2 QJ71LP21GE QJ72LP25GE Remote master station Remote I O station Remote I O station QJ71LP21GE QJ72LP25GE QJ72LP25GE Optical module N Optical fiber cable b Installing the optical fiber cable The following shows how to install the optical fiber cable q Start Installation Jack 4 A Projection Insert the plug by aligning the groove of Linkmogule the plug with the projection of the jack Y Push the plug in until the plug fixing hole catches the hook of the jack Pull the plug lightly in the direction of the arrow to make sure that it is securely connected Complete 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q c Removing the optical fiber cable The following shows how to remove the optical fiber cable Start Removal Press the fixed sections of the plug in the directions of the arrows and pull out the plug Put the covers which were attached to the plug before installation back on both the plug and jack to store POINT Data link operation may be executed even if IN and IN or OUT and OUT are connected with an optical fiber cable However the loopback function the network diagnostic function and some of other functions do not operate normally So make sure to connect OUT and IN The wiring status can be checked by either of the following methods 1 When checking by stopping data link Co
267. master operating station is off 2 The ERR LED flashes on the following modules whose first five digits of the serial number is 02112 or later e QJ71LP21 e QJ71LP21 25 QJ71BR11 4 3 4 3 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 Station No settings on a multiplexed remote I O network for redundant system For the network module mounted on the station multiplexed remote master station to which the system A connector of tracking cable is connected set the station No 0 If the station No other than 0 is set the PLC CPU will detect the LINK PARA ERROR error code 3101 For the network module mounted on the station multiplexed remote sub master station to which system B connector of tracking cable is connected set the station No in the range of 1 to 64 If the station No 0 is set the PLC CPU will detect the LINK PARA ERROR error code 3101 Set the station No within Set the station No to 0 the range of 1 to 64 Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station Power supply module Power supply QnPRHCPU Network module Network module QnPRHCPU module Tracking cable 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 2 2 QJ72LP25 25 QU72LP25G QU72LP25GE QJ72BR15 2 ReS 232 connector For connecting RS 232 connector for peripheral equipment eee rian 3 STATION No Factor
268. meter Set a station number that is equal to the host station number or larger The hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative FD1A Station with duplicated station number Check the duplicate station number and correct it Test abort error The ongoing test was interrupted due to the resetting of the test executing station There is a faulty station on the networks 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Table 8 1 Error code list Continued Error No Description of error Corrective measure There is no need to take corrective measures because the system retries the operation do not switch the loop in the middle of the operation Interruption error due to loop switching during test If the error frequently occurs check the line and the wiring status System error The hardware of the NIWOT module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Bus topology test disabled error Conduct a test that can be executed in the bus topology Create and write new network parameters to the PLC FD20 Mode error If the error recurs the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative FD21 Hardware error send interrupt error The cable was disconnected during the online test FD22 Hardware error receive interrupt error Reconnect the cable and continue the online test FD23 Data comparison error Check for faulty cables faulty hardware in
269. meter communication reserved station or unconnected station e Highlighted display During parameter communication Displays the abnormal parameter status of each station SW007C to 7F e Normal display Normal parameter reserved station or unconnected station e Highlighted display Abnormal parameter CPU operation status of each station SW0080 to 83 SW0088 to 8B The operation status of the remote I O module is displayed When the communication status of each station is normal the display is effective e Normal indication Normal reserved station and unconnected station e Reversed indication Error minor Severe moderate WDT error etc major hardware error etc Loop status of each station SW0091 to 94 SW0095 to 98 Displays the status of the forward reverse loops in case of the optical loop system e Normal display Normal reserved station or unconnected station e Highlighted display Abnormal Reserved station designation each station SW0064 to 67 Displays the setting status of a reserved station e Normal display Unreserved station e Highlighted display Reserved station PSU operation status of each station extension SWO08C to 8F Displays the supply status of the external power 24 V DC of the network module When the communication status of each station is normal the display is effective e Normal display Not powered by 24 V DC or network module without supply terminal e Highlighted dis
270. meters and remote password 1 The following settings can be performed for the I O assignment 1 Input module for I O response time 2 Output module error time output mode 3 I O assignment 4 Setting switches for intelligent function module 2 Refer to the intelligent function module user s manual for details about intelligent function module parameters 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q Table 5 1 Remote master station network parameter setting items Network station type Reference Remote master station Parameter setting item era Settings with the network module Section 4 3 4 3 ae eer Mode moD Section 43 2 Settings with GX Developer aan haa Setting the number of module cards network type Section 6 1 1 Network settings PY Section 5 1 2 Staring ono Section 5 1 2 1 NetworkNo Section 5 1 2 2 Total stations Section 5 1 2 3 Group No Section 5 1 2 4 Mode Section 5 1 2 65 Common parameters Section 5 1 3 Send range of each station LY seting _ Section Send range of each station LB LW settings Section 5 1 3 2 ea e a eoaionts Supplemental settings Section 5 1 4 rs Se Cn i Al Maximum number of return stations perscan a Multiplextransmission o oa S Instruction to guarantee send data per station A Instruction to guarantee receive data per station A fTransientsettings Sooo a y Refresh parameters odo Section 5 1 5 Valid module
271. mission LB LW LX LY periodic communication The transmission delay time of B W Y communication is the sum of the following e Scan times of multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station Except for the link refreshing time e Link refresh times of multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station e Link scan time of multiplexed remote master station Calculate the sum as shown below Transmission delay time of B W Y communication 1 Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station Transmission delay time Tpm1 Multiplexed remote master station side scan time Sm gt Link scan time LS Tom1 Sm a m LS Ss x 2 a s ms Multiplexed remote master station side scan time Sm lt Link scan time LS Tpm1 Sm a m x round up LS Sm a m LS Ss x 2 a s ms 2 Multiplexed remote sub master station Multiplexed remote master station Transmission delay time Tps1 Multiplexed remote master station side scan time Sm gt Link scan time LS Tos1 Ss a s Sm a m x 2 Sm ms Multiplexed remote master station side scan time Sm lt Link scan time LS Tps1 Ss a s Sm am x round up LS Sm a m x 2 Sm ms Sm Multiplexed remote master station side scan time Ss Multiplexed remote sub master station side scan time am Multiplexed remote master station side link refresh time as Multi
272. module Off Normal station On Control station When remote I O network Indicates the station type set with the parameter of the host s network module Off Remote station On Remote master station or multiplexed remote master station Indicates the switch setting information including parameter settings of the host s network module Off Normal On Abnormal setting Indicates the switch setting information including parameter settings of the host s network module Off Normal data linking On Operating in debug mode Indicates the host s baton pass status transient transmission enabled Off Normal On Abnormal When PLC to PLC network Indicates the host s status Off Normal station On Control station SB0044 is on Sub control station SB0044 is off When remote I O network Indicate the host status Off Remote I O station On SB0044 On Remote master station or multiplexed remote master station SB0044 Off Remote I O station or multiplexed remote sub master station Indicates the host s data link operation status Off Normal On Abnormal Set after refreshing completes Indicates the host s CPU status Off Normal On Minor error occurred Indicates the host s CPU status Off Normal On A serious or fatal error occurred Indicates the startup acknowledgment status of the cyclic transmission Off Not acknowledged SB0000 is off On Start acknowledged SB0000 is on the completion status of the cyclic transmission ot comple
273. mote master station common parameters PLC parameters written to the remote I O station will not cause problems with the input output module communication even with the default settings Change the settings of the PLC parameters as needed Remote master station Remote I O station QCPU Master module Remote I O module Input module Output module x Y LX LY LX LY 0 to OF 10 to 1F 0 Actual I O Actual I O 1010 101F 41010 TM ojo w S o co x a al A w N gt ox 1FFF 1FFF 1 When XO for the input module for the remote I O station is set to on the X1000 for the remote I O station is set to on 2 When Y1010 for the remote master station is set to on the Y10 for the remote I O station output module is set to on 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Communicating with intelligent function module The remote master station can communicate with the intelligent function module mounted to the remote I O station in the following four ways 7 Methods for communicating with the intelligent module When the intelligent function module is mounted to a nearby slot of the CPU module the same kind of sequence program can be created Regular time data can ibe read without regard to timing By cyclic
274. mountable modules The table below lists the CPU modules that can be mounted with a master module and the number of mountable master modules Applicable module Number of mountable modules QO0JCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU Not mountable Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 1 Up to 4 Available only in Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU including any in PLC to PLC Q mode 2 networks Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU x1 Use a CPU module whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 02092 or lator x2 See the QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 2 Base unit A master module can be mounted to any I O slot 1 of a main base unit or an extension base unit 1 Within the number of I O points of the CPU module 3 Supporting multiple CPU systems Before using a master module in a multiple CPU system see the QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System To construct the remote I O network with a multiple CPU system use a master module of function version B or later For precautions for the use in a multiple CPU system see Section 2 6 4 Network type The available network type varies depending on the CPU module type the function version of the master module and the version of GX Developer Network type CPU module Master module GX Developer Multiplexed remote VO network 55RHCPU Q25PRHCPU _ Funetion version D or lator version 8 18U or for redudant system lator Function version B or lator Version 7 10L or lator Mu
275. mp and smoothed down to the clamp Insulating material Internal ae van 0 12 in Shp Na and external conductor 6mm 0 24 in 4 Solder the contact to the internal conductor Solder here 5 Insert the connector assembly shown in 4 into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell S The following precautions should be observed when soldering the internal conductor and contact e Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section e Make sure that there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulating material and that they do not cut into each other e Solder as quick as possible so the insulating material does not deform Before connecting or disconnecting the coaxial connector touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may result in a module malfunction 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 2 Function Specifications The following introduces the MELSECNET H remote I O network functions The list of the functions is shown below Basic Cyclic transmission function Communicating with input output module str tee Section 3 2 1 1 functions Periodic communication Communicating with intelligent function module 55 rsrsr Section 3 2 1 2 RAS functions Output reset function for communication errors srt tt tte Section 3 2 2 1 Automatic return function sss sss ttt t ttt ttt
276. mple in the system shown below where the IN OUT connectors of station number 5 are connected in reverse conduct a loop test using the GX Developer connected to remote master station The monitoring screen below is displayed after the loop test has been executed and station No 5 is detected as the receive direction error station m GX Developer Remote master station Reserved station Loopback Station Station Station Station No 0 No 3 No 6 No 4 IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT Se S va 1 I Ey zr 1 OUT IN OUT IN IN OUT Station Station Station No 1 No 2 No 5 Loopback Faulty station Loop test Network info Loop test Network NET H Loop Network No Test method Object module Type Remote 0 master station Group No P vw Parameter a Module No 1 Station No designation Moe Total No of stations Pen VARREN All stati Baaai Receive direction error s Iien Forward _ Reverse E station No direction 4Station direction 2Station Number of stations not Remote master station Normal responding Execution results J Norma E vao EER R CCEIve die ne JI Non responding station ee ee RNA Non tesponding station Po 3 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 a1 42 43 44 45 a6 a7 a8 Receive direction error ecelve n JI Non responding station In the loop test data link is stopped to check the wiring status To check the wiring status without s
277. mpletion request flag flag BCD D13 K4Y20 M120 4 195 SET Y20F J Read Error completion clear flag request Y20F X20F X 197 4 LRST Y20F J Error Error Error reset generated clear request flag request 200 MCR NO 201 END MELSEC Q 7 10 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Q64AD Communication program for Q64AD SB47 H K4 0 HT J Host baton 1 ms timer pass status SB49 H K3 E J _ _AAaAAA TOF x Host data 1 ms timer link status SW70 0 H K4 24 T102 D Station No 1 baton 1 ms timer pass status SW74 0 H K3 29 T103 gt Station No 1 1 ms timer cyclic transmission status SW78 0 H K3 34 4 __ 104 gt Station No 1 1 ms timer parameter signal status B20 T100 T101 T102 T103 T104 39 MC NO M1000 J Network 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 5 f module timer timer timer timer timer status PLS M1010 J NO Sa M1000 Initial setting data writ process M1010 49 PLS M1012 M1011 Initial setting request lt Permit A D conversion of CH1 to4 gt M1012 X210 67 H HOV KO D1000 Module READY lt CH1 average cycles gt ov K50 D1001 J lt CH2 average cycles gt c f nov K50 D1002 J lt CH3 average cycles gt gt M K50 D1003 lt CH4 average cycles gt HOV K50 D1004 lt Average process designation gt _f ov HOFOO D1009 Zp RENTO J1 K4 K1 H1 KO D1000 K10 M1100 Write completion flag 7 11 7 11 7
278. n 1 As shown below set the send and receive parameters as needed These settings can be made using the common parameters supplementary settings only for the control station e Default Disabled Network range assignments Supplementary settings Secured data send Secured data receive By selecting both Secured data send and Secured data receive an interlock for the link data between the stations to be set becomes unnecessary CPU module device W Network module LW Updated persion Refresh A Station number 1 of refresh A Updated portion Station number 2 of refresh B Remesi B Host Station number 3 Updated portion lial Station number 4 lt Precautions gt 1 In order to enable the block guarantee per station it is necessary to set the refresh parameters See Section 5 1 5 2 Itis not necessary to set the block guarantee of cyclic data per station for remote I O stations For the transmission delay time calculation for the case where the Secured data send receive is set enabled see Section 3 3 2 1 a and 2 a POINT 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 6 3 Communication Between Input Output Module and Intelligent Function Module This section introduces the settings that are required to allow the CPU module to communicate with the remote I O station input output module and the intelligent function module using cyclic transmission The following example is u
279. n station breaks from network it is not included with error stations because there is no response Off line testing to to bO Execution item Response side Item number est forward loop est reverse loop Stores results of request side offline test Enabled when SBOOAF is on pas Off line testing results Response side 0 Test normal ii Other than 0 Test error content see the error codes in Section 8 3 App 22 App 22 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued sea Control Normal Remote Remote I O Description i master N station station j station station Optical Optical Coaxial Optical Optical Stores each station s forward loop usage status during multiplex transmission 0 Uses other than the forward loop 1 Uses the forward loop 2 SW00B0 176 SWO00B1 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi bO cary atperteronison swooso fro Ts aafe Tse 3 2 swoos2 smoor oz forf ao fae ar a e e 7 sooo ae ar fee fae Te orf fos m SW00B3 179 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores each station s reverse loop usage status during multiplex transmission 0 Uses other than the reverse loop 1 Uses the reverse loop 2 SW00B4 180 SWOO0B5 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 gai ies tatan EEEE EEIE swo0ee pe Pa wo oe Pe ar aoe a ey soose ae farf aefa e ore as 183 Numbers 1
280. n the link scan time constant If the response time is long for the transient transmission function setting the constant link scan function may reduce the response time Set a value in the following range to use a constant scan time Setting time Not executed default 1 to 500 ms Executed using the set time 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 2 Maximum No of return to system stations in 1 scan see Section 3 2 2 Set the number of faulty stations that can return to the network in one link scan e Valid number of stations 1 to 64 stations Default 2 stations Since link scan time may be extended when a station error occurs if the number of stations has been increased in the settings carefully change the settings 3 With multiplex transmission see Section 7 4 Set this item when executing the multiplex transmission function The multiplex transmission function is used when both the forward and reverse loops are in the normal status to speed up the transmission rate using both loops at the same time This setting can be made when there are four or more remote I O stations Default No multiplex transmission 4 Secured data send Secured data receive Set these items when executing the link data separation prevention per station in the cyclic transmission This allows multiple word data manipulation without interlocks However the separation prevention 1 is valid only for the refresh processing between the CPU module an
281. ndicates the station supports the redundant function or not Off Redundant function not supported On Redundant function supported Indicates the external power supply status to QJ71LP21S 25 When using QJ71LP21 25 0 is ON Off Not supplied On Supplied Indicates the mode set by the switch of the host s network module Off Online mode setting is 0 or 4 Parameter setting mode becomes valid On Other than online mode setting is other than 0 the forward loop the reverse loop 6 The SB0009 should be kept on until the SWOOCE becomes 0 App 4 Optical Coaxial MELSEC Q Use permitted prohibited Remote master station Remote I O station App 4 APPENDIX B0044 68 Station setting host SB0045 Setting information 69 host SB0046 Data link operation 70 designation result host SB0047 Baton pass status 71 host Control station status host 3 SB0048 72 Remote master station status host 580049 Host data link status ransmission start acknowledgment status ransmission start completion status Cyclic transmission stop acknowledgment status ransmission stop SB004F completion status ransmission start iain acknowledgment status 80 Table 1 Special link relay SB list Continued Description When PLC to PLC network Indicates the station type set with the parameter of the host s network
282. nduct a loop test in the network diagnostics of GX Developer Refer to Section 4 10 1 2 When checking without stopping data link Check the status of SW009C to 9F Refer to Section 8 2 8 4 8 2 Coaxial bus system 1 Precautions in connecting a Restrictions on the cable length between the stations 1 When connecting between the network modules the cable lengths indicated in the table below should be used according to the number of stations connected A communication error may occur if a cable length other than the lengths indicated in the table is used Number of stations connected 2 to 9 stations 10 to 33 stations Station to station cable length 1 28tjiosmieat o o o o 5064ft to13 m4265 o o x x 25 175 63t to 300m 9843 o o o o 300 98 43 tto 500 musson x do o o o do o x do o QO Allowed X Not allowed 2 Ifthere is a possibility of adding more stations to expand the existing system the cables should be installed by considering restriction 1 mentioned above in advance 3 When using a repeater module models A6BR10 or A6BR10 DC use the station to station cable length for 10 to 33 stations regardless of the number of stations connected or the number of repeater modules 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION b MELSEC Q Cable installation precautions 1 Install the coaxial cables at least 100 mm 3 94 in away from other power cables an
283. nected by optical fiber cable will become shorter Accordingly the communication speed can either be set to 10 Mbps or another optical fiber cable can be installed 7 The multiplex master function has been changed in the following specifications Processing when the faulty multiplexed remote master station has returned to system normally The multiplexed remote master station of the MELSECNET 10 cannot participate in a data link if it returns to normal while the remote I O stations are being controlled by the multiplexed remote sub master station The multiplexed remote master station of the MELSECNET H can participate in a data link as the sub master master operating station by making parameter setting 8 The parallel master function cannot be used since it is not supported App 2 App 2 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 Link Special Relay SB List x1 x3 SB0000 0 x1 x3 SB0001 1 x1 x3 SB0002 2 x1 x3 SB0003 3 SB0005 5 1 SB0006 6 Link startup host Link stop host System link startup System link stop Clear retry count Clear communication error count The link special relay turns on off by various factors that occur during data linking Thus by monitoring or using it in the sequence program the abnormal status of the data link can be checked Moreover the link special relay SB that stores the link status is used for the detailed information of the network dia
284. nected incorrectly at a remote I O station Station No 2 1 Wiring diagram Cables are connected to wrong connectors at Station No 2 connected OUT OUT with Station No 1 and IN IN with Station No 3 Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Station No 4 2 SWOOSC to SWOOSF status Station No SWOOSC to SWOOSF status Station No 1 Only Station No 2 bit 1 is ON or OFF b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 eee swoosc o _olo tjo E a Swo009D Station No 4 swooe ooo swo ___ o S O All other stations bit 0 bit 2 bit 3 than Station No 2 bit 1 are ON or OFF b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swoosc ffl E e i Station No 2 SW009D SW009E SWoo09F b When cables are connected incorrectly at the master station Station No 0 1 Wiring diagram Cables are connected to wrong connectors at Station No 0 connected IN IN with Station No 1 and OUT OUT with Station No 4 Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Station No 4 QCPU QJ71LP21 25 QJ72LP25 25 CN our IN_ OUT 2 SWOOSC to SWOOSF status Station No SWO09C to SWOOSF status Station No 1 All areas for Station No 1 to 4 bitO to bit3 turn ON b15 to b4_b3 b2 b1 b0 Station No 2 Station No 3 SW009C swoop Cd Station No 4 SWOO9E SWOO9F 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 3 Error Codes 8 3 1 MELSECNET H error code list 1 Checking error codes with GX Developer Check e
285. ng 170 No coop None MNET H mode Control station Network No I MNET H mode Normal station Total stations b MNET 10 mode Control station qj MNET 10 mode Normal station g MNET H Stand by station Station No On line A Network range assignment Refresh parameters ay Intemtupt settings ET 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 3 Abbreviations Used in the Text Tables and Diagrams of This Manual 1 Abbreviations Abbreviations Name l Remote master station Remote O station Multiplexed remote master Multiplexed remote sub master 2 Marking format O00 La number 1 to 64 Abbreviation Network No 1 to 239 Example 1 Network No 3 and remote master station srt r ttre 3MR Station number 0 is not attached to the remote master station 2 Network No 5 remote I O station station number 3 5R3 3 Network No 7 Multiplexed remote sub master station number 4 Beta say aba Fane sauce ARE fae ab aad AAE fay at ga tar aa Parse ay AA 7DSMp4 1 4 Functions Added Changed with Upgrade to Function Version D The following table lists the additional altered functions for network modules of function version D Function Function version Description Reference Multipexed emote le Allows construction of a multiplexed remote I O network network for redundant Function version D P Section 7 11 that includes the redundant system as the master station system Power supply
286. nits e Corrent values of analog digital module e Current values of positioning module command speed The remote I O network provides the following functions for making handling of the link data easy e 32 bit data guarantee Section 6 2 1 e Block guarantee of cyclic data per station Section 6 2 2 6 2 1 32 bit data guarantee 32 bit data precision is guaranteed automatically by setting parameters so that the following conditions 1 to 4 are satisfied If conditions 1 to 4 are not satisfied a warning for 32 bit data separation is displayed during setting with GX Developer 1 The start device number of LB is a multiple of 20n 2 The number of assigned LB points per station is a multiple of 20n 3 The start device number of LW is a multiple of 2 4 The number of assigned LW points per station is a multiple of 2 Parameter settings tot nenvo assignment pages 1 ie ie To H oeoo _ i60 017F 16 0300 030F o7o0 When you want to guarantee data larger than 32 bits 2 words use the station unit block assurance in Section 6 2 2 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 6 2 2 Block guarantee of cyclic data per station By enabling the parameter settings shown below handshaking for the cyclic data is performed between the CPU and the network module and then the network is refreshed Through the cyclic data handshaking the link data block is guaranteed for each station to prevent link data separation per statio
287. normal station with the one set for the control Network type mismatch control station station detected System error The hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty System error Contact your local Mitsubishi representative If the data link is stopped under all station specification start it by all station specification If the data link is stopped under specific station specification start it from the station or forcibly start it F833 Keyword error Start the data link from the station where it was discontinued or forcibly start it F834 System error The cable is faulty or the hardware of the network module is faulty If a communication error has occurred review the cable If not the hardware of the network module is faulty F836 System error Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Check the status of the control station and of the remote master station to see if resetting or an error occurs in the middle of the operation Check the status of the control station and of the remote master station to see if resetting or an error occurs in the middle of the operation F82A F82B Data link startup condition error F835 System error F837 Exceeded number of retries F838 Relevant timer timeout No link parameter communication impossible F83A SW0000 out of range error Correct the contents of SW0000 F839 Register link parameters 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Table 8 1 Error code list Contin
288. not fixed interval on Ree 1 a Forward loop 1 b Reverse loop LOOP Error when there is loop error on ed 1 a Forward loop 1 b Reverse loop 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 H W switch information This indicates the switch setting data for the master module 2 a Shows the switch settings for the hardware mounted to the master module STx10 10 position of station number setting switch 1 position of station number setting switch MODE Mode setting switch 2 b Shows the switch data that has been actually set on the master module Display range Setting value of 0 to 239 network number Setting value of Oto9 group number STNO Setting of station 1 to 64 7Dx remote master station number Setting value of 0 Online operation mode 7 Self loopback test 8 Internal self loopback test 9 Hardware test BAUD 25 Mbps compatible 0 10 Mbps 1 25 Mbps Return mode parameter status setting value 1 Fixed Return mode 0 Remote master station returns as master operating station control station 1 Remote master station returns as sub master operating station standby station Parameter status 0 Without parameters for remote sub master station 1 With parameters for remote master station remote sub master station 2 H W information for remote I O module Use the following SB SW to confirm the H W information of the remote I O module For details refer to Attachment 2 and Attachmen
289. ns is stopped from the host or other station Cyclic transmission of the host station is stopped Cyclic transmission of the host station is stopped from other station station No No Parameter No parameter can be received Illegal Parameter Set parameters are not correct A moderate or major error occurred in the CPU module of the host station Suspend Communication Data link error occurred on the host station There is a stop instruction All There is a stop instruction Own Stop instruction present 1 Host PLC Error Host status 11 Inteli parameter setting SB0054 Displays the information of parameters written in the remote I O station e Available None Reserved station setting SB0064 Displays the designation status of reserved stations e Yes No Transmission mode SB0068 Displays the link scan status e Normal mode e Constant link scan 12 lt 13 lt 14 lt Duplex transmission setting SB0069 Displays the designation status of the multiplex transmission e Normal transmission e Multiplex transmission is displayed for the bus type system 15 Duplex transmission status SBO06A Displays the status of the multiplex transmission e Normal transmission e Multiplex transmission is displayed for the bus type system 1 A station that detected a forward loop error executes the reverse loopback 2 A station that detected a reverse loop error execut
290. number during other station access A Section 6 1 6 Interrupt setting parameters A A x Section 7 7 Redundantsettings Section 5 1 7 Routing parameters EA Always set A Default setting exists A Set as needed X Setting not required 3 For details refer to the Q Series MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC Network Always write network parameters to the remote master station 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q Table 5 2 Remote I O station PLC parameter setting items Network station type Reference Remote I O station Parameter setting item section PLC system settings Number of empty slots Section 5 2 1 Module synchronization settings a a O PLC RAS settings Section 5 2 1 Errorcneek CE o a OE Operational settings Remote I O switch settings ae Section 5 2 1 Assignment method Ooo o a Forwarding parameter between devices a I O assignment I O Assignment I a Section 5 2 1 Standard setting a ee Always set A Default setting exists A Set as needed X Setting not required Table 5 3 Remote I O station network parameter setting items Network station type Reference Remote I O station Parameter setting item section Ethernet Ethernet esse a O O Section 5 2 1 CC Link a Section5 24 Always set A Default setting exists A Set as needed X Setting not required Table 5 4 Remote I O station remote password setting items Network station type Referen
291. o the slots of the base units in order of the main base unit and extension base units 1 7 When the number of base unit slots has been set in the I O assignment setting of the PLC parameter dialog box the slot Nos are assigned for only the number of set slots File name Drive name Example File name Number Meaning ABCDEFGH IJK SD5 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD6 42H B 41H A SD7 File name 44H D 43H C SD8 ASCII code 8 characters 46H F 45H E SD9 48H H 47H G SD10 Extension 4 2EH 49H 1 2DH SD11 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH B SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Vacant 4 Refer to REMARK App 33 App 33 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Extensions are shown below SD10 u Extension name File type Higher bits Lower8 bits Higher8 bits yP PST OH QDI Device initial value O 5H HT HT QDR _ _ Fileregister APPENDIX MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set by Corresponding Applicable Number Name Meaning Explanation CPU Time value set Number Meaning SD5 Time 1 us units 0 to 999 us SD6 Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 sD11 D12 D13 SD14 SD15 v o gjo On n iw x n iw Program error location Number Meaning SD5 SD6 File name SD7 ASCII code 8 characters SD8 SD9 Extension 4 2EH SD10 ASCII code 3 characters SD11 Pattern 5 SD12 Block No
292. odule The I O signals X Y are allocated to the remote master station s link devices LX LY in the LX LY setting The LX setting is made for transferring the input signal X information of remote I O stations to the link devices of the remote master station The LY setting is made for transferring the link device LY information of the remote master station to the output signal Y area of the remote I O stations Set the same device points for the remote master and each remote I O station in the LX LY setting Screen setting End Points Stat_ End OoFF 256 oi OOF 256 0000 OOFF orr 256 W 256 000 0FF carr 256 H 0200 02F Allocation An LY allocation is illustrated below The following is an example where LX of the master module is automatically refreshed to the area starting from X1000 in the CPU module Remote master staion 1Mr CPU module Master module Remote I O station 1R1 Remote I O station 1R2 Remote I O station 1R3 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q The link device LX LY data of the remote master station are refreshed to the internal user devices e g X Y of the CPU module to be used in sequence programs To refresh these data to the CPU module s input X or output Y area allocate them to the area after the actual I O For details on the automatic refresh refer to Section 5 1 5 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 1 Set the
293. odule refreshing Execute Modul Yso Installation confirmation an i 1 O combined module Module control restart man Input refreshing Execute Change module selection completed E Output refreshing Status Guidance Intelligent function module Please tum off Y signal of the changed module when you change the Input refreshing Execute intelligent function module Ou tput refreshing Execute Intelligent module automatic refreshing _ Execute Buffer memory batch monitoring Execute Cancel 3 Click the Execute button to enable the online module change The table below indicates the communication status of the module to be replaced online when the screen below is displayed Online module change Target modules and items Execute not execute Operation Target module i i dul freshi Not execute nput module refreshin Module change execution 170 address 020H P 9 data are held Installation confirmation Menaam aad Output module refreshing Not execute Module control restart iio I O combined module Changing module Not execute Input refreshing Status Guidance data are held Please press the Execute button after installing a new module Intelligent function module 4 Disconnect the connection of the module I O signal with the external device by the switch and so on 5 Turn off the switch of the external power supply for modules to shut off power supply 6 Remove the terminal block or connector from the module 7 Remove
294. of pants the remote master station eile 150 On Error Indicates the loopback status of the forward loop while the 3 system is operating SB0099 Forward loop loopback Off Not executed O x O x O x O x 153 On Executing stations exist Executing stations are stored in the SW0099 Indicates the loopback status of the reverse loop while the 3 system is operating SBOO9A Reverse loop loopback Off Not executed O x O x O x O x 154 On Executing stations exist Executing stations are stored in the SW009A Indicates the status of the transmission path used for sending by Send transmission path other stations mismatch status Off All matched On Mismatching stations exist 3 SBO09C 156 Indicates the RECV instruction s execution request status 3 RECV instructi Ch 11 SBOOAO ihe ruction Channel 1 O O O O 7 se x y 160 execution request flag 1 Off No execution request On Execution requested Indicates the RECV instruction s execution request status RECV instruction Channel 2 execution request Off No execution request On Execution requested Indicates the RECV instruction s execution reques RECV instruction Channel 3 execution request Off No execution request On Execution requested Indicates the RECV instruction s execution request status RECV instruction Channel 4 execution request flag 4 Off No execution request On Execution requested Indicates the RECV instruction s executi
295. of output modules whose fuses have blown are D1301 input as a bit pattern in units of 16 points D1302 If the module numbers are set by parameter the parameter set D1303 numbers are stored D1304 Bit pattern in units of e Also detects blown fuse condition at remote station output TAA E modules D1305 16 points indicating 15 14 13 12 111098765432 the modules whose 100 1 o olo o fuses have blown D1300 co gen 0 No blown fuse 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Blown fuse present rs rors aan AAAA 0 wir 0 0 0 0 Jw B0 30 CEER Indicates a blown fuse Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation 5 W O module verification Corresponding Set b Applicabl Number Meaning Explanation T P ACPU E e p IT When the power is turned on the module numbers of the I O modules whose information differs from the registered I O module information are set in this register in units of 16 points Bit pattern in units of lf the I O numbers are set by parameter the parameter set 16 points indicating numbers are stored the modules with e Also detects I O module information VO module 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 0 No I O verification D1407 Be errors SD1401 7 19 D1404 D1405 SD1406 Verification verification errors er SD1408 1 I O verification error ry present D1431 xy 0
296. ol data of Execution type specification error send receive instructions is specified for all stations or groups set No arrival confirmation for the execution type Set the resent count of the request control data of send receive instructions F7C9 Resend count setting out of range Sn within a range between 0 and 15 times te te A Set the arrival monitoring time of the request control data of send receive F7CA Arrival monitoring time setting out of range A instructions within a range between 0 and 32767 seconds Sent data length setting out of range Set the sent data length of the request control data of the SEND instruction SEND instruction within a range between 1 and 960 words F7CB 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Table 8 1 Error code list Continued Error No Description of error Corrective measure The hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Confirm the set values mode etc in the control data of a dedicated instruction System error The hardware of the network module is faulty System error Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Check if the CPU module model of the target station specified in the WRITE Target CPU module type error READ REQ RRUN RSTOP RTMRD and RTMWR instructions is out of applicable range Re execute the REMFR or REMTO instruction after a little while Post transmission event wait timer time out Confirm the operation s
297. on of an offline test gt Change the switch setting to online after the test has been completed F 8 29 8 29 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Table 8 1 Error code list Continued Error No Review the station number setting The setup confirmation test of network diagnosis is effective Review the station number setting The setup confirmation test of network diagnosis is effective F10D i Review the mode setting and change it to online F10E Number of receive error retries exceeded Check for faulty cables faulty hardware incorrect cable wiring absence of terminating resistor in the case of the bus and duplication of station numbers control stations and remote master stations F110 Timeout error The setup confirmation test and loop test of network diagnosis are effective F10B Duplicate station number error F10C Duplicate control station error Q J 3 oO a a f G F10F Number of send error retries exceeded Review the status of the corresponding station and the parameter and switch settings to see if there is a parameter error and the corresponding station is the control station and properly set Corresponding station error Confirm the power supply status of the corresponding station to see if it is Baton pass to the corresponding station repeatedly turned on and off not executed Check for faulty cables faulty hardware incorrect cable wiring absence of terminating resistor in the case of
298. on reques RECV instruction Channel 5 execution request Off No execution request On Execution requested Indicates the RECV instruction s execution reques RECV instruction Channel 6 execution request Off No execution request On Execution requested Indicates the RECV instruction s execution reques RECV instruction Channel 7 execution request Off No execution request On Execution requested Indicates the RECV instruction s execution reques RECV instruction Channel 8 execution request Off No execution request On Execution requested Indicates the online test instruction status Online test instruction Off Not instructed On Instructed 3 SBO0A1 161 3 SBOOA2 162 3 SBOOA3 163 3 SBO0A4 164 3 SBOOAS 165 3 SBOOA6 166 3 SBOOA7 167 SBOOA8 168 Indicates the online test completion status Online test completion Off Not completed On Completed SBOOAQ 169 3 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 9 App 9 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 1 Special link relay SB list Continued Use permitted prohibited Sa Control Remol Remote I O Name Description 8 master station i station station Optical Coaxial SBOOAA Online test response Indicates the online test response status 170 instruction Of No response On Responded A Indicates the online test response complet
299. on the POWER 1 slot of the redundant base unit Q3 0RB Q6UIRB The power supply 2 indicates the redundant power supply module QORP mounted on the POWER 2 slot of the redundant base unit Q3RB Q6UIRB App 30 App 30 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 5 Special Register SD for Remote I O Module List Special registers SD are internal registers whose specifications are decided by the CPU and remote I O module For this reason they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the normal internal registers However they can be used to write data as needed in order to control the CPU and remote I O modules Data stored in the special registers is stored as BIN values unless otherwise specified Use the GX Developer or use a READ WRITE command sent by the sequence program to monitor and write to the remote I O module s special register Use the GX Developer to monitor and operate the ON OFF controls of the remote I O module s special relay Connect the GX Developer to the remote master station or the remote I O module then operate the online menu monitor and the device test The sequence program will read the special register according to the READ command and write to the special register according to the WRITE command The following table applies only to special registers related to remote I O modules The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings e Indicates whether the rel
300. one 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 e mail info beijer se ECONOTEC AG Postfach 282 CH 8309 Niirensdorf Phone 41 0 1 838 48 11 Fax 41 0 1 838 48 12 e mail info econotec ch SWITZERLAND GTS Dar laceze Cad No 43 Kat 2 TR 80270 Okmeydani Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 90 0 212 320 1649 e mail gts turk net TURKEY CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE 15 M Raskova St Fl 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 494 3355 Fax 380 0 44 494 3366 e mail csc a csc a kiev ua Poslannikov Per 9 Str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 790 7210 Fax 7 095 790 7212 e mail info privod ru AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 e mail cbi cbi co za SOUTH AFRICA MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES TEXEL Electronics Ltd Box 6272 IL 42160 Netanya Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 Fax 972 0 9 885 24 30 e mail texel_me netvision net il ISRAEL ats MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Gothaer Strasse 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 2102 486 0 Hotline 49 1805 000 765 Fax 49 2102 486 7170 www mitsubishi automation de megfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation com
301. onnector for coaxial cable 1 When resetting the system press and hold the RESET switch for a second or more If the pressing time is too short the system may not be reset normally If the system is not reset normally try reset operation again 1 There can be no duplication of station numbers in the same network 2 Setting can be done regardless of station sequence However if a number is to be left empty sting a reserved number 3 Set the mode setting switches in the same position on all network modules 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 LED displays Name LED status Description RUN aoe ae operating normally off WDT error occurred hardware error 2 REM 2 Module operating normally Green ae Parameters being written to flash ROM or device is in test mode 2 In remote initialization error WDT error blown fuse error input output verification error etc 3 T PASS Green on on Executing baton pass being joined in a network Green flash Test is determined to have completed normally when this LED flashes 20 times approximately 10 s Sie the test off Baton pass not yet executed the host is disconnected from the network ie D LINK S link being executed cyclic transmission is being executed off Data link not yet executed parameter receiving not completed host CPU error data link stop instructed etc cae Data being sent off Data no
302. ons for online module change on a remote I O station Online module change can be performed in the following cases 1 Target modules of online module change in a remote I O station Target modules of online module change are shown in the table below Module type Input module Output module No restriction I O combined module Analog digital conversion module nieligont Temperature nputmeduie Ip tn verson funcion module Modules other than above cannot be replaced online For whether the intelligent function module can be replaced online and replacement procedure refer to the manual of the intelligent function module used 3 25 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 GX Developer versions required for online module change on a remote I O station To perform online module change GX Developer Version 8 18U or later is required In addition online module change can also be performed from GX Developer via a network 3 Remote I O station configuration for online module change Online module change can be performed for Q3L B or Q3LJRB main base unit and the modules mounted on the Q6LIB or Q6LIRB extension base unit Online module change cannot be performed for the modules mounted on the following base units e Q32SB Q33SB or Q35SB slim type main base unit e Q5LB extension base unit the modules mounted on a main base unit cannot be replaced online However the modules mounted on a Q6LB extension base unit can be replaced
303. ons to be controlled by the multiplexed remote sub master station alone if the multiplexed remote master station is not made ready at a system startup Set the same parameters as the piere remote master station Without multiplexed Multiplexed remote remote master station sub master station J3 Io ain CENE 0 a C i Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 4 MELSEC Q Communication among multiplexed remote master station multiplexed remote sub master station and remote I O stations a b The input X data of the remote I O station and the link relay B and link register W data sent by the remote I O station are transferred to both the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station The output Y data of the remote I O station and the link relay B and link register W data received by the remote I O station are normally controlled by the multiplexed remote master station When the multiplexed remote master station fails the multiplexed remote sub master station controls the data Between the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station data is transferred using X Y B W to ensure that the multiplexed remote sub master station can control the remote I O station continuously when the multiplexed remote master station fails LX LY data flow between stations Multiplexed remot
304. ontact your local Mitsubishi representative Check the system configuration to see if there are eight or more relay networks in the MELSECNET H The hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative The hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative There is no need to take corrective measures because the system retries the operation If the error frequently occurs check for faulty cables faulty hardware noise absence of terminating resistor in the case of the bus and incorrect wiring Check if a coaxial cable is not connected or is loose or faulty and if the terminating resistor is not connected There is no need to take corrective measures because the system retries the operation do not switch the loop in the middle of the operation If the error frequently occurs check the line and the wiring status FDOB Wiring error offline loop test Check the wiring FDOC System error There is a problem with the hardware of the network module Contact our branch office or agency responsible for your area FD11 Error occurred during test execution Execute after the completion of the test from other station FD12 Disconnecting error Review the cause for why the station is being disconnected FD13 System error System error System error System error System error System error System error Set the total number of link stations with a common para
305. oops may be recognized as normal depending on the condition of the cable disconnection Whether the forward reverse loop is normal abnormal is determined by the status of RD receive of the loopback station Example In the cases described below the data link continue by dividing the network into two loops 1Mr 1R5 1R6 lt Loop containing 1Mr1 1R4 1R5 gt Forward loop 1MR1 Forward loop normal reverse loop normal normal 1R4 Forward loop normal reverse loop normal Reverse loop 1R5 Forward loop normal reverse loop normal J normal lt Loop containing 1R1 1R2 1R3 gt Forward loop 1R1 Forward loop RD abnormal reverse loop normal abnormal 1R2 Forward loop normal reverse loop normal Reverse loop 1R3 Forward loop normal reverse loop RD abnormal abnormal 2 Communication disabled An RD abnormal detection in the forward loop Loopback with the reverse loop Communication disabled Communication disabled Remote master station Remote I O station Remote 1 0 station 1Mr Loopback Loopback K z ern y Loopback 1R3 Remote O station vy Communication disabled Loopback 1R4 Remote I O station Remote I O station An RD abnormal detection in the reverse loop Loopback with the forward loop 3 17 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q If the network module has become faulty a loopback may not be made depending on the fault In that case the network m
306. or the ERR contact is turned off due to detection of a power supply module error 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 9 Online module change on a remote I O station Online module change is the function for replacing a Q series module mounted on the main base unit or extension base unit of a remote I O station while the station is operating Using this function a faulty module can be replaced with a module of the same model while the station is operating A new module cannot be added and a module cannot be replaced with different model by using the online module change Perform online module change after confirming that the system outside the PLC system will not malfunction In order to prevent electric shocks or malfunction provide a switch or other method to turn off the external power supply of the module to be replaced online In order to confirm the content shown below it is recommended to perform online change on an actual system in advance to verify that no error is found in the operations of the modules out of the scope of change e Isn t there any error in the method and configuration for disconnecting external devices e Isn t any influence found from the turning on off of switches and so on Do not mount remove the module onto from base unit more than 50 times IEC61131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector a Conditi
307. ote I O station Y10 2 Program for communicating with intelligent function module Q64AD The 64AD digital value can be read out by WO to W3 by the automatic refresh settings of the intelligent function module parameters Digital output value read write processing X21 X120 X12E Y129 H gt Digital Module A D conv Operating value READY ersion are A 8 reading comp jet request M300 M301 D10 0 HOV wo D101 A D conv CHI ersion digital complet output ed flag D10 1 MOV WI D102 A D conv CH2 ersion digital complet output ed flag D10 2 s ov w2 D103 A D conv CH3 ersion digital complet output ed flag HKO L RENFR JI KI K1 H2 K10 D10 K1 M300 A D conv ersion complet ed flag Error code display and reset processing X20 X12F ttt 1 Bco w4 K3Y30 Error Error Error reset flag code signal SET Y12F Error clear request Y12F X12F 1 r n RST Y12F Error Error Error clear flag clear request request If automatic refresh settings are performed by the intelligent function module parameters in the remote I O module do not use device X Y in the PLC side device If these are incorrectly used the network will not operated properly In the same manner do not use device X Y in the CC Link refresh settings with the remote I O module network parameters 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 6 4 Dedicated Link Instruction List The following table outlines the instructions that can be used for t
308. ovides example programs The REMEFR instruction reads the data from the buffer memory of the intelligent function module mounted to the remote I O station The REMTO instruction writes the data to the intelligent function module buffer memory mounted to the remote I O station 1 The B W for the handshake that is required when writing the remote I O station intelligent function module buffer memory in a MELSECNET 10 network is not needed with REMFR REMTO instructions However they have to be set if input output X Y is to operate as a system 2 Dedicated link instructions including REMFR REMTO cannot use the CPU module local device and use same file as program as selected file register 3 Turn off the executing link instruction after the completion device turns on a Instruction format 1 REMEFR instruction Network No designation Read command Read command PT Description of setting Setting range First address input output number for object intelligent function module The upper 3 digits of the 4 digit expression designates the first address input output number for the intelligent function module mounted to the remote I O station that is to be the object Read buffer memory first address Designates the first address of the buffer memory for the read destination intelligent function module 0 to FEH Word device Constant K H Word device Read data storage first address device Host Designates t
309. ow is displayed to verify that normal communication can be performed with the contents of the routing parameter settings GX Developer 1R1 1R2 2Ns1 on No 1 iMRI 1R4 1R3 3Ns3 4Me1 4Ns2 4Ns3 jee ire FEE cere cena stc acts J J i Network No 3 Network No 4 LE Pal 3Ns5 3Ns4 4Ns6 4Ns4 Return path from the destination Forward path from the host to the host to the destination Communication test Execution results z Network No Station No wn gaton Station No Network No Network No Station numbers of relay stations 5 is the station No Communication information of network No 1 side 2 is the station No of network No 2 side Station No Communication count 1Times Communication time 0 100ms Destination station Network No Station No Communication test 1 Destination 2 Communication data Network No J 4 Length 100 Station No 6 Time A W D T If the routing parameters are not properly set the message Cannot communicate with PLC is displayed and the communication result is not displayed 4 29 4 29 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS There is a needed use GX Developer to set the remote master station CPU module and each of the parameters in the remote I O station network module in order to make the remote I O
310. ower supply module 1 Input power OFF status b0 Ib input power OFF detection status of power supply 1 Input power OFF detection status of power supply 2 e Stores the failure detection status of the redundant power supply module Q6UIRP in the following bit pattern The corresponding bit is cleared to 0 when the input power to the faulty redundant power supply module is switched OFF after detection of the redundant power supply module failure e Stores 0 when the main base unit is not the redundant main base unit Q30RB Each bit 0 Redundant power supply module failure not detected No redundant power supply module Redundant power supply module failure detected Detectable for redundant power supply module only b0 Failure detection status of power supply 1 1 p Failure detection status of power supply 2 1 Counts the number of times of momentary power failure of the power supply 1 2 Watches the status of the power supply 1 2 mounted on the redundant main base unit Q3LRB and counts the number of times of momentary power failure When the CPU module starts the counter of the power supply 1 2 is cleared to 0 If the input power to one of the redundant power supply modules is turned OFF the corresponding counter is cleared to 0 e The counter is incremented by 1 every time the momentary power failure of the power
311. p 46 App 46 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 QJ71BR11 QJ71BR11 98 3 86 QJ71BR11 27 4 1 08 Unit mm in ME App 47 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 4 QJ72LP25 25 QU72LP25G QU72LP25GE 98 3 86 STATION NO 90 3 54 1 27 4 1 08 Unit mm in 1 Please contact your nearest Mitsubishi Electric System Service Corporation for detail App 48 App 48 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 5 QJ72BR15 98 3 86 QJ72BR15 y ey E 90 3 54 27 4 1 08 Unit mm in App 49 App 49 APPENDIX MELSEC Q MEMO App 50 App 50 INDEX B Block guarantee per station eeeeee 6 7 C Coaxial Cable ccccccecsceeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetees 3 5 Common parameter EX LY SQUING ena a E 5 9 LB LW Seting cua aA 5 12 Reserved station designation 5 13 Cyclic transmission 6 6 E Error code Error Gode lists gantt an 8 29 Storage of the error codes of the link dedicated instruction ccceeeeees 8 29 Checking error codes with GX Developer cceccceeeceeeeeeeeeteetsees 8 26 H HMW information ccccceeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 8 50 I Intelligent function module parameter 1 5 5 2 L Link refresh cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeees 3 31 LINK SCAM i a eee 3 31 Link special register SW eeeeeeeee App 11 Link special relay SB eeeeeeeeeeeees App 3 M Multiple
312. play 24 V DC powered 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 1 3 Network monitor details The remote master station information data link information and parameter status of the host station can be confirmed Displayed as shown below when diagnosis is executed from the Network Monitor Details remote I O station Network info Intelr Parameter Nore 11 5 Network NET H Loop Network No 1 Setting a 1 Type Remote 0 master station Group No Module No 1 Station No 0 Remote Master Station Information Assign Remote Master go Jn ene 1 Station J 2 B62 ernest et le et ee Station Satin i 1 2 3 Transmission Information Remote Master Station A Transmission Mode Normal 1 3 4 Remote Sub Master Station None Bible iarenison ommunication Selling None 1 4 Duplex Transmission Status Normal 1 5 Data Link Information Total Number of Linked 5 Stations A Station of Maximum Normal 6 Transmission 2 7 Station of Maximum Data 2 Link 8 Transmission Status In Data Link 9 Reason for Transmission Nomel Interruption oma 1 0 Reason for Transmission Normal Stop Network info This area displays the same information as the host information in Section 8 1 1 Remote master station info 1 Assign remote master station SW0057 Displays the station number 0 of the remote master station 2 Present remote master station SW0056 Displays the station number of the station that actually controls the remote I O station
313. plexed remote sub master station side link refresh time LS Link scan time round up Round up decimal fraction of the operation result LS Sm a m The above calculations are effective under the following conditions e There are no faulty stations e Transient transmission is not executed 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q When the Secured data send receive setting is enabled the following formulas are used 1 Formula for Transmission delay time Tpm1 Multiplexed remote master station side scan time Sm gt Link scan time LS Tom1 Sm a m LS Ss x 2 as ms Multiplexed remote master station side scan time Sm lt Link scan time LS Tom Sm a m x round up LS Sm a m x 2 LS Ss x 2 as ms 2 Formula for Transmission delay time Tbs The same formula is used independently of the Secured data send receive setting 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q b SEND RECV RECVS READ WRITE REQ ZNRD ZNWR instruction communication The transmission delay time of instruction communication is the sum of the following e Scan times of multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station Except for the link refreshing time e Link refresh times of multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station e Link scan time of multiplexed remote master station Calculate the sum as shown below Transmission delay times of instruction communication 1 SEND wit
314. power supply module refer to QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 The ERR LED flashes on the following modules whose first five digits of the serial number is 02112 or later e QU72LP25 25 e QJ72BR15 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 3 Installing and Uninstalling the Module 1 Installing the module Base unit E j Fully insert the module fixing latch into the module fixing hole in the base unit exercise care not to allow the module fixing latch to separate from Base unit the module fixing hole Using the module fixing hole as a fulcrum push the module in the direction of arrow to mount it into the base unit Module fixing lever Module fixing latch Module connector Soja Module fixing hole Base unit Module fixing LJ latch Module fixing lever Check that the module is securely fixed to the base unit Module fixing hole C Complete 2 2 Uninstalling the module Hold the module by both hands and push the module locking hook on the top of the module until it stops Pushing the module locking hook pull the module downward q connector Module Lift the module to disengage 3 the module fixing latch from Base unit the module fixing hole C Complete Module fixing hole
315. r the station with the communication error will enter into the following status Use the communication status data to form an interlock circuit in the sequence program that will operate the system on the safe side Erroneous output or malfunctioning could cause accidents 1 The remote master station will hold the data from before the communication error 2 The remote I O station turns off all outputs The output module of the remote I O station can clear hold the output status at the time of error by using the remote I O module parameters As the parameters are set to clear by default the output module turns off the outputs at the time of error If it is required to hold the output in order to operate the system safely set the parameters to hold e If a coaxial cable is disconnected this may destabilize the line and a data link communication error may occur in multiple stations Make sure to create an interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the system will operate safely even if the above error occurs Failure to do so may result in a serous accident due to faulty output or malfunctions Design Precautions lt DANGER e When performing control operations to a PLC modifying data in operation by connecting GX Developer to the CPU module or connecting personal computers to the intelligent functional modules configure an interlocking circuit in a sequence program so that the safety of the overall system is maintained
316. r A 1 HIH RemToH o Initial setting 10 Remote I O Intelligent function CPU module Master module module module Buffer memory Ee When the intelligent function module parameters initial settings are written to the a 3 1 is executed once again remote I O station the intelligent function module initial settings are automatically set even if the remote I O station is reset The following cases may occur when performing the initial settings to the intelligent function module a Analog digital conversion module Q64AD A D conversion permit prohibit setting b Digital analog conversion module Q62DA D A conversion permit prohibit The operating status of the remote I O station can be confirmed by the special register for the links for each station baton pass status SW70 to SW73 sW70 1 Station No 2 baton pass status PLS MO Write command 4 TOO M1 J MO r M1 A eS rT M10 F H Initial setting program I REMOTE instruction l REMTO instruction completion device signal o 5222222 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 6 2 Cyclic Transmission The link scan of the remote I O network and the sequence scan of the CPU module operate synchronously Depending on the timing of the link refresh link data with data types of more than 32 bits two words such as the ones below may be broken up into new and old data which may coexist in 16 bit one word u
317. rade to Function Version D ecseceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseneeeaes 1 9 2 1 Single Remote I O Ne tworks israr AR E RI 2 1 241 1 GOmmPiurentionn a seisid hoch edie boca odd bach clad saci ddeh eiaa gach sae sed i 2 1 21 2 SSOUCUING IEMS onno aaa a ca ce van a sess ha ces beac te spe ba cau es vane ius T E A a A Aa 2 2 2 1 3 Available device ranges s i0 00c ci civ viii avai vee ii rive aveiavee 2 3 2 2 Multiple Remote I O Network QNPHCPU On ly ccesceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeseeeaeeeaeesaeesieeeaeeeaeeeaneas 2 4 22 1 Contigurationis lt 4 iota n nena duane ads nal eat caeh wade adn aan eae 2 4 2 222 ONINO ia nea eo a nea Ane ene ene aaah 2 5 2 2 3 Available device ranges cecceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesneceeeceeeseeseaeseeseeeseeeseneseneseeeseeeseeeseaeseneteneeeaes 2 6 2 3 Multiplexed Remote I O Network for Redundant System QNPRHCPU Only 2 7 2 91 GOMMGULALION EE A A S E E E E T I EA T saree E tage vit eevee eater 2 7 232 SORN HEMS aoa A A T T 2 8 2 3 3 Available device rango S nsn a R A E E E O 2 9 2 4 Multiple Remote I O Network ccccccescceeeceeeeceeeeceeeeaeeceaeeecaeeececeeseaeeseaeeecaeeeeaeessaeeseaeeseaeeseaeesieeeeieeesans 2 10 24 1 CONPQUPATION arerin eee ove det lanes Aedes den panes REE R a R 2 10 24 2 SCUING IGN Satire eile eter tara ine aie te Pete etn oes et A 2 10 2 4 3 Available device ranges cecceeceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeseneceeeseesaeseaesaeseeeseeeseae
318. receive circuit and cable of the transmission system 1 Connect the IN and OUT terminals of the QU71LP21 QJ72LP25 network module for the optical loop system with an optical fiber cable Connect a terminal resistor to both of the F type connectors for the QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15 network module for the coaxial bus system For QJ71LP21 QJ72LP25 For QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15 optical loop system coaxial bus system Connect terminal N resistors Set the mode setting switch of the network module to 1 Set it to 5 when using the QJ71LP21 QJ72LP25 at 25Mbps The self loopback test is selected Power on the target station The self loopback test is executed check the execution status on the network module display During the test the T PASS LED flashes and the test is determined to have completed normally when it flashes 20 times If the test is abnormally completed the ERR LED flashes Before test During test Normal completion of test T PASSO Off OE Flashing gt E Normal completion of test after 20 flashes approximately 10 s Abnormal completion of test ERR E Flashing When an error occurs the contents of the error should be checked with GX Developer The faulty area can be examined by replacing the cable In the MELSECNETI H a link refresh is executed even when the module is offline Thus the user can check the testing status and the result with GX Developer or a sequence program using the special l
319. remote I O module 3 Link register W follows the common parameters set in the remote master station for communication between the remote master station and the remote I O station 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 4 QCPU follows the refresh parameters and refreshes link register W between QCPU and the master module Input output 5 X Y LX LY is the same as communication with input output module b QCPU uses the dedicated link instructions REMFR REMTO instructions for directly writing to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module for the remote I O station for reading and writing data This method can be used for the following applications e During intelligent function module control when reading and writing data with the sequence program only when data is needed e When an interlock with the intelligent function module is desired e When link register W to remote I O station is insufficient Moreover this method can be used for reading and writing data when there is no GX Configurator available Refer to Section 7 1 1 for details on the REMFR REMTO instructions Remote master station Remote I O station Intelligent QCPU Master module Remote I O module function module SREE Z REMTOH Buffer memory 1 QCPU uses the REMFR instruction to read the contents of the intelligent function module buffer memory 2 QCPU uses the REMTO instruction to write the contents in the intelligent
320. responds to card A and B5 corresponds to card B OFF at 0 ON at 1 B8 through B12 correspond to SW 1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1 B14 and B15 correspond to SW1 and SW2 of system setting switch 2 respectively OFF at 0 ON at 1 Corresponding ACPU be TT Set by When set S Every END processing New S Every END processing New MELSEC Q Applicable CPU Remote QCPU QnA App 38 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Applicable Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU gee po TT e The operating status of the remote I O module is stored in the following format ii 5 n 4 gt 44 Vacant 1 Remote I O module operating status Always 2 STOP The CPU operating state is stored as indicated in the following figure B15 l B12B11 i B8 B7 B4 B3 BO Operating state of CPU 0 RUN 1 STEP RUN 2 STOP 3 PAUSE D9015 format o STOP PAUSE cause 0 Key switch i 1 Remote contact 2 Peripheral computer link or operation from some other remote source 3 Internal program instruction Note Priority is earliest first 4 Errors 0 Test not yet executed Device test 1 During X i device test A S execution Set when the device test mode is executed on GX Developer Remote pe 2 During Y Request p device test 3 During X Y device test T
321. rmation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction When incorporating the Mitsubishi PLC into other industrial machinery or equipment and keeping compliance with the EMC and low voltage directives refer to Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction of the User s Manual Hardware for the CPU module used or the PLC CPU supplied with the base unit The CE logo is printed on the rating plate of the PLC indicating compliance with the EMC and low voltage directives For making this product compliant with the EMC and low voltage directives please refer to Section 3 1 3 Cable in Chapter 3 of the above mentioned user s manual Generic Terms And Abbreviations Generic term abbreviation Description of generic term abbreviation This is an abbreviation for a QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 25 QU71LP21S 25 QU71LP21G QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21GE MELSECNET H network module However especially in cases to show different models QU71LP21 QU71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 QU71LP21G and QJ71LP21GE are printed QJ71BR11 Abbreviation for QJ71BR11 type MELSECNET H network module Abbreviation for QJU72LP25 25 QU72LP25G QU72LP25GE MELSECNET H network module However especially in cases to show different models QJ72LP25 25 QU72LP25G and QJ72LP25GE are printed Network module General term for master module and remote I O module Abbreviation for QJ71E71 100 QU71E71 B5 and QJ71E71 B2 Ethernet interface Ethernet module modules aoe Abbreviation for Q
322. roperty rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series PLC Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased so as to ensure correct use Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user CONTENTS SAFETY PREGAUTIONS 2 13 aajitani dancer ivan erie eda ea ie eae aed ee a ee A 1 REVISIONS 25 4 hete4 eet he ete in te ae ee A ee en N OA i Bae A 5 CONTENTS cctiects cs Fees iene eet fh arian hea tat a ees Leet pen enna eat heeadeeet a taeete A 7 Manuals about ed ea ten ee teed hana ee teen acteater bet dette date A 11 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction ceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeas A 11 Generic Terms And Abbreviations ccccecceceeneseceteneeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeecaeeeaeeaeeeaeesatesas A 12 Product COM ONA N S signed oe ctets ae a r aa r cage nade a A ceva nude E ace aude ates meet cea eags etusadancdd save suds etesmee se A 13 Ti OVeMIGW sa i Ae tins A A Aa ae a a ei a ee ne ea 1 1 1 2 Fe atureS icc cian eerie iii ie aval ae avai dye iai a 1 2 1 3 Abbreviations Used in the Text Tables and Diagrams of This Manual cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 9 1 4 Functions Added Changed with Upg
323. ror code contents lt Troubleshooting gt has been activated that have been stored in 1 Reexamine base lt Troubleshooting gt SW48 mounting 1 Reexamine power 2 Reset remote I O supply status module 2 Check that the total 3 Replace module and current consumption check of the units connected to the base unit does not exceed the rated output of the power supply module If the T PASS LED turns on and off improperly and looks instable refer to the following lt Cause gt The line status is assumed to be instable lt Troubleshooting gt 1 Check the connector for loose connection and the cable for a break 2 Check that the cable used conforms to the specifications 3 Check that the overall length and interstation distance conform to the specifications Refer to Section 4 8 Cable Connection 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 From monitoring the network status to troubleshooting of a faulty station The following flowchart illustrates the procedure for monitoring the status of the entire network detecting a faulty station and then performing troubleshooting for the applicable station The status of the entire network is monitored with GX Developer Start troubleshooting Is only the transient transmission used No Execute the cyclic transmission Check the data link status of the remote master station with GX Developer s network diagnostics Are all the stations execut
324. rrective Action gt Check the error code of the transient transmission error from Error history detail and correct the error referring to Section 8 3 3 Retry SW00C8 SW00C9 Displays the number of retries communication retries when a communication error occurs lt Error Cause gt Station s power ON OFF faulty cable noise etc lt Corrective Action gt See POINT on the next page 4 Line trouble SW00CC SW00CD Display how many line errors have occurred lt Error Cause gt Power OFF of the adjacent station faulty cable noise etc lt Corrective Action gt See POINT on the next page 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 5 UNDER SWOOB8 SW00C0 Displays how many UNDER errors have occurred lt Error Cause gt Power ON OFF of the adjacent station faulty cable etc lt Corrective Action gt See the following POINT 6 CRC SWOOBY9 SWO00C1 Displays how many CRC errors have occurred lt Error Cause gt Isolation of the sending station faulty cable hardware failure noise etc lt Corrective Action gt See the following POINT 7 OVER SWOOBA SWO00C2 Displays how many OVER errors have occurred lt Error Cause gt Faulty cable hardware failure noise etc lt Corrective Action gt See the following POINT 8 SHORTFRAME SWOOBB SWO00C3 Displays how many short frame errors messages too short have occurred lt Error Cause gt Faulty cable hardware failure noise etc lt Corrective Action gt See the following P
325. rror codes with GX Developer by the procedure below MELSEC Q When data linking cannot be performed using the cyclic transmission or when communication cannot be performed normally using the transient transmission with an instruction of a sequence program or GX Developer the error codes hexadecimal are stored in the special link register or displayed on the GX Developer s system monitor a Select System Monitoring from the Diagnose menu of GX Developer to display the system monitoring screen b On the displayed system monitoring screen double click the network module you confirm to select it After it is selected the module detailed information screen is displayed for the remote master station and the PC diagnosis screen is displayed for remote I O stations Remote master station system monitor System Monitor Base Base Module 2 3 E amp Mainbase Backup mode UnmojUnm unti funti ng ng c Parameter status m ja Sitandby system Mode 1 0 Address 7 System monitor C Online module change Q25PRH Intell None None gent 32pt 16pt 16pt None 16pt Diagnostics Module s Detailed Information Base Information Status BBB Module system error Module error E Module change EE Eror in connected
326. rtened because the programming for the startup conditions is not required in the sequence program Visual representation of the function CPU module ee Master module MELSECNET H network Interrupt Main routing condition check program Execute an interrupt when the conditions are matched Have the link devices LB LW LX changed Has the network status SB SW changed Interrupt program IRET e When multiple interrupt conditions are set the operation may be delayed if an interrupt request is issued from other stations at the same time because other interrupts have to wait to be processed e When executing the interrupt sequence program it is necessary to execute El Enable Interrupt with the main program Since the MELSECNET H does not support the SEND instruction the device code RECVS instruction cannot be used For details about interrupt settings refer to the Q corresponding MELSECNET H network system reference manual PLC to PLC network 7 18 7 18 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 8 I O Assignment Function x The I O assignment function is a convenient function for use under situations such as the following 1 when changing the I O response time of the input module 2 when changing the error time output mode of the output module and 3 when setting the setting switches for the intelligent function module In addition this function can also be us
327. rtup can be performed using GX Developer For details on the network testing methods see the GX Developer Operating Manual Network test Network info Network NET H Loop Monitor status Network No 1 Monitoring Type Remote 1 0 master station Module No 1 Remote master station Normal Operation status of all stations Link start stop 1 Operation i f Host l Specified station FENI Station Force link start C Execute test 2 Designate object station C All stations Group No _ Station No o Host status Link operating Linking Linking stopped 3 Object module Module 1 ENI C Cc 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 10 Multiplexed remote master function QnNPHCPU only Multiplex remote master function allows the multiplexed remote sub master station to take control of the remote I O stations when the multiplexed remote master station fails To make this function valid include the master station multiplexed remote master station DMp and a sub master station multiplexed remote sub master station DSMp on the multiplexed remote I O network Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station sub master station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station The multiplexed remote master function has the following merits 1 Continuation of controlling remote i The multiplexed remote sub master station DSMr takes control of t
328. rupt settings Eaa a a a E a a a a i A D BE aaa E a A a i a a a a a a a a ar E a e Section 7 7 1 0 assignment function OEE OR eR OR Be ei Bee Oe Re ae Bee OR LW Coe ee Section 7 8 Stopping restarting the cyclic transmission and stopping link refreshing Network test errr Section 7 9 Multiplexed remote master function QNPHCPU only sss seer r ttt rere Section 7 10 Multiplexed remote master function for redundant system QNPRHCPU only ss ttt ttt tree Section 7 11 Remote password a Section 7 12 Network diagnostics Network monitor s ttre tenet es Section 8 1 x In the application functions there are executable functions that can be used by setting the parameters to either the remote master station or remote I O station It is possible to confirm whether the parameters are set to either the remote master station or remote I O station by using the table on the heading for each function p Remote master station Master Remote Remote I O station No need to set Needs to be set 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 1 Transient Transmission Function Non Periodical Communication The transient transmission function performs data communication only when it is requested between stations The transient transmission function can be requested with the dedicated link instructions REMFR REMTO READ and WRITE GX Developer the intelligent function module etc In the
329. s Communication speed 10 Mbps selected with MODE switch 10 Mbps SI optical cable 200m H PCF optical cable 400m Broad band H PCF optical cable 1km QSI optical cable 1km Maximum number of links per station SI optical cable 500m H PCF optical cable 1km GI 50 125 GIl 62 5 125 Broad band optical cable optical cable H PCF optical 2km 2km cable 1km QSI optical cable 1km Network cable Optical fiber cable procured by user Applicable connectors 2 core optical connector plug procured by user ation function SI optical cable 500m H PCF optical cable 1km Broad band H PCF optical cable 1km QSI optical cable 1km GI 50 125 GI 62 5 125 optical cable optical cable 2km 2km e Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable e Diagnostic function for checking local link lines RAS functions Detection using link special relays or link special registers Backup of power supply on a remote I O station e Online module change in a remote I O station lic Maximum number of networks 239 Total including PLC to PLC networks Applic Remote password for remote I O station 1 1 communication Monitor program upload download etc e Various send receive commands from the PLC program READ WRITE REMFR REMTO 48 points I O Allocation Number of I O points 32 points Intelligent function module 32 points vacant first 16 intelli last 32 x 4 3 SPECIFICATIONS
330. s LB that station refreshes 1 LW _ The total number of link registers LW that station refreshes 1 LX The total number of link inputs LX that station refreshes 1 LY The total number of link outputs LX that station refreshes 1 SB Number of special relays SB for link SW_ Number of special register SW for link aE File register R ZR transmission time on memory card 2 KM1 KM2 KM3 Constants 1 When a network module is connected to main base unit ee ee OO anou kS 048 QnHCPU QnPHCPU QnPRHCPU When a network module connected is to extension base unit KM2 KM3 KM1 E ee e x 10 x 10 QnCPU QnHCPU QnPHCPU 0 13 0 97 1 09 QnPRHCPU 1 The total number of points for the range that is actually refreshed Includes unused areas as well x2 Becomes the total when simultaneous transient transmissions are performed from multiple stations Remote I O station link refresh time ar The remote I O station link refresh time ar does not affect transmission delay time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 4 Link scan time Link scan time is based on a calculation of the following factors e Link device allotment points Number of stations connected Link scan time Communication speed 10 Mbps LS KB 0 45 x total number of stations LX LY LB LW x 16 8 x 0 001 KR LYm gt R LBum gt R LWm R x 16 16 x 0 0003 LXm R LBme R LWm R x 16 16 x
331. s etc of each station Other station information 3 Control station information detailed data link information etc Network monitor details 4 Loop switch count line error communication error etc Error history monitor b Diagnostic tests see Sections 4 10 The following four items can be checked or executed through the diagnostic tests 1 Wiring status IN OUT etc of the data link cable Loop test required for optical loop 2 Setting status of numbers control station remote master station duplication network numbers and group numbers Setup confirmation test 3 The order of stations connected in the direction of the forward loop and the reverse loop Station order check test 4 Setting status of the routing parameters Communication test 2 Confirmation by error code See Section 8 3 When either cyclic transmission or transient transmission using dedicated link instructions or GX Developer communication with other stations was not normally performed an error code is stored in the special link register and the system monitor The contents of the error can be checked by this error code 3 Confirmation by the LED displays on the front of the network module see Section 4 2 With the LED displays the following errors can be checked whether the host is operating or stopped whether the station acts as a control station or a normal station whether the baton pass is being executed whether data linking is being executed
332. s when physical channel 8 is used 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion see the error codes in Section 8 3 ores the network number of the host Range 1 to 239 he group number of the host No group designation Group No ores the station number of the host Range 1 to 64 remote master station 7Dx he mode status of the host Online Offline Applicable test 3 or more O O Q App 13 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued Use permitted prohibited Control erie Remote I O Name Description 8 A master station i station station ical Coaxal Optical Coaxial optica Coaxial On inter PLC network Stores the condition setting switch status b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 to b2 b1 bO eere eE L Network type 0 PLC to PLC network L Station type 0 Normal station 1 Control station L Control station operation 0 Switch to designated control station 1 Keep current control station Operation mode 0 Online mode 1 Debug mode Host station network type Swo0044 0 MELSECNET H mode MELSECNET 10 mode 68 Station setting 1 MELSECNET H Extended mode On remote I O network Stores the condition setting switch status Network type 1 Remote I O network Station type 0 Multiplexed remote sub master station remote I O station 1 Multiplexed remote master station Return mode
333. s a user request through SM etc e Indicates special relay M9 _ corresponding to the ACPU Change and notation when there has been a change in contents e Items indicated as New have been newly added for Q QnACPU e Indicates the applicable CPU type name Rem Can be applied to all CPU types and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Can be applied to all types of CPU QCPU Can be applied to Q series CPU QnA Can be applied to QnA series and Q2ASCPU series Remote Can be applied to the MELSECNET H remote I O modules Each CPU type name Can be applied only to the specific CPU e g Q4ARCPU Q3ACPU Set by When set Corresponding ACPU For details on the following items see these manuals e CPU QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals e Networks Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual for QnA Q4AR e SFC QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC App 28 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Special Relay List Diagnostic Information pees onen Set ON if diagnosis results show error occurrence OFF No error Includes external diagnosis ON Error Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored i Comes ON when an error occurs as a result of self s r OFF No self diagnosis Self diagnostic diagnos
334. s can be checked from the MNG LED of each station On master operation station controlling remote I O stations BD LINK Off sub master operation BRD OLERR 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 11 3 System switching request function of control system The control system includes the system switching request function i e the network module mounted in the control system issues the system switching request to the QnPRHCPU when it detects the data link error such as link cable disconnection or communication error This function enables the standby system to continue the control even when the network module of the control system goes down System switching due to network error a Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station Control system Standby system Power QnNPRHCPU QJ71 Power QnNPRHCPU QJ71 supply LP21 P o J Tracking cable Link cable A disconnection has occurred eg Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station sub master operation master operation Standby system Control system Power QnPRHCPU QJ71 Power QnNPRHCPU QJ71 LP21 l LP21 ae System A aad System B However if the QnNPRHCPU of the control system cannot perform system switching due to the standby system error only the master operation of the network module shifts to the network module of the standby system multiplexed remote sub master station In t
335. s earlier than the remote I O station an error will occur at the remote I O station and the time of the error will appear as 2000 year 0 month 00 day 0 0 0 Also if communication is interrupted due to a broken cable or other reason time data will not be renewed after the communication has been disrupted 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Checking error codes with devices To monitor the error code from an Ethernet module and so on using the MELSEC communication protocol check the link special register below 1 SW0020 Module status SW0048 Cause of baton pass interruption SW0049 Cause of data link transmission stop SW0O04B Host CPU status SW004D Data link running status host SW004F Data link stop status host W0051 Data link running status entire system SW0053 Data link stop status entire system SW0055 Parameter setting status 0 SWOOEE Transient transmission error 1 SWOO4F Transient transmission error pointer 2 SWOOFO to OOFF Transient transmission error history 3 SW01C4 Result of switching to the remote sub master station 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 3 Storage of the error codes of the link dedicated instruction Check the error code generated when the link dedicated instruction is executed through the device data below The error codes of the transient transmission are also stored in the link special registers SWOOEE to SWOFF For the details of the REMFR REMTO instruction
336. s of the cyclic transmission Off Not acknowledged SB0003 is off On Stop acknowledged SB0003 is on Indicates the stop completion status of the cyclic transmission Control station Remote I O master station station SB0053 Sompletion status Off Not completed SB0003 is off O O O O O O 83 On Stop completed SB0003 is on SB0054 Indicates the parameter receive status 64 Parameter receive status Off Receive completed O O O O O O 5B0055 Received parameter error 85 p 3 SB0056 Communication status 86 SB0057 87 Parameter type Operation designation at fault of control station SB0058 88 Operation designation at fault of multiplexed remote master station SB0059 Low speed cyclic 89 designation SB005A 90 SB005C I O master station 92 Block 1 SB005D I O master station 93 Block 2 SB0064 Reserved station 100 designation SB0068 MESE 104 Communication mode Parameter type 2 On Not received Indicates the status of the received parameters Off Parameters normal On Parameters abnormal Indicates the status of the transient transmission Off Transient transmission by the control station On Transient transmission by the sub control station Indicates the parameter type Off MELSECNET 10 parameter On MELSECNET H parameter On PLC to PLC network Indicates the setting of With data link by sub control station when control station is down Off Cycli
337. s on detection flag ON Redundant power e Turns off if all bits of SD1780 are off Each END supply module with e Turns OFF when the main base unit is not the redundant input power OFF main base unit Q3I RB detected OFF No faulty redundant Turns ON when one or more faulty redundant power power supply module supply modules are detected Ce ees detected Turns on if any of SD1781 bits is on S fla ON Faulty redundant power Turns off if all bits of SD1781 are off Each END 9 supply module Turns OFF when the main base unit is not the redundant QnPRH detected main base unit Q3LRB Remote Momentary Turns ON when a momentary power failure of the input SM power failure power supply to the power supply 1 or 2 is detected one 1782 detection flag for or more times After turning ON remains ON ever if the power supply 1 power supply recovers from the momentary power 1 OFF No momentary power failure failure detected e Turns OFF the flag SM1782 SM1783 of the power S Momentary ON Momentary power supply 1 2 when the CPU module starts Each END power failure failure detected When the input power to one of the redundant power SM 1783 detection flag for supply modules turns OFF the corresponding flag turns power supply 2 OFF 1 This relay turns OFF when the main base unit is not the redundant main base unit Q3LIRB 1 The power supply 1 indicates the redundant power supply module Q6OIRP mounted
338. s the transient transmission status of the remote sub master station Off Normal On Abnormal ae Indicates the cyclic transmission status of each station Not 3 applicable to reserved stations and the station with the maximum i Cyclic transmission status station number or higher SB0074 f aa 116 of each station Off All stations are executing data linking On Stations that are not executing data linking exist Turns off when the SW0074 to SW0077 are all 0 Bg L 3 Remote sub master SB0072 station transient 114 transmission status Indicates the master station cyclic transmission status Includes online loop test Off Master station cyclic transmission normal On Master station cyclic transimission error Indicates the cyclic transmission status of the remote sub master station Including the status at an online loop test Off Cyclic transmission normal On Cyclic transmission abnormal Indicates the station type that is controlling cyclic transmission at the remote I O stations Off Remote master station On Remote sub master station 31Cyclic transmission status SB0075 of the remote master 3 Remote sub master SB0076 station cyclic transmission x 3 Remote master station SB0077 cyclic transmission control Indicates the parameter transmission status of each station Not applicable to reserved stations and the station with the maximum 3 Parameter statis of each station number or higher S
339. screen is displayed The table below indicates the communication status of the new module when the screen below is displayed MELSOFT series GX Developer X e J Online module change completed Applicable modules and items Execute not execute Input module refreshing Output module refreshing I O combined module Input refreshing Intelligent function module 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 Link Data Send Receive Processing Time Specifications The following introduces the method of calculating link data send receive and transmission delay time in the remote I O network 3 3 1 Link data send receive processing 1 Summary of send receive processing Cyclic transmission of the remote I O network communicates by network module LX LY LB LW a For input module The following is an example of CPU module side output Y 1 Remote master station Y1000 is on 2 Y1000 data is stored in the network module refresh data storage area LY by link refresh 3 The Y1000 data in the refresh data storage area LY is stored as YO in the link data storage area LY according to the common parameters 4 The YO data in the link data storage area LY is stored in the link data storage area LY for the remote I O network module by link scan 5 The YO data in link data storage area Y is stored in refresh data storage area LY 6 The YO data is output from the output module of the remote I O station by the automatic refre
340. scribes each item 1 Continuation of controlling remote I O stations when multiplexed remote master station fails a By mounting the network modules of the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station to different PLC CPUs the multiplexed remote sub master station automatically controls the remote I O stations if the multiplexed remote master station fails switching of master operation The transient transmission executed when the master operation station is switched or returns to the system may be unsuccessfully completed Execute the transient transmission again if it is unsuccessfully completed b Since the sub master operating station smoothly continues the control of the remote I O stations when the master operation is switched it always receives cyclic transmission data M station R station X B W sent from the remote I O stations if the master operating station is operating normally Also the sub master operating station can execute the link dedicated instructions that perform read to the remote I O stations REMFR READ The link dedicated instructions for performing write REMTO WRITE cannot be executed from the sub master operating station as the execution from the master operating station has priority If executed by the sub master operating station such instructions result in normal completion without processing data not written Error will not occur When a link dedicated in
341. section describes the procedure of the online module change of the O module For the procedure of the online module change of the intelligent function module refer to the manual of the intelligent function module used POINT It is recommended to turn off the output Y from the output module or I O combined module in advance 1 Select Diagnostics Online Module Change on GX Developer to enter the Online module change mode System Monitor Installed status Base 1 2 3 4 Base Module MasterPLC gt QY 50 Unmo Unmoj Unmo unti funti funti 16pt ng ng pply QU72LP25 25 Parameter status Mode O T iO Address System monitor Online module change esis Race Powe None None 5 i Diagnostics ly 25 16pt 16pt pow Module s Detailed Information Base Information Product Inf List Status i Module system error Module error L Module warning Detailed inf of power supply B Module change Stop monitor Glass 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Double click the module to be replaced online to display the Online Module Change screen The table below indicates the communication status of the module to be replaced online when the screen below is displayed Online module change Target modules and items Execute not execute Operation Target module Input module refreshing Execute Module change execution J address O20H Output m
342. sed to explain this configuration Remote master station Remote I O station station No 1 Power QCPU QJ71 QX40 QY40P supply BR11 a b c Power QU72 QX40 QY40P Q64AD supply BR15 Remote master station remote I O station Input X100 to X12F lt Input XO to X2F X120 to X12F are being used by intelligent function module Output Y110 to Y12F Output Y10 to Y2F Y120 to Y12F are being used by intelligent function module Remote master station lt Remote O sattion Link register WO to F Remote master station gt Remote 1 O station Link register W100 to 10F Parameter setting examples 1 2 The common parameters and refresh parameters are set in the CPU module The intelligent function module parameters initial settings automatic refresh settings are set using in the remote I O module Moreover switch settings can also be done by I O allocation settings depending on the intelligent function module used Note that when operating with only the input output module mounted to the remote I O module the default parameters are set in the remote I O module a CPU module Common parameters Sets the input output and link register range for communicating between the remote master station and remote I O station 1 XY settings M station gt R station M station lt A station a StationNo x Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End Po
343. seeeseeeseneseaeseaeseneeeaes 2 11 2 5 Applicable SyStems tie8 iif ce a Pee eh eee he eet a ad ce a a kM aE hae NG a 2 12 2 5 1 Applicable systems for remote master stations ccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeceeeseeeeseaeeses 2 12 2 5 2 Applicable systems for remote I O stations cccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaaeeseaeeteaeeeceessieeeseaeeaes 2 13 2 6 When Using a Multiple CPU System ce eee cecececeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeeaeeereeatenas 2 16 2 7 Checking Function Version and Serial No c cceccseceeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeesaeeeeesaeeeaeesaeeseeseeeeeeeeeaeens 2 18 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 to 3 52 3 1 Performance Specifications nsei ap enro eia eiaeiiai etane aaiae aaae da aeieea aaaea deaan ae 3 1 3 1 1 Optical loop system performance specifications cceccceeecceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeseneeeeeesseeteaes 3 1 3 1 2 Coaxial cable system performance specifications cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeessieeeenseeeans 3 3 3 1 3 Optical fiber Cable SpecitiCation s ii aa chad gd lect bel bacead Alas bel back lat ae a aae a aa 3 4 3 1 4 Coaxial Cable Specifications ccceccccesceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeteneceaeeseaeescaeeesaeeseaeeseaeeseaeesceeeseneesesessaeessaees 3 5 3 27 FUNCHON SPECIICALIONS x cc 2 oe seco a ee at re at ee re ed eae ete a Boma a al ea 3 8 3 2 1 Cyclic transmission function Periodic ComMMUNICA
344. ses the link dedicated instructions REMFR REMTO READ WRITE there is no need for LB LW for handshake that was required for MELSECNET 10 3 Reserved station designation The reserved station designation is a function that handles stations to be connected in the future as stations with communication errors These stations are not actually connected but they are included in the total number of stations slave in the network Since reserved stations do not affect scan time full performance can be realized even when they remain reserved 4 Remote sub master station Since the multiplexed remote master station must recognize the station No of the multiplexed remote sub master station set the station No of the multiplexed remote sub master station in the network range assignment screen of the multiplexed remote master station Setup common parameters and I O assignments 1 Select a station No Of assignment method the multiplexed remote Paints Start Monitoring time 200 X10ms Parameter name sub master station My Start End ene Switch screens BW setting station gt sub M R station _ M station lt sub M R station _ M station gt sub M A station_ M station lt sub M R station B Points Start Points Start End e rre E q End Points Start End upplementary Equal assignment A End Cancel
345. sh operation of the network module xo HH 4 1000 a Remote master station Remote O station j feo pe 55 5 55 55 5 5 QCPU Network module Network module Output module Y LY LY LY LY or Sequence scan Device 2 Refresh data 3 Link data Link data 5 Refresh data memory storage area storage areal storage areal _ storage area storage x2 x2 x2 x2 area Link refresh x1 I O refresh gay ee Ne Ep e a Nh ee pte ev 1 Set by network refresh parameters 2 Set by remote master station common parameters 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q b For intelligent function module The following provides an example of how the link device W on the CPU module side is sent to an intelligent function module 1 Data is sent to the remote master station WO 2 WO data is stored in the network module refresh data storage area LW by link refresh 3 The WO data in the refresh data storage area LW is stored as WO in the link data storage area LW according to the common parameters 4 The WO data in the link data storage area LW is stored in the link data storage area LW for the remote I O network module by link scan 5 The WO data in link data storage area LW is stored in refresh data storage area LW 6 The WO data is written to the remote I O station intelligent function module buffer memory
346. shown in the Serial field MELSEC Q Serial No Upper 5 digits Function version Conformed standard a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN Checking using GX Developer The following shows the method for checking the serial number and function version of the selected module The serial number and function version are shown in the Product Information List or Module s Detailed Information The following shows the procedure for checking the serial number and function version using the Product Information List screen Refer to Section8 3 1 for information about using the Module s Detailed Information screen Starting procedure Diagnose gt System monitor Product Information List Product Information List 32pt 000 None None None None Ea CSV file creating Serial No Ver The serial number for the modules are shown in the Serial No column The function version for the modules is shown in the Ver column 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q The serial No described on the rated plate may not match with the serial No displayed on the product information of GX Developer e The serial No on the rated plate describes the management information of the product The serial No displayed on the product information of GX Developer describes the function information of the product The function information of the product is updated when adding functions
347. so checks whether the cables are connected between IN and OUT connections properly The following explains how to conduct the forward loop reverse loop test 1 Setting the test mode a Mode for performing the forward loop reverse loop test on a system other than the redundant system When conducting the forward loop test set the mode network parameter of the station that will be executing the forward loop test to Forward loop test with GX Developer and write the parameter setting to the CPU module Set the mode for all other stations than the testing station to Online When conducting the reverse loop test set the mode network parameter of the station that will be executing the reverse loop test to Reverse loop test with GX Developer and write the parameter setting to the CPU module Remote master station Module 1 Newokwo id SSCS Tovalstaions SP SCSC GroupNo C is CSCsCSCiszC eS O me Fowadmotet Po etwork range assignment 4 my oO 4 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q b Setting the mode when performing the forward loop reverse loop test on the redundant system When conducting the forward loop reverse loop test on the redundant system set the operation mode of the redundant CPU to the backup mode in advance When it the power supplies of both the systems cannot be powered on off perform the forward loop reverse loop test in the separate
348. ss on the PLC CPU of the master station 1 If the ERR contact of the power supply module of the master station is OFF check the status of the power supply connected to the power supply module of the master station or diagnose by GX Developer if a stop error has not occurred on the CPU module of the master station 2 If the ERR contact of the power supply module of a remote I O station is OFF check the status of the power supply connected to the power supply module of the remote I O station or diagnose by GX Developer if a stop error has not occurred on the remote I O module of the remote I O station However the ERR contact of the power supply module of the remote I O station is turned off instantaneously when data link parameters are received from the master station after the parameters of the remote I O station are changed The ERR contact is turned on when communication becomes ready due to the reception of data link parameters Has the error reset process using SM50 SD50 been performed after the online module change function was executed on a remote I O station Are the ERR contacts of the power supply modules of the master station and remote I O station ON 8 2 2 When data link cannot be executed on the entire system Check item Checking procedure Check the line condition with GX Developer s network diagnostic loop test only in case of optical loop test Monitor the communication status of each station Check the faulty st
349. st operation that checks the connection status Forward loop test and the optical fiber cables on the forward loop side Remote master station only For details on how to conduct the hardware test see Section 4 9 1 This mode is to select the hardware test operation that checks the connection status Reserve loop test and the optical fiber cable on the reverse loop side Remote master station only For details on how to conduct the hardware test see Section 4 9 1 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 Parameter setting example The following is an example for system parameter settings including remote master station remote I O network and controlling station PLC to PLC network System configuration Remote master station Control station Valid module during other station access First card Power supply PLC to PLC network Network No 2 Remote I O network Network No 1 Screen settings 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 5 1 3 Common parameter The common parameters set the LB LW LX and LY cyclic transmission range that allows sending and receiving between remote master stations and remote I O stations in a network Common parameter settings only need to be set for the remote master station 1 LX LY setting I O signals X Y of each remote I O station are transferred to the CPU module via link devices LX LY of the remote master station for control in the CPU m
350. station provided that the number does not overlap with that of remote I O station 63 remote I O stations can be connected in an optical loop system 31 stations in a coaxial bus system Only the QnPHCPU is the CPU module that works as a multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station The Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU do not work as a multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Remote I O station master station sub master station QJ72 1 0 I O LP25 QnPH QJ71 CPU LP21 QnPH QJ71 CPU LP21 Power supply Power supply Power supply Optical fiber cable A QJ72 I O I O A QJ72 V O I O a QJ72 I O I O Qa Q a 5 5 3 LP25 n n n S S S fe je fe a Station No 64 Station No 4 Station No 3 Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Up to 63 remote I O stations can be connected in an optical loop system Up to 31 stations can be connected in a coaxial bus system 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 2 Setting items 1 Table 2 3 lists the parameter setting items of the multiplexed remote master station DMR and multiplexed remote sub master station DSMkr Table 2 3 Setting Items of Multiplexed Remote Master Station and Multiplexed Remote Sub Master Station
351. stem or standby system using GX Devloper or other method By using this function access to the control system is enabled even after system switching occurs due to error Control system Standby system Power QnPRHCPU QJ71 Power QnPRHCPU QJ71 Power QJ72 QJ71 supply LP21 supply LP21 System A System B Tracking cable GX Developer Link cable QnPRHCPU can be accessed by specifying either the control system or standby system The settings on the request source GX Developer are as follows Specify the control system standby system system A or system B on the connection setup screen in the online menu Transfer Setup PC side I F io Ka B K T Serial NET A0 H NET II CC Link Ethemet PLC AF SSC USB board board board board board board net Network No 1 Station No 1 Protocol i a PLC MNET 10 H MNET II CC Link Bus module module module module oe ae Network No 1 Station No 1 Computer type QJ71E71 IP address Host 192 0 1 254 Routing parameter transfer method Automatic transfer method Other aa Connection channel list station No specification Other station Single network i Ei PLC direct coupled setting Time out Sec jao Retry times jo Target system Connection test Network Not specified BS route Not specified NETAOH NET II CC Link UE Control system Standby system Network No 1 Station No 11 System A System B i i C24 Specify the control system m _ E E standby s
352. stics Check whether or not an error or problem occurred in the CPU module and network Is the network module of the faulty station normal module of the faulty station Check whether or not the network module works normally with the self loopback test of the offline tests Check whether or not the data link cable is normal with the loop test of the offline tests Check that the total number of link stations is set to the largest number of the connected stations or more and check that the stations that cannot communicate are designated as reserved stations Read the network parameters from the faulty station s CPU module and check that the Are the control station s parameters normal network settings such as the network type start I O number and network number are correct Are the switch settings of the network module Check the station number setting switch and the mode setting switch Was the loop error caused by the network module or the data link cable Are the remote master station s parameters correct 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 2 5 When the transmission and reception data are abnormal 1 The cyclic transmission data is abnormal Check item Checking procedure Stop the CPU modules of both the remote master station and turn the link device of the sending station on and off by GX Developer s test operation to check whether or not data is sent to the receiving station If it is normal review the sequence program
353. struction REMTO or REMFR for remote I O stations is executed by mistake between the master station and sub master station the execution station shows the following operation status Instruction Execution station Target station Operation status of me execution station REMFR Master operation station Sub master operation station Sub master operation station Master operation station REMTO Master operation station Sub master operation station Sub master operation station Master operation station Normal end without processing c To smoothly continue the control of the remote I O stations when master operation is switched the data must be always transferred between the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station Data transfer reflects the condition statuses of outputs from the multiplexed remote master station to remote I O stations such as Y output and data output on the remote sub master station Also data must be transferred from the multiplexed remote sub master station before the faulty multiplexed remote master station returns to system and switches to master operation Information is transferred by cyclic transmission as performed on a PLC to PLC network 7 22 7 22 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q d The intelligent function modules such as QJ71C24 QJ71E71 which are mounted to the remote I O stations can access the station that is currently performing master operation in the MELSEC
354. sub master station when the multiplexed remote master station returns to system while the remote I O stations are being controlled by the multiplexed remote sub master station Return as Return as Contro The transient transmission executed when the master operation station is switched or returns to the system may be unsuccessfully completed Execute the transient transmission again if it is unsuccessfully completed a Return to system as control station The multiplexed remote master station returns to the system as the master operating station control station The multiplexed remote master station controls the remote I O stations The multiplexed remote sub master station shifts to sub master operation After switching the outputs of the remote I O stations are cleared Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station sub master station Sa mini bee operation Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Multiplexed remote master station returns to system Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station sub master station ET E r j Master operation Haf sez Information Sub master operation al E transfer we nw Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS b Return to system as standby station The multiplexed remote master station returns to the system as the sub master operating station st
355. supply Including stations reserved or 140 numbered greater than the maximum SW008D Wi aa Power Supply Status of 1 With external power supply Each Station b15 b14 b13 b12 t b4 b3 b2 bi bO SW008E 2 142 SW008C 16 15 14 13 t0o 5 4 3 2 1 SWOO08F SWO008D 32 31 30 29 to 21 20 19 18 17 143 SWOO8E 48 47 46 45 to 37 36 35 34 33 SWOO8F 64 63 62 61 to 53 52 51 50 49 SW0090 144 Loopback information 2 Swo0091 145 swo092 Forward loop status of 146x each station SWw0093 147 wo0094 148 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the loop status of the host 0 Loop normal 1 Forward loop error 2 Reverse loop error 3 Loopback 4 Data linking disabled Stores the forward loop status of each station including the host 0 Normal including the station with the maximum station number and smaller stations as well as reserved stations 1 Abnormal Disconnected station remains in the status when it was disconnected b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b3 b2 bi bO swor e epe ees Jefe Jei afa oja e a ao fa 7 refer ae ae fo or oe Po oe oe swvoos oe os oa for fo oo e or oo a Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 20 APPENDIX N
356. supply 1 2 is detected 0 to 65535 When the count exceeds 65535 it starts with 0 Stores 0 when the main base unit is not the redundant main base unit Q30RB RB Q6l IRB Q6 RP mounted on the POWER 2 slot of the redundant base unit Q3 App 43 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 Discontinued Models that can be Mounted on Remote I O Stations Some of disontinued Q series models are applicable to remote I O stations Note that restrictions apply to the following modules Module model e Function version B or later is applicable e Interrupt pointers dedicated instructions and e mail function are inapplicable QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2__ Interrupt pointers and dedicated instructions for intelligent function modules are inapplicable App 44 App 44 APPENDIX MELSEC O Appendix 7 External Dimensions 1 QJ71LP21 25 QU71LP21G QU71LP25GE Ce QJ71LP21 25 A RUN MNG T PASS D LINK Q 2 i o 27 4 1 08 90 3 54 z Unit mm in 1 Please contact your nearest Mitsubishi Electric System Service Corporation for detail App 45 App 45 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 QU71LP21S 25 i QJ71LP21S 25 A EXT PW t9 O Y 90 3 54 ol 55 2 2 17 e gt Unit mm in 1 Please contact your nearest Mitsubishi Electric System Service Corporation for detail Ap
357. system Stop monitor Product Inf List 1 2 3 Close 750 Unmo Uma unti junti 16pt ng Parameter status Jia Address O 20 30 40 0 1 2 3 Powe rsu QJ72LP25 pply 25 Input Outp None None 32pt fut 16pt 16pt 16pt EE Module eror Module waring Stop monitor Mode System monitor C Online module change Diagnostics Module s Detailed Information Base Information Product Inf List Detailed inf of power supply Close Detailed inf of power supply 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q c For the remote master station check the code history description and action of the error that occurred on the network module on the portions of the module detailed information screen shown below For the error code of the transient instruction issued by a PLC program check the device data of section 3 Module detailed information screen for remote master station Module s Detailed Information Check the codes history description and action of an error of the master module For remote I O stations check the present error and its history on the PC diagnosis screen PLC diagnosis screen of remote I O station PLC diagnostics Parity aitor When the remote I O network starts if the remote master station start
358. system MELSECNET 10 network system hereafter referred to as MELSECNET 10 As the MELSECNET H remote I O network adopts the same module mounting method as the usual one mounting I O modules and intelligent function modules onto the main base unit expansion base unit each module mounted on the remote I O stations can be handled in the similar way as the basic one In addition the applicability to the MELSECNET 10 remote I O network has been further enhanced so that the FA system can be easily configured In the MELSECNET H remote I O network optical loop system the communication speed can be set to 25 Mbps or 10 Mbps aaa eee Network system Communication speed Opticalloop x1 25 Mbps MELSECNET H l Optical loop l 1 25 Mbps Optical loop coaxial cable 10 Mbps x1 QJ71LP21 25 QU71LP21S 25 QJ72LP25 25 only Control station MELSECNET 10 mode Remote master station QCPU Control station MELSECNET H mode GX Developer lof a g 3 s6 E QCPU normal station B B Om a QCPU normal station en ee fe al es o G Hi ql mia MELSECNET H 10Mbps PLC to PLC network MELSECNET H 25Mbps PC network m m a esmo A remote I O network on aie Rede oi el ara QCPU normal station MELSECNET H 25Mbps remote I O network Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station To EE GX Developer 1 1 1 1 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 Use QCPU for MELSECNET H remote I
359. t Setup confirmation test Station order check test Pause Section 4 10 3 Communication test QO Execution allowed X Execution not allowed For details on the operations of each function see the GX Developer Operating Manual The following screen is displayed when the network diagnostics is selected with GX Developer Select the button for the network diagnostic item that will be conducted MELSECNET II 10 H diagnostics Host information jodule 2 Module 3 Module 4 Network info Network NET H Loop Network No Stop monitor Type Remote 1 0 master station Group No Station No o Cose Mode Online Link scan time F loop status Normal Max 3 ms Loopback station Unused Min 9 ms Link information Select a test Network diagnostics F loop status Normal Current 3 ms Loopback station Unused Network test Communication information Loop test Communication status Setup confirmation BWY from Master station test Bw from host master station Station order check test Error History Monitor Network Monitor Details Other station info Communication test 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 10 1 Loop test optical loop system only This test checks the line status of the forward and reverse loops upon completion of the wiring of the optical loop system Also when a loopback is being executed it checks the station that executes the loopback For exa
360. t 3 Operating condition of the remote I O module SB0020H SW0020n SB0040 to 44H SW0040 to 46x Setting status of the remote I O module SB0058 to 69H SW0054i to 68H Operating status of the remote I O module SB0047n to 49x SW0047n to 4An 8 51 8 51 APPENDIX APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 1 Precautions when Changing Over from a MELSECNET 10 Remote I O Network to a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network The following describes the precautions to take when switching from an AnUCPU QnACPU MELSECNET 10 remote I O network to a QCPU MELSECNET H remote I O network 1 App 1 Cannot be mixed with other network modules MELSECNET 10 network modules and MELSECNET H network modules cannot be mixed e MELSECNET H remote I O modules cannot be connected to MELSECNET 10 master modules e MELSECNET 10 remote I O modules cannot be connected to MELSECNET H master modules When changing remote I O modules use MELSECNETHH for all network modules Switch settings for network module The network number setting switches and condition setting switches for the MELSECNET 10 network modules are not found on the MELSECNET H network module These settings must be made by the network parameters Correction of remote master station network parameters The network parameters for the remote master station require the corrections shown in 2 above Setting of parameters to remote I O station The I O allocation settings set by the network p
361. t refresh parameters 2 Refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC Network SH 080049 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 Table 2 6 lists the setting items on the remote I O module parameter setting items on GX Developer and intelligent function module parameter setting items on GX Configurator Table 2 6 Setting Items of Remote I O Station Setting item Remote I O station R Network module main module switch STATION NO 1 to 64 Section 4 2 2 MODE e Section 4 2 2 Parameter setting PLCsystemseting a o g PLCRAS setting a d g WOassignment a d a Operation setting A Seotions24 Ethemetsetting a o o a e e a Remote password setting Section 7 12 GX Configurator setting Initial setting Auto refresh setting A 6 Always set A Default setting A Set as needed x No need to set x3 Refer to QCPU User s Manual Functional Explanation Program Fundamentals SH 080484ENG 4 Refer to Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic SH 080009 Note that interrupt setting is not available 5 Refer to CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual SH 080394E Note that interrupt setting is not available k6 Refer to the user s manual of the corresponding intelligent function module 2 3 3 Available device ranges The remote I O network can use the following device ranges in the network module Avai
362. t yet sent nS on Data being received off Data not yet received H E x2 Red on Station setting error other than 1 to 64 mode setting error prohibited setting operating condition setting error due to parameters A station with the same number already exists in the network e Host is designated as remote master station in spite of a remote master station already existing in the network e Abnormality in parameters received from the remote master station Kaa An error was detected while testing the network module The mode setting switch or the station number setting switch was changed during operation 3 g Normal status L ERR Red on A communication error occurred one of the following communication errors has occurred CRC Error generated by an abnormal cable noise etc OVER This error occurs when the next data is received before the last receive data is loaded into the module and the data is overwritten It is caused by a hardware error in the receive area of the network module AB IF This error occurs when more than the specified number of bits are set to 1 among the receive data in the frame or when the receive data is shorter than the specified data length TIME _ This error occurs when a baton pass was not handed to the host within the monitoring time DATA This error is caused when abnormal code data is received UNDER This error occurs when the internal processing of the send data was not executed
363. tatus of the target station the network status and the relay station status in the case of sending to other network Check if the buffer memory address specified in the REMFR and REMTO instructions exceeds 8000H Check if the network number specified in the REMFR and REMTO instructions represents a PLC to PLC network Check if the host station is data linked when the REMFR or REMTO instruction is executed Confirm the setting of the mode switch Mode switch setting error If the error recurs after resetting the hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Network number setting error Create and write new network parameters to the PLC If the error recurs the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Group number error Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Check if the station number is within a range of 1 to 64 If the error recurs even if the station number is set between 1 and 64 the hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Create and write new network parameters to the PLC DIP switch setting error If the error recurs the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative The hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative The hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative F7CD System error
364. te I O module Select Remote I O in connection destination PLC type for the GX Developer QCPU a BLE i Remote master station Remote O station Remote I O station Remote I O station System monitor Intelligent function module 2 Connect the GX Developer to the CPU module and perform monitoring via remote master station Select Remote I O in connection destination PLC type for the GX Developer and specify the remote I O station to be the object in the connection designation of the online menu Intelligent function module 3 Connect the GX Developer to a another remote I O module and monitor via the remote I O network Select Remote I O in connection destination PLC type for the GX Developer and specify the remote I O station to be the object in the connection designation of the online menu 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 3 Device Test for Remote I O Station The remote I O network can use operations of GX Developer connected to the remote I O station to test the input output devices of the sequence program without affecting the online system To conduct a test without affecting the system register the device to be tested in Forced input output registration cancellation in debug in the online menu For details about operating the GX Developer refer to the operating manual for GX Developer The test is performed on the following items 1 Stops the Y output
365. te password can be changed by setting a new remote password by GX Developer and writing it into the remote I O module The remote password can be canceled by deleting it by GX Developer and writing it into the remote I O module The figure below shows the outline of setting changing and canceling a remote password with the Ethernet module m 1 Set change and cancel a remote password and write it into QU72LP25 GX Developer Ethernet MELSECNET H 2 QCPU QJ71 2 QU72 QJ71 2 LP21 2 LP25 71 N no o o z z fe O ao A 2 Transfer the remote password 3 QJ71E71 checks the remote password to QJ71E71 when the system is powered on or it is reset 1 Set change and cancel a remote GX i password and write it into QU72LP25 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Unlocking and locking the remote password The remote password is unlocked connection is allowed via the modem by the serial communication module or via Ethernet by the Ethernet module When the remote password is matched connection to the remote I O module is allowed The figure below shows the outline of unlocking and locking connection is allowed a remote password with the Ethernet module 2 Enter a remote password when connecting to QJ71E71 and connect to QJU72LP25 after the password is unlocked 4 The remote password is locked when the line is closed GX Developer i Ethernet ME
366. ted SB0000 is off art completed SB0000 is on the stop acknowledgment status of the cyclic ion ot acknowledged SB00071 is off op acknowledged SB0001 is on the stop completion status of the cyclic transmission ot completed SB0001 is off op completed SB0001 is on the startup acknowledgment status of the cyclic ion ot acknowledged SB0002 is off art acknowledged SB0002 is on O station or multiplexed remote sub master 3 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained 4 Minor errors battery error etc are the type of errors that do not affect the CPU operation 5 Serious errors WDT error etc are the type of errors that stop the CPU operation Fatal errors RAM error etc are also the type of errors that stop the CPU operation App 5 Control station Noi station Optical MELSEC Q Remote master station Coaxial Remote I O station rmal ele ele ef App 5 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 1 Special link relay SB list Continued Use permitted prohibited Remote 3 B0051 81 3 B0052 82 Cyclic transmission start completion status Cyclic transmission stop acknowledgment status 3 s BE Cyclic transmission stop Description Indicates the completion status of the cyclic transmission Off Not completed SB0002 is off On Start completed SB0002 is on Indicates the stop acknowledgment statu
367. ted 00 Use only common parameters Designated 01 Common parameters station specific parameters 10 Use only default parameters 11 Default parameters station specific parameters entire system inking stop status SW0054 When the SB0055 is on 84 Parameter information b15 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 0 to 0 0j 1 1 1 1 OFx Parameter error Check the error code in the SW055 When remote I O net Stores the parameter information When the SB0054 and SB0055 are off b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0 0 to 0 0 0 L Intelligent function module parameter 0 No 1 Yes 2 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the last data are retained App 15 App 15 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Table 2 Link special register SW list Continued Use permitted prohibited Control PETOLE Remote I O Name Description 8 A master station x station station Optical Coaxial Optical Coaxial Optical Coaxial Optical Coaxial At the PLC to PLC network SW0055 l Stores the status of the parameters Parameter setting status 0 Normal parameter 85 F 1ormore Abnormal parameter see the error codes in Section 8 3 At the PLC to PLC network Ciirrent contol station Stores the number of the station that actually operates as the O O control station including a sub control station Range 1 to 64 SW0056 When remote I O network 86 Stores the station number controlling
368. tes the baton pass status of each station Not applicable to reserved stations and the station with the maximum station number Baton pass status _ jor higher of each station Off All stations normal On Faulty station exists Turns off when the SW0070 to SW0073 are all 0 Indicates the cyclic transmission status of each station Not applicable to reserved stations and the station with the maximum station number or higher Off All stations are executing data linking On Stations that are not executing data linking exist Turns off when the SW0074 to SW0077 are all 0 Stores the baton pass status of each station Including the host lt Online gt 0 Normal including the stations with the maximum station number and smaller numbers as well as reserved stations 1 1 Abnormal SW0070 lt Offline test gt 112 0 Normal swoo71 1 Abnormal including the stations with the maximum station Baton pass status 113 of a number and smaller numbers as well as reserved stations Swo0072 b15 b14 b13 b12 b3 b2 bi bO C SW0070 115 SW0071 SW0072 SW0073 SB0049 Host data link 73 status 1 SB0070 112 1 Cyclic transmission SB0074 status of each 116 station Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Availability column Optical optical loop Coaxial coaxial bus O Available X Not available 1 Valid only when SB0047 is off When it turns on error the l
369. the PLC parameters as needed 1 Note that the number of intelligent function module parameters initial setting automatic refresh setting that may be set is limited If the number of parameters set exceeds the limited number the remote I O module detects the SP PARA ERROR 3301 error If the error has been detected read write the data of the intelligent function modules using the REMFR REMTO instruction The following is the number of parameters that may be set for initial setting Sum total of the numbers of parameters within the setting ranges of all intelligent function modules lt 512 The following is the number of parameters that may be set for automatic refresh setting Sum total of the numbers of parameters within the setting ranges of all intelligent function modules lt 256 The number of parameters for initial setting is preset to each intelligent function module To confirm the numbers of parameters for initial setting refer to the user s manuals of the corresponding intelligent function modules Refer to Section 6 3 for the way to count the number of parameters for automatic refresh setting A remote master station cannot execute the dedicated instructions for intelligent function module to the intelligent function modules mounted in a remote I O station 3 SPECIFICATIONS p Wo DO MELSEC Q a The CPU uses the X Y LX LY and B W LB LW devices set by the common parameters and the automatic refresh s
370. the bus and duplication of station numbers control stations and remote master stations The setup confirmation test and loop test of network diagnosis are effective Check for faulty cables faulty hardware incorrect wiring and duplication of station numbers control stations and remote master stations Confirm the power supply status of each module to see if it is repeatedly turned on and off Confirm whether network modules in MESLECNET H and MELSECNET 10 modes exist together confirm the control station type Retry after a little while If the error recurs as a result of a retry check for faulty cables faulty hardware Send failure incorrect cable wiring absence of terminating resistor in the case of the bus Baton pass to the host station not and duplication of station numbers control stations and remote master executed stations Wait until SB0047 baton pass status and SB0049 data link status are recovered Retry after a little while If the error recurs as a result of a retry check for faulty cables faulty hardware incorrect cable wiring absence of terminating resistor in the case of the bus Send failure and duplication of station numbers control stations and remote master stations Wait until SB0047 baton pass status and SB0049 data link status are recovered Faulty loop status F115 Improper function code Check for faulty cables faulty hardware incorrect wiring duplication of station F116 Delay
371. the control system The multiplexed remote sub master station control system which is controlling a remote I O station continues the control of the remote I O station even after the multiplexed remote master station standby system returns to the normal status Multiplexed remote master station DMr Multiplexed remote sub master station DSMr Control system Standby system Standby system Control system A aa yE gt Ai Tracking cable Remote I O station R Remote I O station R Remote I O station R The multiplexed remote master function for the redundant system includes the following features Description Reference section 1 Backup function of master When a power supply error or CPU error occurs in the control system The Section 7 11 1 operation on system QnPRHCPU in the standby system continues the operation of the redundant switching between control system by switching to the control system With the system switching the system and standby system multiplexed remote sub master station switched from the standby system to the control system takes over master operation to continue the control of remote I O stations Master operation by the The network module mounted with the QNPRHCPU that has started up as the Section 7 11 2 station that has started up as control system operates as the master station The network module mounted with the control system the QnPRHCPU that has started up as the
372. the module do not pull the cables by hand When disconnecting a cable with a connector hold the connector to the module by hand and pull it out to remove the cable When disconnecting a cable connected to a terminal block loosen the screws on the terminal block first before removing the cable If a cable is pulled while being connected to the module it may cause the module to malfunction or damage the module and cables Setup and Maintenance Precautions A CAUTION e Please read this manual thoroughly and confirm the safety enough before starting online operations especially program modifications forced outputs and operating status modifications which are performed by connecting GX Developer via the MELSECNET H network system to a CPU module running on another station Performing incorrect online operations may damage the machinery or result in accidents Never disassemble or modify the module This may cause breakdowns malfunctions injuries or fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone more than 25cm 9 85 inch away in all directions of the PLC Not doing so can cause a malfunction Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may damage the module or result in malfunctions For the remote I O network systems of function version D or later online module change can be performed However the modules which can
373. the output of the remote I O station when there is an error use the detailed I O allocation settings in the PLC parameters for the remote I O station to set the Error time output mode settings to Hold Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual for more information about setting the PLC parameters If the remote master station has a remote I O station that has experienced a data link communication error or communication stop it saves the received data X B W from the remote I O station in the immediately preceding data 2 Automatic return function By using this function when a station that has been disconnected from the data link due to a data link error returns to the normal status it automatically returns to the system to resume the data link When the data link of a remote I O station is resumed the D LINK LED is on the remote I O station resets all the mounted modules If data link is resumed by connecting disconnecting the link cable the module is not reset When the parameters of a remote I O station are changed then those of the remote master station are changed the remote master station is reset or the remote I O station is reset powered off and then on or reset switch is turned on the modules will be reset when the remote I O station returns to the system to resume the data link Consequently even if the output setting under a CPU error is set to HOLD retention in an output module digital analog conversion module and
374. the redundant power supply modules mounted on the redundant base unit Hardware fault of the redundant power supply module Contact your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Read the error common information at the GX Developer and check and or change the module that corresponds to the numerical value module number there Alternatively monitor special registers D1400 to SD1431 using GX Developer and check and replace the module where the bit of its data is 1 Do not use the QA1S6LB or QA6LB as the base unit e Make the PLC parameter s I O assignment setting again so it is consistent with the actual status of the intelligent function module and the Remote I O module Delete the switch setting in the I O assignment setting of the PLC parameter Remove the QI60 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Common Individual Error Code SDO Information SD16 to SD26 Information SD5 to SD15 Error Message SP UNIT LAY ERR Module No SP UNIT LAY ERR Module No MELSEC Q LED Status CPU Operation Statuses At power ON At reset At power ON At reset 7 Diagnostic REM ERR Timing SP UNIT LAY ERR At power ON At reset 7 SP UNIT LAY ERR SP UNIT LAY ERR At power ON At reset 7 At power ON At reset 7 SP UNIT LAY ERR Module No At power ON At reset 7 PARAMETER ERROR File name Parameter number
375. the result with GX Developer or a sequence program using the special link registers Host communication status SW0047 gt 1F Offline test Cause of communication interruption SW0048 gt 2 Offline test Offline test status on requesting side SWOOAC 9 Hardware test Offline test results on requesting side SWOOAD 0 Normal 1orlarger Error code For details on how to check the error contents see Chapter 8 If two or more modules are installed the testing status and the result of each module can be checked by adding 200k to the corresponding device number 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 8 Cable Connections 4 8 1 Optical loop system 1 Precautions when connecting a The type of cables that can be used will vary according to the distance between stations Interstation distance m QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 QJ72LP25 25 10 Mbps QJ71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 QJ71LP21G QJ71LP21GE QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72LP25GE 25 Mbps SI fiber optic cable L type 500 Old type A 2P L _Htype SI fiber optic cable 500 Must not be used Must not be used Must not be used 2000 Must not be used Must not be used Must not be used 2000 b When optical fiber cable is connected there are restrictions for the bending radius of the cable Check the cable used for specific details c Maintain the bending radius of the optical fiber cable within the allowable range usin
376. ting when the intelligent function module buffer memory data is automatically refreshed to the remote I O module data register D that data is used if there data transfer to link register W It is also used when link register data W data is transferred to data register D 5 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q When the intelligent function module buffer memory is located in several different areas the forwarding parameter between devices are convenient when you wish to combine them for access Intelligent function Master module CPU module module Remote I O module Buffer Link register W memory MAN MELSECNET H 1 The buffer memory is refreshed to remote I O module link register W by the automatic refreshing of the intelligent function module parameters 2 2 The buffer memory is transferred from link register W to data register D by forwarding parameter between devices 3 The remote master station can read and write the remote I O module data register D using 1 read write instruction If the remote master station makes direct access to the intelligent function module buffer memory using REMFR REMTO instructions the REMFR REMTO instructions will implement several cycles of the buffer memory area Intelligent function Master module CPU module module Remote I O module MW Buffer Buffer memory memory ZZLZA are ASSY MELSECNET H
377. tings zeon dina ti ieee aa os ain we aaah 7 18 7 8 VO Assignment FUNCTION scai enana aeai a a AR eaa NaS a R A A E a a 7 19 7 9 Stopping Restarting the Cyclic Transmission and Stopping Link Refreshing Network Test 7 20 7 10 Multiplexed remote master function QNPHCPU only ceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeesaeeeaeesas 7 21 7 11 Multiplexed remote master function for redundant system QNPRHCPU only 7 36 7 11 1 Backup function of master operation on system switching between control system and StaMGDY SVSUOI fsecsuceesceeeddsseasutadsctyvcesscattes a sa eaeaeee tas beeyasamenvte nena eer er eens 7 37 7 11 2 Master operation by the station that has started up as the control system eeeeeeeeeeeeteees 7 38 7 11 3 System switching request function of Control system 0 0 ce eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetteeteeetieeseetieetieeeneeteee 7 39 7 11 4 Access function by specifying either the control system or standby system cceeeeeeeeeeee 7 41 fA2 Remote password sa scent at hee hee Bae eee Bn dk ere ae ee i eee 7 42 8 1 Network Diagnostics Network MOMitOr cccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeeseesneeaeeeatenas 8 2 aT TAOSU ATOM AT ON ec Fes cas cok aides dca gid evan did agi Saas Sta eA Sevan did agi Seas A Sta cid evade agi deat 8 4 8 1 2 Other station information ceccecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee see seesee a a 8 6 3 1 3Networkumonitor detalls er Trisetaria hdcevated dact
378. tion cccccccccccssseeesesseeeeessaes 6 12 RECV instruction cccccccccssecesssseeeeeseeeeees 6 13 RECVS instruction c cccccccccccsseeesseeeesnees 6 13 Refresh parameter 2 c cccescceeceeesteeeetees 5 18 REMER instruction cccccccessseeeees 6 12 7 3 REMTO instruction cccccceeeeeees 6 12 7 3 REQ instruction ccccccccsssecesssseeeeesseeeeees 6 13 Routing FUNCTION oeiia aaa 7 2 RRUN instruction ccccccecccesseeeeesseeeeeees 6 14 RSTOP instruction cccccccsesseesesseeeeesnaes 6 14 RTMRD instruction ccccccsseeeeeeseeeeenees 6 14 RTMWR inStruction cccccccccesseeeessseeeeees 6 15 Index 1 S Special register SD for remote VO Station rk Bo Al ceed App 31 Special relay SM for remote VO station iist enoti App 28 Supplemental setting ceseeeeeeeee 5 15 Switch setting Station setting Switch cee 4 2 4 5 Mode setting SWitCh eseeeee 4 2 4 5 T Test Self loopback test ccecceseeeeeeeetees 4 12 Forward loop reverse loop test 4 22 Internal self loopback test 4 13 Hardware test ccccceseseeeeseeeeeeeeeseees 4 14 Transient transmission ccccceeeeeeeeeees 7 2 W WRITE i struCtiomia i a 6 12 Z ZNRD instruction ccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees App 2 ZNWR instruction ccccceecee
379. tion 5 1 2 Groupon S G gt S i Mode Section 5 4 2 Common parameters CO Section 5 1 3 Auxiliary setting PA Section 5 1 4 Station specific parameters o Secti Pp A Section 5 1 6 Interlink transmission parameters rr eee ele Valid module during other station access Routing parameters Always set A Default setting A Set as needed x No need to set 1 Default value is not set in LX LY Set refresh parameters x2 Refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC Network SH 080049 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 Table 2 2 shows the setting items on the remote I O module of the remote I O station R and the parameter setting items on the GX Developer Table 2 2 Remote I O station setting items Remote I O station R Network module switch MODE Section 4 2 2 Parameter setting on GX Developer PLC system seting EA PLC RAS setting a WWOassignment AT Operation setting A Section 5 2 4 Ethenetseting A CClinkseting AT Remote passwordsetting A Section 7 12_ GX Configurator setting Initial seting A Auto refresh setting A Always set A Default setting A Set as needed x No need to set x3 Refer to QCPU User s Manual Functional Explanation Program Fundamentals SH 080484ENG 4 Refer to Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic SH 080009 Note that interrupt setting is not available 5 R
380. tion No 1 Effective only when SB0047 is OFF When this signal is turned ON error the data just before ON are held The link special register stores minor errors caused by the factors below in addition to power supply disconnection When an error specified as Continue in the operation mode under error condition in the PC RAS settings of parameters fuse blown or I O module verification error occurs 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q c Precautions on configuring a redundant power supply 1 If either of the power supply modules fails and it needs to be replaced in a remote I O station including redundant power supply replace the other power supply module as well in order to prevent the potential accidents Also it is recommended to replace power supply modules five years after the remote I O station starts to run 2 For the Q64RP power supply modules for the redundant power supply system it is recommended to supply AC power from one of them and to supply power from the other via UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply Use the on line UPS or line interactive UPS of which voltage distortion is less than 5 Or use the off line UPS Mitsubishi FREQUPS F Series with serial No P or later Example FW F10 0 3K 0 5k Do not use the off line UPS other than above 3 When mounting modules onto the Q38RB or Q68RB redundant power supply base unit make sure that the sum of 5VDC current consumption of them is within 8 5 A the rated
381. to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers ates and stores the number of UNDER errors on the oop side for the optical loop or the number of UNDER errors of the coaxial bus for the coaxial bus Other than 0 Number of errors 3 UNDER on the forward SWO00B8 loop side coaxial bus jates and stores the number of CRC errors on the CRC on the forward loop forward loop side for the optical loop or the number of CRC side coaxial bus CRC errors of the coaxial bus for the coaxial bus Other than 0 Number of errors jates and stores the number of OVER errors on the loop side for the optical loop or the number of OVER errors of the coaxial bus for the coaxial bus Other than 0 Number of errors 3 OVER on the forward SWOOBA loop side coaxial bus ates and stores the number of short frame errors on the forward loop side for the optical loop or the number of short frame errors of the coaxial bus for the coaxial bus Other than 0 Number of errors 3 Short frame on the SWOOBB forward loop side coaxial bus short frame Accumulates and stores the number of AB IF errors on the forward loop side for the optical loop or the number of AB IF errors of the coaxial bus for the coaxial bus Other than 0 Number of errors Accumulates and stores the number of TIME errors on the forward loop side for the optical loop or the number of TIME errors of the coaxial bus for the coaxial bus Other than 0
382. topping data link make the check by SW009C to 9F Refer to Section 8 2 8 for details 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION 4 10 2 Setup confirmation test MELSEC Q The switch settings of the network module can be checked with this test The following three types of items can be checked 1 Control station duplicate check lt Not performed on remote I O network 2 Station number duplicate check 3 Matching between the network number set for the station to which GX Developer is connected and the network number set with a network parameter of the host For example in the following system when the Setup confirmation test is conducted by the GX Developer connected to remote master station the monitor screen shown below is displayed and the setting status of each station can be checked Station 1 is indicating that there is a duplication in station number settings Parameter settings Remote master station GX Developer Setup confirmation test Network info Network NET H Loop Type Remote l O master station Module No 1 Control station No 0 Remote master station Normal Execution results Station No 0 Network No Group No Station No Total No of stations Station No 2 Reserved station Reserved station Station Station No 3 No 4 Setting check test Test method Object module Parameter designation Module 1 C All stations designation f C
383. tor is detached from an F type connector 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 5 Transient transmission enabled even at CPU module error By using this function the network module can continue the transient transmission even if an error that stops the CPU module occurs while the system is operating The description of the error of the corresponding station can be checked from other stations using GX Developer OPERATION ERROR QCPU Power supply Power supply He a a a a EE E AE ak EE ELE EE Power supply Power supply PLC diagnostics Eal PLC status PLC operation status PLC operation STOP switch RUN Present Error Monitor tun stop Present Error LINK PARA ERROR 2004 12 12 Stop monitor Enor Jump Help Error log Enorlog _Clearlog EnorJump Hep No Error message Year Month Day Time The following table lists the operations of the cyclic and transient transmissions for each CPU module status Battery error Annunciator error ON etc Minor error Continued Enabled Continue error Parameter error Medium Instruction code error etc Stopped Enabled error Stop error CPU reset etc MAIN CPU down Major error Stopped Disabled Accessing the master station from GX Developer or like using the transient function will result in a communication error 3 19 3 19 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 6 Checking the transi
384. transmission common parameters intelligent function module parameters Automatic refresh object device W When the intelligent function module is mounted toa nearby slot of the CPU module the same kind of sequence program can be created In a way different from method 1 it is also possible to set the intelligent parameters in the same was as setting for the host When the intelligent function module is mounted to a nearby slot of the CPU module the same kind of sequence program can be created Data can be communicated only when needed By cyclic transmission common parameters intelligent function module parameters Automatic refresh object device D Remote O station parameters parameters for transmitting between devices Dedicated link instructions READ WRITE Intelligent function module parameters Automatic refresh object device D In communication methods a c and d when there is communicating between remote master station and remote I O station the network parameters are written to the remote master station and the PC parameters and intelligent function module parameters are written to the remote I O station The device range for communicating with each remote I O station is set by the remote master station common parameters PC parameters written to the remote I O station will not cause problems with the intelligent function module communication even with the default settings Change the settings of
385. tsubishi representative The hardware of the network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 3 2 Error codes corresponding to CPU module detected on remote I O station The remote I O station performs some of the same processes as the CPU module Accordingly the remote I O station detects the error codes 1 2 in the same way they are detected by the CPU module When an error occurs the error code error message or other such communication can be read by the GX Developer For details about operating the GX Developer refer to the GX Developer operator s manual 1 CPU module error codes are classified into minor moderate major errors as shown below e Minor error Errors that may allow the CPU module to continue the operation e g battery error Error code 1300 to 10000 e Moderate error Errors that may cause the CPU module to stop the operation e g WDT error Error code 1300 to 10000 e Major error Errors that may cause the CPU module to stop the operation e g RAM error Error code 1000 to 1299 Determine the error level i e whether the operation can be continued or stopped by referring to Operating Statuses of CPU described in Section 8 3 2 1 Error Code List 2 If any error code not listed in this section is detected please consult your local Mitsubishi representative TROUBLESHOOTIN A MELSEC Q 1 Error code list The following s
386. ttings Network type start I O No network No total number of slave stations Common parameters redundant settings and other settings Write the parameters to the CPU and perform other operations Remote I O station parameter settings 1 1 i System settings RAS settings I O allocations Intelligent parameters others e Writing parameters to remote I O module Connect cables Offline tests from GX Developer Forward loop reverse loop test Network diagnostics from GX Developer Loop test optical loop test only Setup confirmation test Communication test and other tests Programming and debugging ures that are required to perform the data link petit Section 4 2 to Section 4 5 a a Section 4 6 PEE Section 4 7 A Section 5 1 ponent Section 5 2 Set as needed Perea Section 4 8 k RDS Section 4 9 ota Section 4 10 Peate Chapter 6 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 2 Network Module Names and Settings 4 2 1 QJ71LP21 QU71LP21 25 QU71LP21G QU71LP21GE QJ71BR11 Remote master station Optical loop module 2 STATION No factory default setting 1 Station number setting switch This switch sets the station number on the same network QJ71LP21 25 TPASS DUNK 1 LED displays Setting Description Remote master station setting Setting of a remote sub master station When using the QJ71BR11 setting any
387. ttre Section 3 2 2 2 Loopback function Optical loop system sss srt Section 3 2 2 3 Station detach function Coaxial bus systems lt scr ttre Section 3 2 2 4 Transient transmission enabled even at CPU module error Section 3 2 2 5 Checking the transient transmission abnormal direction time Section 3 2 2 6 Diagnostic functions Pe Wee E ie he WAR Be RSW SR SRR SS et ay D FAT AN I as a Section 3 2 2 7 Redundant power supply on a remote I O station tcc e Section 3 2 2 8 Online module change in a remote I O station sss tr tere Section 3 2 2 9 Application Transient transmission function Dedicated link Reading writing remote I O station intelligent function functions Non periodic communication instructions module buffer memory REMFR REMTO Section 7 1 1 1 i Remote I O station system monitor ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eh Section 7 2 nae Device test for remote 1 0 station E n EE E EEEE E E EEE EE Section 7 3 Multiplex transmission function Optical loop system sss ttre Section 7 4 Return sequence station number setting function ttt t ttt ttt ttt ttt teens Section 7 5 Reserved station function Ro al aa EA Teh ne ce Ew EEA cel ah a ae EMER eS ABR at Ge sect ep leds ee Reena te oaks Section 7 6 Interrupt settings spasa tay ta pre eE ar aa a gi e a aa e a ee aa wa ae aea fee haa a weit a a a e o A a ee eee a S Section 7 7
388. tus timer SB49 H K3 RT tT X Host data 1 msec link status timer SH70 0 H K4 24 H T2 X Station No 1 1 msec baton pass status timer SW74 0 H K3 29 13 gt Station No 1 1 msec cyclic transmission timer status SH78 0 H K3 amm WO X Station No 1 1 msec parameter timer signal status B20 10 Ti T2 T3 T4 _ 39 it 4 4 At NC No HO 7 Network 1msec 1msec 1msec 1msec 1 msec module timer timer timer timer timer status PLS M10 J 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS NOMO Initial data read M10 7 49 PLS Mi2 J M11 Initial process request M12 X200 a 66 NOV Ko D1 J Module READY ZP RENTO yi KI KI HO KO DI Ki M100 M100 89 JH SET 209 Operating conditions set request X200 Y209 X209 91 H F RST 209 J Module Operating Operating Operating READY conditions conditions conditions set request set completed set request Setting analog output permit M150 95 201 J Analog CH1 output output permit permit prohibit request 7202 X CH2 output permit prohibit Digital value write process M151 X200 13 H H WOVP K500 D11 Digital Module CH1 digital value READY value setting request LMOVP K1000 D12 CH2 digital value CZP RENTO ui K2 KI HO KI D11 K2 M110 CH1 digital value Error code read an reset process M153 X20F 152 ZP RENFR Ji K3 KI HO K19 D13 K1 M120 J Error Error Read reset generated co
389. u Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 622 160 60 Fax 81 3 622 160 75 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA AUTOMATION 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 83 GEVA AUSTRIA UAB UTU POWEL LITHUANIA Kazpromautomatics Ltd KAZAKHSTAN Wiener Stra e 89 Savanoriu pr 187 2 Scladskaya Str AT 2500 Baden LT 2053 Vilnius KAZ 470046 Karaganda Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 370 0 52323 101 Phone 7 3212 50 11 50 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 370 0 52322 980 Fax 7 3212501150 e mail office geva at e mail powel utu lt e mail info kpakz com TEHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA Avtomatika Sever Ltd RUSSIA Oktjabrskaya 16 5 Ap 704 Cuza Voda 36 1 81 Lva Tolstogo Str 7 Off 311 BY 220030 Minsk MD 2061 Chisinau RU 197376 St Petersburg Phone 375 0 17 210 4626 Phone 373 0 2 562 263 Phone 7 812 1183 238 Fax 375 0 17 210 4626 Fax 373 0 2 562 263 Fax 7 812 1183 239 e mail tehnikon belsonet net e mail intehsis mdl net e mail as avtsev spb ru Koning amp Hartman B V BELGIUM Koning amp Hartman B V NETHERLANDS Consys Researchpark Zellik Pontbeeklaan Donauweg 2 B Promyshlennaya St 42 RUSSIA 43 NL 1000 AK Amsterdam RU 198099 St Petersburg BE 1731 Brussels Phone 31 0 20 587 76 00 Phone 7 812 325 3653 Phone 32 0 2 467 17 44 Fax 31 0 20 587 76 05 Fax 7 812 147 2055 Fax 32 0 2 4
390. ued Error No Description of error Forced switching impossible error F840 Low speed cyclic parameter error F841 System error F842 System error System error F901 System error F902 System error F903 System error F904 System error F905 System error CRC error offline test Overrun error offline test FD0o3 JAB IF error offline test TIME error offline test Data error offline test FDO6 Under error offline test FDO7 FD08 Send failure coaxial bus system FDO9 Loop status changed offline loop test FDOA Unstable communication offline loop test Corrective measure Check if the following conditions are met e The system is a multiplexed remote I O network system e Check if Return as a standby station is set as the parameter for the master station e The host station is operating as a master station e The operating sub master station is in data linking Create and write network parameters to the PLC If the error recurs the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Create and write network parameters to the PLC If the error recurs the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Create and write network parameters to the PLC If the error recurs the hardware of the CPU or network module is faulty Contact your local Mitsubishi representative The hardware of the network module is faulty C
391. ule optical loop type ja at 2 QU72LP25G _ QJ72LP25G MELSECNET H Network Module optical loop type QU72LP25GE_ QJ72LP25GE MELSECNET H Network Module optical loop type QJ72BR15 MELSECNET H Network Module coaxial cable bus type F type connector A6GRCON F For the coaxial bus system terminal resistors 75 Q are required in the network terminal stations Terminal resistors are not included with the QJU71BR11 QU72BR15 they must be purchased separately For a list of the model and how to use the terminal resistors refer to Section 4 8 2 QJ72BR15 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 OVERVIEW The MELSECNETHH system includes the following 2 types of networks 1 PLC to PLC network for communications between a control station and normal stations 2 Remote I O network for communications between a remote master station and remote I O stations This is the manual to read when building a remote I O network for MELSECNET H systems hereafter called MELSECNET H If you are building a MELSECNET H network for PLC to PLC network please refer to the Q corresponding MELSECNET H network system reference manual PLC to PLC network SH 080049 The QOO0JCPU QOO0CPU and Q01CPU cannot configure a remote I O network in a MELSECNET H network system The previous network called MELSECNET 10H is now called MELSECNET H 1 1 Overview The MELSECNET H remote I O network system has more functionality and capacity than the former network
392. urred If a remote I O station has experienced a communication error or communication stop the remote master station saves the immediately preceding data X B W from the communication error station and communication stop station The remote I O station output Y is set to all points off A communication stop station is a station that has had its cyclic transmission stopped by peripheral equipment Remote master station Remote I O station All points off Location of storage 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 4 SB SW when a communication error station communication stop station occurs on the network The status of whether there are any communication error communication stop stations on the network can be checked with the link special relay register SB SW Use them as interlocks for programs Link special relays and registers Link special or Signal status Description relaylregister The baton The baton Shows the baton pass execution status of the host pass is being pass is executed stopped SB49 Shows the cyclic transmission status of the host Normal Abnormal Occurrence Shows the baton pass execution status of all The baton 0 stations including the host However it only shows pass is being rO SB70 f communicati the status for the number of stations set with executed on i on sto parameters all stations p station Shows the baton pass execution status of each The
393. us Network activated F102 Initial status Network activated F103 Initial status during online test Wait until SB0047 baton pass status and SB0049 data link status turn off iti normal F104 Initial status Control sub control station shift F105 Initial status Parameters being processed Shift from failed control station to sub Check the condition of the control station s power supply and of the cables and control station the status of the control station CPU module Check the line status for a faulty cable or a missing terminating resistor as well as the stations that are not powered on F107 Baton pass error baton lost In the case of the PLC to PLC network when transient transmission is executed frequently and the link scan time may exceed 200 ms adjust the transient setting values to reduce the link scan time Check for duplicate station numbers and control stations with the setup F108 Baton pass error duplicate baton ponnimation tost p p Check for faulty cables wire breakage poor connector connections connection F106 errors uninstalled or loose terminal resistors etc Wait until SB0047 bat tat d SB0049 data link stat F109 Initial status during online test EDOR baton passstatus an Jata linkistatus ate lt During execution of an online test gt Wait until SB0047 baton pass status and SB0049 data link status are 10A Initial status online test offline loop test recovered lt During executi
394. us of each station including the host x2 0 Executing cyclic transmission including the station with swoo74 the maximum station number and smaller number as well 116 as reserved stations swo07s 1 Cyclic transmission not executed Cyclic transmission status 117 sae station b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi b0 O O O O O O O woo76 Swoo74 pee eT PEET 118V sw0075 32 31 30 29 21 ie SW0076 48 37 swoor7 perf an eater pees 0 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the parameter communication status of each station 0 Executing communication other than parameter 2 communication including the stations with the maximum swo078 station number and smaller numbers as well as reserved stations 120 j a swo079 Parameter 1 Executing parameter communication 121 communication status of b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b3 b2 bi bO x x x x Swoo7a each station swore fre s pue efes e e e nay efo eae e ffe e e roe swoora ae Tar we or e om Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the parameter status of each station 0 Normal parameter including the maximum station number and smaller numbers as well as reserved stations 124 1 Abnormal parameter SW007D P t tat f b15 b14 b13 b12 to b4 b3 b2 bi b0O arameter error status o 2Y ien station Swoore frie as Te Ace a R aa x x x x n sworo ae arf oo ae fe ferfa fe e 126 SW007E Nene pa ar e aso or as a5 SW007F
395. ven if the GX Developer is directly connected to a remote I O station GX Developer QCPU Remote master station Remote I O station Remote I O station Fa nic GX Developer GX Developer Q64AD When the network seems to be faulty it can be diagnosed through GX Developer connected to the remote master station or remote I O station b If the GX Developer is connected to a remote I O station it will not affect the system operating so user program network function testing can be done online It shuts out input X from the input module on the remote I O station and can turn input X on or off using the GX Developer test This allows testing of the remote master station input program to be performed In addition it shuts of output Y form the remote master station and can turn remote I O station output Y on and off using the GX Developer test This allows testing of the wires for the output module on the remote I O station to be performed 7 Increased ease of network configuration in combination with Q Abbreviations corresponding GX Developer a The network parameters can easily be set by visualising pull down menus dialogue boxes etc b The settings of network Nos group numbers and operation modes have been simplified so that these values can be designated only through software settings Network parameters Ze Pull down menu Module 1 d rome hF Network type MNET H Remote master tone Bi Starti
396. verse loop side e Loop status Normal abnormal e Loopback Unused executed station number ig displayed in case of bus type 8 Link scan time SWO06B SWO006C SWO06D Displays the maximum minimum current value of the link scan time of the host Unit ms Station type f Control station Normal station Constant link scan Measured value No Displays the maximum minimum current value the link scan actually took Measured value Constant link Displays the maximum minimum current s scan 2 ms value the link scan actually took Communication information 9 Communication status SB0047 Displays the communication status of the host e Data link being executed SB0047 Off Data link stopped SB0047 On On the multiplexed remote sub master station link information and communication information are not displayed 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 1 2 Other station information With the other station information the status of the communication data link parameters CPU loop and reserved station status of each station can be checked The buttons 3 and 7 can be selected only when diagnosis is executed from the remote master station Other station information Network info Network NET H Loop Network No 1 Type Remote 1 0 master station Group No a Module No 1 Station No 0 Other station info EnG Communication status of each station CENNE Remote master station Normal 1 Ney ELS
397. ware error Contact your local Mitsubishi representative 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Common Individual LED Status CPU Error Code Diagnostic Error Message Information Information Operation Era SD0 REM ERR Timing SD5 to SD15 SD16 to SD26 Statuses At power ON 3103 LINK PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Off On Stop LD At reset At power ON 3104 LINK PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Off On Stop g2 At reset At power ON 3105 LINK PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Off On Stop 25 At reset i At power ON 3106 LINK PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Off On Stop g3 At reset At power ON 3107 LINK PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Off On Stop 563 At reset At power ON 3300 SP PARA ERROR File name Parameter number off On Stop At 2 rese 2 A remote I O station is reset by the following 1 Pressing the reset switch of the remote station 2 Resetting the CPU module on the remote master station or turning it to RUN from STOP when the remote I O station is in the following status e The remote I O station has not been reset after modification of some remote I O station parameters e A stop error has occurred on the remote I O station 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action Although the number of modules has been set to 1 or greater f e Correct and write the network parameters number in the Et
398. will not be completed When the dedicated link instruction is used to access the other station PLC during network diagnosis the execution of the dedicated link instruction may be delayed After taking the following measures perform network diagnosis processing and execute the dedicated link instruction e Execute the COM instruction e Using special register SD315 secure 2 to 3ms as the communication processing time If an SREAD SWRITE instruction is erroneously executed to a remote I O station the notification device to the object station is ignored and the it is processed in the same manner as READ WRITE 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 6 5 Using the Link Special Relays SB Link Special Registers SW The data linking information is stored in the link special relays SB registers SW They can be used by the sequence programs or used for investigating faulty areas and the causes of errors by monitoring them The following table shows which SB and SW can be used to check which information For more details see Appendixes 2 and 3 1 The following SB and SW provide the information about the host SB004AH SW0031H SW0033x SW0035xH f ER i SW00371 Execution status of the dedicated link instruction SW0039H SW003BxH SW003DuH SW003FuH SB0040H SW0040nH SB0042h to 44H SW0042h to 46H Setting status of the network module SB0058H SW0054 to 57H SB0064H SW0059h to 5Bu SBO068h to 69H SW00644 to 68H 2 The following SB and S
399. xed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station Indicates whether the send receive device numbers SW01C8 to SW01CF of the remote sub master Send receive device aa _ _ Station are valid or invalid SB01CB_ number valid invalid OFF Invalid ON_ Valid swoicc Send LB device For remote master station The send LB device number to the remote sub master station is stored number For remote sub master station The send LB device number to the remote master station is stored Receive LB device For remote master station The receive LB device number from the remote sub master station is stored status SW01CD number For remote sub master station The receive LB device number from the remote master station is stored SWOICE Send LW device For remote master station The send LW device number to the remote sub master station is stored number For remote sub master station The send LW device number to the remote master station is stored SWO1CF Receive LW device For remote master station The receive LW device number from the remote sub master station is stored number For remote sub master station The receive LW device number from the remote master station is stored The SW01CC to SW01CF values are valid only when SB01C8 is ON In this example the following values are stored into the corresponding link special registers Target Station Swo01CC SWO01CD SWO1CE SWO1CF Multiplexed remote masterst
400. xplanations of each item indicate the link special relay SB or the link special register SW used for monitoring 8 3 8 3 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 1 1 Host information 8 5 6 7 9 MELSEC Q With the host information the information of the entire network of the connection destination and the status of the host can be checked MELSECNET II 10 H diagnostics Host information Network info 1 2 3 4 Network type SB0040 SB0044 SB0057 SW0046 Displays the network type of the host e MELSECNETHH loop remote I O master station e MELSECNETHH bus remote I O master station Network No SW0040 Displays the network No of the host Group No SW0041 Displays the group No of the host is displayed in case of remote I O network Station No SW0042 Displays the station number of the host 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Link information 5 Mode SW0043 Displays the operation mode of the host Online Offline debug mode Offline Forward loop test Reverse loop test Station to station test Station that executes tests Station to station test Station to be tested 6 F loop status SB0091 Loopback station SB0099 Displays the status of the forward loop side e Loop status Normal abnormal e Loopback Unused executed station number is displayed in case of bus type 7 R loop status SB0095 Loopback station SBOO09A Displays the status of the re
401. xtended mode Off All normal stations are set to the MELSECNET H 3 Extended mode Network type consistency On There is a normal station set to the MELSECNET H 3 Remote sub master SB01C4 station switching acceptance status ae ee OJO O olofofo olofofo BREE BREE lele Ea Re Ee eae eae Ee ea Ee SB anle mode or MELSECNET 10 mode O O O x x x When the control station is in the MELSECNET H mode or MELSECNET 10 mode Off All normal stations are set to the MELSECNET H mode or MELSECNET 10 mode On There is a normal station set to the MELSECNET H Extended mode Indicates the operation mode of each station s CPU Off CPUs of all stations in backup mode Redundant system status On Separate mode 1 excluding reserved stations and stations of the number exceeding the maximum This relay turns off when all of SW01F4 to SW01F7 are 0 Indicates the pairing setting status of each station Redundant system status Off No pairing setting 2 On Pairing set station exists This relay turns off when all of SW01F8 to SWO1FB are 0 Indicates the operation status of each station s CPU control system standby system Off Control system CPUs on all stations On Standby system CPU exists excluding reserved stations and stations after the maximum station number This relay turns off when all of SWO1FC to SWO1FF are 0 3 SBO1F4 500 3 SB01F8 504 Redundant system status 3 3 Valid
402. y class D class 3 or higher Failure to do so may cause malfunctions e When connecting cables to the terminal block for external power supply check the rated voltage and terminal layout of the product for correct wiring Connecting a cable to power supply of different rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or fault e Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque Loose tightening may lead to a short circuit fire or malfunction e Solder coaxial cable connectors properly Incomplete soldering may result in malfunctioning e Be careful not to let foreign particles such as chaff and wire chips get inside the module They may cause a fire mechanical breakdown or malfunction e The top surface of the module is covered with a protective film to prevent foreign objects such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring work Do not remove this film until all the wiring work is complete Before operating the system be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation e Make sure to place the communication and power cables to be connected to the module in a duct or fasten them using a clamp If the cables are not placed in a duct or not fastened with a clamp their positions may become unstable and may move or they may be pulled inadvertently This may damage the module and the cables or cause the module to malfunction because of faulty cable connections e When disconnecting the communication and power cables from
403. y setting 1 Station setting switch TRASS 1 LED indicator Station numbers can be set inside the same network ERR section Setting Contents 0 Setting error The red ERR LED turns ON Valid setting range When using the QJ72BR15 2 1 to 64 setting any of 33 to 64 will result in a setting error However the red ERR LED will not turn ON 65 to 99 Setting error The red ERR LED turns ON 4 IN OUT connector For connector for optical fiber le IN Reverse loop sending t IN Forward loop receiving OUT Forward loop sending t OUT Reverse loop receiving 5 MODE Factory setting 0 Mode setting switch Sets the operating mode a QU72LP25G QJ72LP25GE QJ72BR15 Setting Contents QJ72BR15 i RUN Ei 0 On line TPASS EEN 1 LED indicator 1 Self return test ERR L ERR section 2 Internal self return test 3 Hardware test 4 to F Prohibited Optical loop module 2 b QU72LP25 25 Setting Contents 0 Online Self return test 10 Mbps 3 Internal self return test used W Nj gt 6 Hardware test Online Parameter mode selection is enabled 5 Self return test 25 Mbps 7 6 Internal self return test used 7 Hardware test 8 to F Prohibited 6 RESET switch QJ72BR15 Resets the remote I O station hardware 1 7 Coaxial connector Coaxial cable bus module For connecting F type c
404. ystem system A C24 NET 10 H NET I CC Link Ethemet or system B Accessing other station For the details of GX Developer operation refer to the operation manual of GX Developer 7 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 7 12 Remote password The remote password function is the function for preventing a remote user from illegally connecting to a remote I O module and PLC CPU The remote password function can be used by setting a remote password for a remote I O module If a remote password has been set up the serial communication module and Ethernet module check the remote password when a connection request is issued from a remote user to a remote I O module and PLC CPU The remote password set for the PLC CPU of the remote master station does not affect the remote passwords of the remote I O stations a Setting changing and cancelling a remote password 1 Setting a remote password Set a remote password on the remote password setting screen of GX Developer Write the remote password to be set by connecting GX Developer with the target remote I O module directly The remote I O module transfers the remote password to the specified serial communication module and Ethernet module when the system is powered on or the remote I O module is reset 2 Changing and Cancelling the remote password By connecting GX Developer with a remote I O module the remote password of the connected remote I O module can be changed and cancelled The remo
405. ystem switching the network module mounted in the multiplexed remote master station of the new standby system stops master operation and the multiplexed remote sub master station of the new control system takes over the master operation to continue the control of remote I O stations Multiplexed remote master station DMR Multiplexed remote sub master station DSMr Control system Standby system Standby system Control system execution of master operation Tracking cable Remote I O station R Remote I O station R Remote I O station R The transient transmission executed when the master operation station is switched or returns to the system may be unsuccessfully completed Execute the transient transmission again if it is unsuccessfully completed b The sub master station always receives the cyclic transmission data remote station to master station X B and W sent by remote I O stations even while the master station operates normally in order to continue the control of the remote I O stations smoothly when master operation is switched c The multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station always transfer data to each other through a tracking cable tracking in order to continue the control of remote I O stations smoothly when master operation is switched When tracking the link special relay and link special register do not track the link special relays SB0020 to SBO1FF and l

Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents